Fall/Winter 1985
$1.0 0
photo & video aftessory INC catalog AI
WATCH FOR
SLR LENSES pages 2, 8,9
SPECIAL "DEDUCT"
DISCOUNTS THROUGHOUT CATALOG Details on page 25 GADGET BAGS, CASES pages 3, 36, 42
7.5:1 Ratio 28-210 Zoom
CREATIVE LENS ATTACHMENTS
VISIT OUR STORES
aken With Fantasy Filters
LIGHTING pages 10-20
PHo ON E TOLL FREE See page 24 for details
Ultimate SLR Case DUPLICATING pages 27.29
EXPOSURE METERS pages 11, 17, 18, 24A
Extension Bellows/Duplicator BACKGROUND MATERIALS
Hand-Painted Canvas page 4
AUDIO VISUAL ACCESSORIES pages 30.35
Expotrol Meter F/A
FABULOUS PREMIUMS
Digital Programmer
HALLEY'S COMET VISITS ONCE IN 76 YEARS—it takes the Spiratone Comet-Tracking Bracket/Scope to capture it on film page 24B
WITH YOUR ORDER See back cover
VIDEO ACCESSORIES pages 19-23
!op
The $39.95 Studio Strobe
35SLR Comet-Tracking Bracket/Scope
America's Largest Specialist Supplier of Photographic Accessories 135-06 Northern Blvd., Flushing, N.Y. 11354-4063 • (718) 886-200 0 When in New York, visit our store at: 130 West 31st St., N.Y.C.
ON US Mirror MINITEL- M
The MULTICOATED
Actually shorter and lighter than most 135mm telephoto lenses. Needs no tripod socket since it balances perfectly on the camera.
500mm AND MACRO FOCUSING! It focuses extremely close for a 500mm lens-all the way down to 5 1/2 '-this means you can photograph an object measuring only 3 x 5" (just about postcard size) to fill the full 35mm format without adding tubes or close-up lenses. Just think of the many photographic opportunities such close focusing capability alone opens up for you!
!7,ONVERT TO 1000mm
And with the 2X Converter, you'll have a 1000mm f/16 telephoto lens that weighs just 16 oz. and is only 5" long. Imagine getting 20 times magnification (compared to your normal lens); or effectively cutting subject-to-camera distance by 95%! AUTO EXPOSURE with Aperture Preferred Cameras Works just like a fully automatic lens with Aperture Preferred cameras listed at right. With all other non aperture preferred SLRs you'll use the "stop down" method of metering, still taking advantage of your behind-the-lens metering system for accurate exposures. The Minitel-M gives you a choice of two filter sizes - rear mounting filters which screw into the back of the lens (30.5mm) are available in Skylight 1A, medium yellow, red, neutral density, 2X and 4X; 72mm screw-in filters to fit front of lens are available in just about any color you may want If ordered at (see listing page 44).
Accessories for the Minitel-M
Reg. Price
same time as Minitel
$11.95 $ 9.95 Carrying Case 24.95 18.95 Ultimate SLR Case 10.95 8.95 Custom Metal Lenshood Special 30.5mm rear mounting filters: med. yellow, skylight 1A, red, neutral density each 9.95 7.95 2X or 4X - Specify, 7.00 3 or more, each 9.00 14.84 18.54 72mm Custom Polarizer 8.00 10.00 72mm optical glass Opticap T-Scope Telescope Attachment, see 24.95 5.00 description at right 1000mm (2X) f/16 multi-coated, 20.00 25.00 4 element, w/o tripod socket,
Shpg. Wts. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 1/, lb.
1/2
lb.
1/2
lb.
See also Tele-verter below
FOR MOST ANY 35 SLR. Provides automatic exposure with Canon A-1, AL-1, T70; Contax; Minolta Maxxum, XD, XG, X series, XK; Nikon F3, FE, FG, FA, EM; Olympus OM2, 4, F, G, 10; Pentax LX, MG, ME, Super Program, K2; Yashica FX, FR and other Aperture Preferred SLRs. _ENS SPECIFICATIONS;
Design: Photographic catadioptric Elements: Multicoated 7 elements, 6 groups; 2 mirror surfaces Resolving Power: 48 I/mm or better, axial; 34 I/mm or better near corner Chromatic Aberration: less than 0.2mm for Minimum Focus: 1.7m visible spectrum Length: 92mm*, Dia.: 76mm; Weight 378g.* (varies slightly depending upon camera model) Filters: Mounting rear 30.5mm; front 72mm
CHOICE O F CASES
Choose the conventional Case accommodating lens and four 30.5mm filters; Reg. $11.95 $5.55 Itfheo%leinretdowith Or, choose the Spiratone Ultimate SLR Case, a unique Everready style case for over-the-shoulder or around-the-waist carrying. Accommodates camera, winder. Minitel, extra lens, film and more. See description on pg. 3. Reg. $24.95 order at same time as Minitel and pay only
MAKES AN OUTSTANDING 35X TELESCOPE
$18 95
The Minitel-M also becomes a fine 35X Telescope when used with Spiratone's T-Scope attachmentyou get a sharp, brilliant, fully erect view. Fits T threads of lens-for 500mm only. Reg. $24.95 When ordered at PAY CC same time as Minitel-M ONLY 41.1
TRANSFORM the AMAZING 500mm TO AN EVEN MORE AMAZING
Just add the 7 element Spiratone Tripod-Mount Tele-verter'" (TMT) to create this 14 element, 20 power super telephoto which will fill the viewfinder with a giraffe's head at 30 feet - or with a hummingbird at 5 feet! And the camera-lens combination will be well balanced on your tripod with the center-ofgravity located tripod socket built right into the tripod mount of the TMT
Minitel-M illustrated lifesize
10 0?‘ 'Tim TEIVPHOTO ONLY 5" LONG! 'oar Tripod-Mount Multiconverts coated 7 element TELE-VERTER 500mm f/8 to 100mm f/16, 300mm f/5.6 to 600mm f/11 $49.95 pay tgo when ordered at same time as the only 14u.U4 500mm Minitel-M or 300 Minitel-S
AND MORE ON MINITEL-M SAVE ACCESSORY PACKAGE Buy lens hood, any 2 30.5mm filters at same time as Minitel and pay only
$12
95
$18 95
All pictures taken from same position with 50mm (normal) 300mm Minitel, 500mm Minitel, 500 Minitel with 2X Televerter (1000mm) and with the 500mm Minitel in close-focusing "macro" position. 300mm
Thwart vt
500mm
MINITEL-ft;
30011151
MIPPPP
Incredible ... but true! Only 11 oz. and 2 7/e" long
The Spiratone 300mm MINITEL-S is the equal of the outstanding 500mm MINITEL in the quality of its performance and fulfills the need for a relatively fast, hand-holdable telephoto optic that bridges the gap between most zooms and the longer 400, 500mm telephotos. Yielding 6X magnification compared with the 50mm normal lens and boasting an f / 5.6 aperture for brighter viewing and easier focusing, it makes possible fast shutter speed, handheld action shooting, even when you wish to use the higher resolution, moderate speed films.
FABULOUS VALUE AT $9995
SAVE $23 COMPLETE
with fitting for most an5mm SL Mame ur cameraR model). yoy3 Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs.
2
500 at macro 1:3
1000mm (500 + Tele-Verter)
OFF SEPARATE PRICES ON
CUSTOM ACCESSORY PACKAGE Luxurious carrying case (illus. on right), metal lenshood (reversible for $ when storage), rear mounting bought 111 filter-all for only with lens See listing on right for other accessories.
0.05
Works just like a fully automatic lens with Aperture Preferred cameras such as the Canon A-1, AL-1, T70; Contax; Minolta Maxxum, XD, XG, X series, XK; Nikon F3, FE, FG, FA, EM; Olympus OM-2, 4, F, G, 10; Pentax LX, MG, ME, Super Program, K2; Yashica FX, FR and other Aperture Preferred SLRs. With all other non aperture preferred SLRs you'll use the "stop down" method of metering, still taking advantage of your behind-thelens metering system for accurate exposures.
AND THERE ARE MANY HIGHQUALITY FAVORABLY PRICED ACCESSORIES AVAILABLE FOR THE MINITEL-S
Luxurious Carry Case, holds lens, shade and 2 filters Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs Special 30.5mm rear mounting filters; med. yel., skylight 1A, red, neutral density 2X or 4X -Specify each 3 or more, each 72mm Custom Polarizer 72mm optical glass Opticap lenscap 28 Converter, multi-coated, makes "300" into a "600" f/11 Shpg. Wt. 1/2 lb Tele-verter-7 element 2X Converter, multicoated, makes "300" into a "600" f/11. See description above. Shpg. Wt. 1/2 lb. Custom Metal Lenshood Teletach-makes 300 Minitel into an efficient 30X Telescope, also for your other telephoto, Zoom lenses. (See page 8)
Reg. Price
at same time as
$11.95
$ 9.95
9.95 9.00 18.54 10.00
7.95 7.00 14.84 8.00
25.00
20.00
49.95
39.95
10.95
8.95
34.95
24.95
LENS SPECIFICATIONS: Design: Photographic catadioptric, Elements: 6 elements, in 4 groups; 2 mirror surfaces; multicoated, Resolving Power: 42 I/ mm or better, axial; 34 1/ mm or better near corner, Minimum Focus: 71/2', Chromatic Aberration: less than 0.2mm for visible spectrum,Length: 2 7/s", Diameter: 2 15/j ,", Weighs: 1.1 oz., Filters: Rear mounting 30.5mm, front mounting 72mm.
Gadget Bags for every neea Take along an "Everready" case and leave your gadget bag at home! That's the way you'll feel about the newpatttlVe
ULTIMATE SLR CASE
the case that provides instant access to your camera (with winder and zoom or mirror lens attached) with room for an extra lens, flash, film, filters! This is a beautifully made, elegant, pin-grained, leatherlike case, superbly stitched and lined, which will not only hold your camera with autowinder attached, plus zoom or mirror lens, all in ever-ready position, but which also has extra compartments to hold film, filters, even a small flash. And if your lens measures 4 1/2 " or less (like most WA-Tele Zooms, 300 or 500mm mirror lenses etc.), your normal lens or a wideangle lens will fit the clever front compartment without interferring with the "everreadiness" of your outfit. A swing-away partition extends the main section (through the front compartment) the full length of the case, providing the option to accommodate a single lens up to 71/2". An exclusive Spiratone import
It's amazing that as compact and light a case can offer so much; for many picture-taking occasions, it will be the only case you need take along.
"I can't think of any case more efficiently designed" wrote Herbert Keppler in his enthusiastic report in the Photography. July '85 Modern
Immediate Access to your Ready-for-Action 35mm
•
1)ACCES 1u.tgr iS CARPI' CASL
r Made of a water-repellant, durable, hightenacity nylon weave, material, in natural tan with black trim and maroon felt lining, plus a 1 1/2 " wide, 40" long adjustable strap. This elegant case was specially designed for fast action—one pull on the twin zipper handle opens up the full flap front. Lift out the cradled camera outfit and you're ready to shoot with winder and lens of your choice, premounted on your camera. And there's room for extra lenses and accessories, all in the compact 8 1/2x10 1/2" overall size of the case. Its upper compartment accepts a camera with autowinder or motor drive. The bag's rear is equipped with a 'door' which allows large motor drives to protrude beyond the wall of the case, while still being protected by a "pouch" of water-repellant nylon material as well as the hook and loop locking padded rear flap. Your telephoto or zoom lens—up to 5 34" long and 3" in diameter—can remain right on the camera; if you use a smaller lens, the movable partition enables you to efficiently use the extra space for storage. There are two side compartments, suitable for lenses and other items. One measures 21/2 x 21/2 x 5 3/4" with a movable partition for optimum utilization of available space; the other is 1 3/n x 2 1/2 x 6 1/2". The top of the case is lined with elastic film-can loops and the front flap is equipped with a pouch. Chances are whatever equipment you have will fit the case—but do check dimensions to make sure. Spiratone Instant Access Carry Case Order No. 518840 Shpg. Wt. 21/2 lbs. $31.95 An exclusive Spiratone import
The 'FULL PROTECTION' CASE
This case is intentionally unpretentious in appearance, so it won't attract attention to it's valuable contents. But it sure isn't modest in what it offers the photographer in protection and security.
• WATERTIGHT • AIRTIGHT • DUSTPROOF • UNBREAKABLE The 'FULL PROTECTION' CASE
SPECIFICATIONS: Maximum size camera plus winder accommodated: 6 1/2 " wide x 5" high. Maximum size lens (on camera) accommodated in main section: 41/2” long, 3 1/2 " diameter (without partition in place: 7 1/2 " long, 31/2" diameter). Maximum size lens accommodated in front compartment with swingaway partition in place: 3" long, 3 1/2 " diameter. $2495 Carrying Strap 11/2" wide, adjustable to 39". Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs. Net weight 10 1/2 oz. Order No. 519022
SLR With Motor Drive and Any Lens Up To 53/4" Long
For the ultimate in protection —
This complete outfit fits into the Ultimate SLR Case—check your equipment for size, see specs
SP ikotoge Weather-All m Bag It's a "soft" bag providing the protection of a "hard" bag. Its vinyl backed canvas material lets the water run right off; the large unseamekfoldover flap covers the entire back, top and fronr provides instant access folding pack tqir mpletely reveal a handy 8 ♦deep byolg,,..wA'2v.gmpa went. A wo ion to es aairy a photographer's fabulous outfit and at only
tc
Order No. 4° 518433 Shpg. Wl. 4 Al. The top of the bag offers access to two zipper compartments, one 9" deep and 10" long, the other also 9" deep, over a foot long and over 4" wide. The zipper on top extends across and then down on each side for quick, full access to the main compartment. Side flaps cover the zipper ends — not even hard rain can get in. A removable 'U' shaped rigid insert with two positionable partitions, increases the protection of the contents of the bag by providing a hard bottom and two sides. Two open front pockets, 1 1/2" deep x 6" wide, protected by the large flap, provide more space for items up to 11" in height. The hook and loop fasteners used throughout not only make opening and closing the flaps and covers a snap, but also provide optimum size adjustment regardless of the bag load. The sturdy 11/2" wide adjustable strap with rubber non-slip shoulder pad 'wraps' fully around the bottom of the bag for optimum support and safety. Inside compartments are soft lined and the walls of the major compartments are foam-padded for added protection. the new Spiratone Writes Keppler in Modern Photography — ". . . Weather-Alf bag, we hereby present it with the prize of best bag for the money . . The flip-top bag gave us instant access to everything run.. . It's a winner." even when we were on the
An exclusive Spiratone import
The camera body, even with a compact autowinder, is held snugly in place with the 1" deep cushion in the 61/4x2x4" part of the open, felt-lined compartment; in fact, there is room for camera with mounted lens of up to 6" long and diameter to 21/2". Both front and rear covers are "hinged" for easy access and are equipped with zipper closures. The front cover also has an alternate hook and loop closure to be used when immediate access to .pii(olfy e SLR Mini-Quicr Case the-camera) lens is needed. Even if you have a conventional bag Measuring just 9x7x41/2" overall, the Mini-Quick Case you'll want a Mini-Quick Case for is made of high tenacity nylon weave and sports those times when you don't want to a black leather-like trim and matching 1" wide, take along more equipment than ab40" long adjustable strap (equipped with quick solutely necessary—and want to be removable hardware). able to get to your camera quickly With three extra compartments—two measuring and without fumbling. approximately 1 1/2 x2 3/sx6" and a rear one apOrder No oximately 9x7x1"—the Mini-Quick Case is the answer Spiratone SLR to the photographer's prayer for a compact, neat, truly useful Mini-Quick Case .PLI—UU 518603 camera case which, on many occasions, will hold everything you need to take along. Shpg. W 3 lbs. An exclusive Spiratone import See also the Spiratone 35 SLR Super Case on pg. 42
is made of one-piece injection-molded high impact thermal plastic, the material Made in U.S.A. football helmets are made of. You can literally jump up and down on it — and you won't even dent it. External strengthening ribs, minimum wall thickness 1/4", stainless steel fittings; also, it is '0' ring-sealed, which makes it watertight, airtight and dustproof. You can leave it out in the rain — or let it float down a river. Not only won't it let water, air or dust in, but it's impervious to corrosion, even to salt water. IT'S SAFE — the large, built-in handle has an integral, locking flange for complete security for use with a lock of your choice (not supplied). It's protective of your equipment. It comes with three layers of high-quality polyester foam, including one pre-cut ( 1/2 " cubes) "pick and pluck" 3 3/4 " layer for quick custom cradling of each piece of equipment. IT'S AMPLE IN SIZE — usable inside dimensions are 115/u"x17 14"x6%" — to hold lots of equipment—even two body outfits—yet compact enough to fit under an airline seat. It opens up flat (180°) for quick access to entire contents. Net weight for all this protection — only 7 14 lbs. And it includes for handsfree carrying a 2"x38" nylon shoulder strap with adjustable fittings. Is there anything the designer didn't think of? We doubt it. rhere is even a pressure purge for quick air equalization after altitude or pressure changes! $89.95 And all this protection costs only Order No. 518549 Shpg. Wt. 10 lbs. Replacement foam insert for above $16.95
Pii6THIKEMASTER' CAMERA CASE
The perfect companion for the photographer/skier, bike rider, hiker, mountain climber or one who just wants to carry his basic photo equipment in a most convenient and safe fashion. The Hikemaster Camera Case is carried securely and snugly around the waist, up to 44", or as a "fanny" pack on the lower back. The broad adjustable carry strap with large quick snap closure keeps the bag from bouncing— even when you're horse back riding! It is made of water-repellent high tenacity nylon weave and is amply padded throughout, so that every piece of equipment is securely cradled. The zippers are protected from weather by a blind seam construction. Holds one or two 35 SLR bodies and up to 5 lenses, with room for film, filters, flash. Inside is approximately 12" x 4 1/2" x 6", partitionable into 5 separate compartments. The outer zippered pouch measures about 8 1/2" x 2" x 4". The Hikemaster Camera Case is `probably the most comfortable, lightweight (under 1 lb.), efficient, ■ Icompact camera bag around—and you don't have to be a skier to appreciate its day in and day out utility and convenience.
Just the case you wanted for your 35 SLR Camera/Autowinder/Zoom Outfit. The most efficient, safe, compact, quick access Case for your BASIC OUTFIT—the equipment you use for most of your shooting. Not a big, complicated case for ALL your equipment. You'll just love the simplicity and efficiency of the
g
$21 95
The Hikemaster Camera Case comes in solid outdoor blue or tan — specify color.
$2795
Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs. An exclusive Spiratone import
3
olitokouttf t otooli
Background Stands, Paper, Materials
otIsia
epokotr
for portrait, product, industrial, video, advertising and all other types of studio photography
SEAMLESS BACKGROUND PAPER
GRADUATED TONE BACKGROUND MATERIAL ESPECIALLY DESIGNED FOR PRODUCT AND CREATIVE STUDIO PHOTOGRAPHY
Choose from 11 different colors specially selected for their suitability as photographic backgrounds. All are available in 53" and 107" widths. #101 Super white #102 Ebony black #103 Medium gray #104 Beige #105 Sky blue #106 Bright yellow Sh pg. Wt. per
#109 Aztec gold #110 Violet #111 Medium green
yds.
107"x12
yds.
EA. $13.95 EA. $26.95 2 FOR $25.95 2 FOR $48.95 4 FOR $47.95 4 FOR $87.95
53" roll 6 lbs., 107" rolls mos be shipped motor freight (see page 24).
The light trapping "velvet" backgroundThe affordable alternative to expensive RAYON-VELOUR non-reflecting velvet backgrounds A high density, light trapping Rayon fiber, flocked on a sturdy yet flexible, paper backing. Please specify color: BLACK, RED or PURPLE each $14.95 50" wide rolls X 9 ft. long $27.95 Any 2 (same or different color) Shpg. W t. 4 lbs.
DIF-FUSE Perhaps the most versatile, the most useful diffusion
material ever available to photographers, A non-woven polyester fabric with a frosted glass look to create a translucent background (just place your lights behind it); you can also make it into a 'soft box' in just about any size — up to 92" in width and as long as 24 feet (or as small as a foot square). Suspend it like seamless background paper or attach it to a wooden frame — you'll find a dozen different rears of using it. 92" x 24 ft. roll, each $29.95 2 for $54.95 Shpg. Wt. 28 lbs.
STANDING
53"x12
#107 Deep red #108 Chocolate brown
BLACKWRAP
TM
Flexible Matte Black Aluminum Super Foil • Shape a light beam—create your own custom snoot, barn door, gobo INDISPENSABLE • Custom shade your lens Vciczioxrl:Vh tsleo rative materials AID FOR THE • PHOTOGRAPHER • Cut or tear it to any shape or size It's easy with Blackwrap, the tough, heat proof, coated black (both sides) aluminum foil. Lightweight, it hugs the shape to which it's pressed to stay put. Hang it with Gaffers tape (see page 12)when needed. Available in rolls. 12" x 50' Order No. 267007 Either size, specify Shpg. Wt. 24" x 25' Order No. 267104 3 lbs. AN
Inlle
$19.95
Stainless Steel Background Roll Clips SET OF
are ideal for use on ends of roll to prevent paper 12 CLIPS' from unwinding. Clips 11/16" wide x 51/2" long agShpg. W t. 1 lb. Order No. 250996 •"
t7
PORTABLL BACKGROUND SUePORTS
Both Background Supports set up in just seconds. The crossbar supports are adjustable from 60" to 115" (standard model) or to 155" (deluxe model) and handle background roll sizes up to 107" and 144" respectively. The deluxe model is also equipped with heavy duty double braced uprights. The vertical support stands (on both models) are adjustable in height from 4' 3" to a tall 8' 4". Shpg. Wts. 12 lbs. each, but shipping
Please order by number stated next to each color 01A Red 02A Yellow 03A Sky Blue
$75.00
$109.95
add multiple background capacity to your present background support.
II II II
A—MONOCHROME—white to full color
For carrying, the standard model collapses to 66", STANDARD the deluxe model to a compact 52", the crossbars MODEL collapse to 60". Order No. 250546 When not employed as part of a Background Support, each stand makes an extra tall, heavy duty light stand whose sturdy tripod legs form a stable 34" diameter base. The top 3/8" stud DELUXE accommodates most yoke-mounted quartz lights MODEL and spots. Order No. 250600 A standard universal ball adapter (optional — $1.50 each) is available for mounting ball clamp or 1/4"-20 threaded lights and accessories. cost must be based on 25 lbs. because of size.
MULTI-BACKGROUND HOLDER SET Set consists of two holders complete with one three section, 144" long (60" telescoped) crossbar to provide instant access to an additional background. Suitable for Spiratone, other background supports with 7/s" diameter stand section. Our Standard model Background Support accepts one extra, our Deluxe Support up to two extra backgrounds. Set of MultI-Background Holders, 1 crossbar Shpg. Wt. per set 5 lbs.
II
Two sets $59.95 Order No. 250643
nr Order No. $34. ua 250635
HAND•PAINTED CANVAS BACKS ROUNDS ADD THAT ARTISTIC LOOK TO YOUR STUDIO PHO" ;RAPHY
Made for us by America's foremost manufacturer of photo studio backgrounds, these brushed, subtle, multi-toned backgrounds avoid the monotony of solid colors. Each background is hand-painted on heavy canvas, with a lighter center
Choice of 17 different colors Spiratone Colorflow material on synthetic stock is made in two sizes; each size is available in 17 different colors or color combinations.
Each Convertible To Two Giant Heavy Duty Lightstands
Here are two compact, portable, anodized aluminum twin stand and multiple section crossbar combinations which are the answer to every backdrop requirement in the studio or on location.
Spiratone Colorflow background material is a durable, washable, synthetic stock onto which are silkscreened one or more colors which gradually vary one color from white to a gradually more saturated color (group A), or one color into another (group B), or from one color into two different colors (group C)—see listing below. The use of a carefully selected Colorflow background material greatly enhances the appearance of the subject being photographed—and enables you to achieve in seconds—just the time it takes to set up the background—effects which could take hours to produce by controlling the lighting on conventional even-toned backgrounds. The single color background (group A) features a gradual change from white through a pastel and on to the fully saturated color (with the exception of 14A which goes from pastel to deep red) and simulates an infinitely receding flat plane in a very compact set-up. The dual and tri color backgrounds (groups B, C) can simulate outdoor settings; can also be used for abstract effects.
and darker surround, is mounted with appropriate wooden supports, top and bottom, to facilitate rolling, and will not peel or crack under normal conditions. Color shown here approximate, backgrounds are hand-painted individual pieces.
intensity
04A Green 32A Cerulean Blue 09A Charcoal Grey 34A Magenta 14A Med. Red to Dark Red 35A Toast 28A Dove Grey P —TWO COLORS—one blending into the other 07B Yellow to Red 170 Yellow to Orange 08B Yellow to Green 38B Red to Black 120 Yellow to Brown C—THREE COLORS—one color blending into another which blends into a third color 100 Green to Yellow to Red 16C Yellow to Green to Blue Note: If uncertain, order Swatch fan or Sample Selection first. Color flow backgrounds are not returnable. Colors shown and described are approximations and actual color can be determined accurately only from samples.
SHEETS OF SPIRATONE COLORFLOW MATERIAL OF SYNTHETIC STOCK
41 1/3 X 31 1/2" ea. $ 10.95, 3 or more, ea. $ 9.45 61 1/3 X 42 1/2" ea. $ 24.95, 3 or more, ea. $22.45
Shipping Weights 411/2 X 31 1/2" 1, 3 lbs.; 3, 5 lbs. SAMPLE SELECTION 6P/3 X 42 1/2 " 1, 5 lbs.; 3,10 lbs. In addition we offer a complete selection sample of all 17 color effects, silkscreened onto heavy paper, each in the 21 1/2 X 15 3/4 " size. These serve both as background material suitable for use with small items and to enable you to know exactly what the larger sheets will look like. This sample selection is priced below its true value. Complete SAMPLE SELECTION, 17 sheets, 21x15", one each of the 17 colors 16.95 Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs.4'
SWATCH FAN
#3100 #100 #200 #1300 #2400 #700 S q . Wt. Photo illustrations are approximate and merely represent 5x6' ea. $54.95 2 or more $50.95 ea • 15hi'. lbs. the general effect of the background. Being individually 6x8' ea. $76.95 2 or more $70.95 ea. 25 lbs. hand-painted, each background is unique. Order by number 10x10' ea. $199.95* 2 or more $189.95* ea. You can assort colors and sizes '10 x 10' size available only in #'s 700, 1300, 2400. Shipped by truck. (see pg. 24) SAVE! to qualify for quantity prices
4
Post paid (USA only)
$2.50
Set of 17 9 1/2" long swatches, arranged for ease in comparing colors and gradations
Tripods, Heads for Still, Movie, Video Spiratone Benbo Tripods
Tripod Heads
The multi-adjustable, go-anywhere, do-anything, indoor and outdoor tripods
for Benbo and all other tripods
"The panhead that lets you fine tune your camera's movements" If you've ever tried to make the delicate pan or tilt adjustments needed when doing close-ups or other critical work, you'll appreciate the unique fine-tune capabilities of the all new © Spiratone Pro Panhead FT (Fine Tune) Unlike conventional panheads, the Spiratone Panhead FT is equipped with controls to provide you with a choice of both regular and fine tune adjustments. Turn the 3/4 " diameter knob right on the base and the entire head slowly rotates around the degree-calibrated base. Loosen the 2" diameter knob and you can rapidly swivel the assembly for quick panning or rough adjustments. Want to fine tune the tilt position? Simply turn the knob to the left of the panhead. And for conventional tilting, use the large panhead handle. With the shorter handle, you can "flop" the camera platform left and
With the introduction of the British-made Benbo Tripod line, Spiratone is achieving an unprecedented high in its successful forty year history of bringing the best, yet affordable, photo accessories to the marketplace. Benbo Tripods combine comparatively light weight with a sturdiness not found in any other tripods. They are made of bright mild steel, Duralumin, and Nylon 12; the parts are epoxy powder coated black texture, anodized natural, chrome and bright zinc plated. Every step in the manufacture of the Benbo Tripods is rigidly controlled and inspected to insure the highest quality attainable.
right. A bubble level cleverly built into the rear of the platform enables you to check if camera is level without contortions. Pan adjustment (with either method) is a continuous 360°, flop-over adjustment from 30° right to 105° left, tilt is +70°, —95°. The Pro Panhead FT is sturdy built for 35mm SLRs even with bellows or long lenses, as well as for medium format cameras. So even if you already own a conventional panhead and have
need for fine tuning capability, the Pro Panhead FT will prove an outstanding investment at its low price. Spiratone Pro Panhead FT Order No. 522031 Shpg. Wt. 4 (be. $49.95
Elegant in appearance, they are adaptable to just about every picture-taking requirement— from smooth studio or living room floor to the multi-level steps of a spiral staircase, from a narrow space between two trees, to submersion in a mountain stream (thanks to sealed construction of the bottom sections). They'll give you more stability and flexibility on just about any project.
Benbo 3-Way Panhead
The all-purpose panhead tine, video applications, independent pan, tilt, flop controls allow for ultimate posit' 'ng :fle flay. 11" long handle for ne an 4eo is included. Rubbg pp*atform for non-slip CM empiountand tighting with IA" 20 thre to —140°, ening collar, Tilt Complete flop 120'. PRCC,.. 7" and withArekhandles — one I 1 "s'c.' Benbo 3-Way Panhead 551104 Shpg. W t. .3 lbs. $59. 5
The total adaptability of Benbo Tripods to adjust to any kind of terrain lies in the unique design of the swivel joint which allows independent adjustment of the telescopic legs up to and beyond horizontal, while at the same time permitting independent adjustment of the entire column elevation and orientation. The head and legs are locked together by a large single lever control, while separate screw clamps control leg and column extensions. The knobs are easy to operate, even while wearing gloves. Another unusual Benbo feature is that the leg tubes are the reverse of 'normal'; i.e. the outer (larger tube) sections are at ground level. The ends are completely sealed and may be safely immersed in mud or water. Benbo tripods are made in three models, all utilizing the same construction and differing only in the length of the legs and center column.
Other tripod heads and accessories are offered on pages 6,7
Benbo tripods accept any tripod head of suitable size, to fit onto the 3/4 "-20 screw or 1/4"-16 screw with which they are equipped. Spiratone offers a selection of fine heads to choose from—each an exceptional value in its category. Model A is primarily designed for field, table-top, and close-up work, though certainly usable for other types of photography, too. Model B is the 'standard model', providing all the benefits of a conventional tripod, plus the unique Benbo features. Model C is the generously sized studio model which is also unexcelled in its usefulness with medium format and light view cameras.
BENBO TRIPOD SPECIFICATIONS Length of legs: Telescoped
Model A
Model B
19"
281/4"
291/4"
47 "
Length of column
16"
24.5 "
Weight of tripod
6 lb., 1 oz.
Shipping weights:
8 lbs.
Length of legs,
Price Order Number
Extended
Model C
00
7 lb., 12 oz.S
5gEEFP i FSF
$89.95 $119.9
59:9
550205
550302
550108
VS
9 lbs.
0, Buy any tripod head shown here at same time as a Benbo
SAVE 20 70 tripod and deduct 20% off the price of the tripod head. 1 - he Benbo Monopod utilizes the same construction as Benbo tripod legs (see above) and is one of the finest Monopads ever offered —at any price. It is a single extension unit with sealed ends and nylon toe point. Its extension locking knob is always at the same height above ground level (35"); therefore, any adjustment can be made from the standing position. The leg, since it is sealed, may be immersed in water up to 30". Specifications: 37.5" telescoped, 69" extended, weight 2 lbs. The Benbo Monopod Order No. 550507 Shpg. Wt. 4 lbs $39.95 Buy Monopod and Super Tilt-Top (see #4 at right) at same time and pay for both only Shpg. Wt. 5 lbs. SAVE! $54.95
For other tripods, dollies, accessories see pages 6,7, 21.
qfp Spiratone Super Tilt-Top All the positioning freedom of a ball head, but with three individually locking planes of rotation. Provides 360° rotation and 210° tilt control. Overall height 31/2", 21/2" diameter camera platform, weighs 10 oz., mounts on 1/4 "-20 tripod top. Spiratone Super Tilt-Top Order No. 520910 Shpg. WI, 2 lbs. $24.95
®
Benbo Pro Ball Head
©
Benbo Super Ball Head
Silky smooth, 1 1/2 " diameter Ball Head with generously sized locking knob and 2 3/4 " diameter platform with 1/4 "-20 stud; fits all Spiratone Benbo pods and others with 1/4 "-20 or 34"-16 threads. Benbo Pro Ball Head Order No. 551007 Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs. $49.95 Heavy duty 2 1/4 " diameter ball head with independently adjustable drag control, features oversized 3" diameter rubber covered camera platform and generously sized 1 7/a" diameter locking knob. 45/e" in height and weighing 33 oz., the Benbo Super Ball Head is made to the same stringent quality specifications as the Benbo Tripods. A real heavyweight performer for use with even the heaviest cameras, the Super Ball Head mounts on any %"-16 tripod stud and provides both 3/4" and 3/8 " mounting studs for the camera. A truly exceptional value and the equal of other units costing over two times as much. Benbo Super Ball Head Order No. 551309 Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. $129.95
There isn't another camera-holding device at such a low price that comes even close to the versatility, the usefulness, the ease of operation of the Spiratone Versatile.
Our best buy in a sturdy, braced tripod,
• It's a sturdy anodized • It's a unique aluminum channel leg `all direction' preconstruction, geared ele- cision focusing vator tripod with 3 way rail for critical panhead macro photogra• It's a superb close-up phy, even at stand for copying, verti- ground level. cally or horizontally IT'S THE VERSATILE"
s . qp
sqpikotto,
the
TRIPOD for most any
Triple Purpose Tio;pea gvgiehm
5mm, medium format, and home video cameras
the ultimate support for the 35mm SLR • All direction center column instantly transforms from vertical into a horizontal (or any direction in-between) focusing rail to allow those critical adjustments in camera position so necessary in close-up and $66.93 macro work • Attach panhead to bottom of center column and you have a sturdy, efficient set uup for copying from books. for photographing small Shpg. Wts., Tripod 7 lbs., objects, for doing nature work Copyboard 4 lbs. • Quick lever locks allow leg sections to be instantly extended or retracted, positively locking without effort • Protective rubber tips-ideal for indoor use-retract to expose spiked tips, for non-skid outdoor use ,v.. • Three separate locks control the action of the fully adjustable panhead for 360 - pan, 115° tilt up and 90" flop over - for vertical or horizontal shooting in any direction. Versatile Tripod with Copyboard/ Tiller
The Versatile's channel construction legs provide great sturdiness; yet the complete tripod weighs only about 4 1/2 lbs, folds to a compact 25 1/2 " for easy carrying. Maximum extended height is 60", pan and tilt controls have calibrated degree indicators for repeatability of settings, large, slotted, panhead platform allows for 'ideal' positioning of camera. And with all these features, this superb craftsmanship, the Spiratone Versatile actually costs less than most ordinary tripods providing just '3 legged' support.
strengthened aluminum, three-section, channel-design legs which are centerpole braced and meet at the rugged fiber glass central casting which envelopes the legs and centerpole for maximum rigidity. Fast in setting up, quick lever locks allow leg sections to be rapidly extended from 18 to 45" to provide, with the 9" adjustable centerpole, a maximum tripod height of 54". Protective rubber leg tips for indoor use retract to expose spiked tips for outdoor use. The 3-way panhead provides an amply sized (21/4x31/8") camera platform with calibrated 360° pan, +110° to -110° tilt and 90° flop-over movements. And for maximum versatility, the panhead may be mounted to the bottom of the centerpole for extreme close-up or low-angle work. With unequaled sturdiness and versatility in its price class, the Hi-Lo is still a relatively lightweight (4 lb. 12 oz.), compact (collapses to 22") tripod great for travel or backpacking. Hi-Lo Tripod, complete with panhead Order No. 522014 Shpg. Wt. 7 lbs.
this for ALL DIRECTION GEARED RA"
this for COPYING
'6 99'
and this for ._UW (ground level) ANGLE SHOOTING
Carry case for tripod (see below) Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs. $6.95
Here is an inexpensive accessory which transforms any reasonably sturdy tripod into a projection stand - complete with all the adjustable features (height, tilt etc.) which your tripod provides. Just screw the TPT's tripod-threaded bushing onto your tripod's panhead and you're all set to place your Kodak Carouselor most other still or movie projectors on the Of course, the samCs an be used to hold small articles for \-ed table top photogOrder No. raphy. Made o inje molded ABS, reinforced 522554 with cross ribs, the 11" square Tripod Projector Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs. Top is an exceptional value. A Deluxe Projection Stand is described on page 33
5.95 1.98
$9.95
5.98 6.98 16.98
Shipping Cost Extra
COPYBOARD/TITLER ACCESSORY Add the convenience of a multipurpose unitized copy/titling set-up to your Versatile tripod. Accommodates any material up to 9x10 3/4 " (8x10" open frame aperture) and up to 1/4" thick .r„;:- • in its spring loaded channels. Use vertically or hori_I zontally. All metal unit in- :AptA'....vaini cludes 10" column extension and easel frame. oi. In• Shpg. Wt. 14 lb. pricelist -,--;- seeabove MORE TRIPODS, MONOPODS and ACCESSORIES.).
r
6
CONVENIENCE—SECURITY with the_
„o
pikotoge
QUICINNAS
TRIP' r1 MOUNT SLIP-ON, SLIP-OFF - that's the , camera to the tripod! No fumbling for screws, no
way to mount your
..;,1
troublesome aligning of camera each time you mount it.-The QUICK-WAY is a heavy duty, two part precision machined, matched platform system providing absolute rigidity - its base is left on your tripod head, the insert on your camera or telephoto's tripod socket or flash bracket and so on. Spiratone QUICK-WAY Tripod Mount with one camera insert Extra Camera Inserts, each $2.98 Shpg, //2 lo. BUY QUICK-WAY MOUNT AT SAME TIME AS $5 ANY SPIRATONE TRIPOD AND PAY ONLY
'11ICKWAY
TRIPOD MOUNT FOR VIDEO, LARGE FORMAT CAMERAS - identical in form and function to our standard Quick-Way (above) but generously sized to handle the heavier Cine, Video and large format still cameras requiring an extra sturdy support. Overall size 21/4x23/4x1”. Pro Quick-Way incl. 1 insert Shpg. In. 2 lbs. Extra Pro Quick-Way Inserts, each $5.95 Shpg, Wt. I/2 lb.
$15.98
INSTANT CHANGEOVER FROM HORIZONTAL TO VERTICAL FORMAT WITH THE
VERTAFLIP
WITHOUT SHIFTING LENS POSITION Unlike flip-over devices on tripods which displace the lens by several inches requiring cumbersome repositioning of the tripod, the Vertaflip lets the camera rotate about a fixed lens axis, making the selection of format—horizontral or vertical—a cinch. Use with any sturdy tripod. For all 35mm, 4.5x6, or 6x7 cameras. Order No. 522600
$29.95
Shpg. W t. 2 lbs.
TRIPOD PROJECTOR TO
$4.98
'5995
Here is an integrated, id Order No. 521043 solidly constructed focusing rail designed Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. for the serious user of 35mm SLRs (even those equipped with bellows and heavy lenses), 6x6 and 6x7cm cameras. The camera is attached to the cork-covered platform which is equipped with spring loaded registration pins to prevent accidental camera rotation. The 2 ,/," long travel along two 1/2" diameter rods (one geared) is of the rack and pinion design and is controlled by a large 1 3/a" diameter knob. A separate locking knob is also provided to lock the assembly in a rigid configuration. Travel at a right angle to the upper rail over a 1 1/8 " range is provided by a lead screw arrangement providing extremely fine position adjustments; a separate knob assures a positive lock at the desired position. Thanks to the use of castings and heavy duty metal components the complete unit is relatively heavy — 23 oz. The Proxiscope is recommended for use on tripods, copystands and wherever extremely precise camera position adjustments and rock steady alignment are required for critical work.
$7 98 95
-,Solid camera support is assured by the tripod's rib-
only the Spiratone VERSATILE does all this and MnDF
Optional Accessories or Spiratone versaute 20' 2 pc. air release, short unit fits Reg. through tripod's handle for vibration Price free releasing of shutter (can also be used separately) $5.98 Quick-way Tripod Mount for instant slipping on and off of camera, without unscrewing 7.98 Extra camera insert (for above) if you have more than one camera 2.98 Vinyl Tripod Carry Case for Versatile, other tripods up to 31" in length, protects tripod against scratches, rain, 6.95 etc. 16" Extension Column to increase 8.98 length of geared rail Copyboard/Titler (see below) 19.98
Designed to meet the needs of the modern image maker—indoors and outdoors—the HiLo tripod can handle almost any imaging situation you can conjure up. For copy and close-up photography, uneven terrain, low-angle or ground-level view, the Hi-Lo features individually adjustable,' sliding leg braces which allow tilting the centerpole and make possible a tripod base of 35 to 84" in diameter. No regular tripod offers you such freedom in customizing leg and base spread.
ryTPikotttnPROXISCOPE' FOCUSING RAIL
HEAVY PR UV O DUTY
VERTAF! PP
Same basic design as regular model, but built with double parallel rotary links for utmost rigidity. Capable of positioning even relatively heavy cameras — 35mm SLRs with bellows or long lenses, medium format models, etc., — about a fixed axis. Order No. 522627 Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs.
$39.95
FOR OTHER TRIPODS AND ACCESSORIES See pages 5, 7, 21
1111
'Pootting CASE Y for TRIPODS, LIGHTSTANDS, UMBRELLAS •
-..
THE UTILITY CASE YOU NEED IN ADDITION TO YOUR GADGET BAG,--2-
This black, vinyl case was especially designed by us to fill the needs of the 'travelling' photographer. Its spacious interior accommodates items up to 31" in length and as much as 4" across. Extra long (17") over-the-top zipper for easy access to contents plus two handles cen/ z tered for balanced carrying. Shpg. W t. 2 lbs. ea.
Order Not 2464905
a.
.
Order No. 206504
2 for $11 $11.95 .../
Pods; Accessories for Hasselblad, TLR, Maxxurr m iN o tTA411111■„ MAXXUM ACCESSORIES FOR
Ao ttwe n et irosn
Take sweeping panoramic pictures-up to 360°
HASSELBLAD
of the
the versatility of your camera with proven, inexpensive Spiratone accessories Lenses, duplicators, bellows-lens units work with aperturepreferred and program models for automatic exposure. For complete description of these items see page indicated Spiratone 300mm f/5.6 Minitel complete with case, hood, IA filter Spiratone 500mm f/8 Minitel 2 with case Spiratone 100mm f/4 Portragon 9 complete with pouch, hood Spiratone Vario Dupliscope II (1,1-4X area magn. duplicator), complete with strobe, Exposure Calibrated Light System, Hot 29 Shoe Adapter Spiratone Bellowscope with built-in focusing rail, plus 150mm Macrotel for almost life-size 27 to infinity focusing range Spiratone T Adapter for use with all T-mount lenses, duplicators etc. (included with above 7 items) Circular Polarizer 49mm 14' 44 other sizes see page 44
$109.80 pr 4tik• 169.90 41.95 82.90 99.51
PANORAMA HEAD
and your 35mm camera, equipped with any lens from 28mm to 100mm (or a zoom lens set at, or between these focal lengths). Panorama Head mounts simply between, your tripod and your camera. Calibration scales for all popular focal length lenses indicate the degree of rotation for each exposure • in the Panorama series. This solid Panorama Head has a base 2 14" in diameter with a rubber-covered camera platform 1 1/2 " in diameter; oversize 1 3/4 " long knob makes it a snap to smoothly turn platform and to lock it at each desired setting for perfect alignment. To assure true horizontal panning use the Photo Bubble level described below. Order No. 520950 shp .e. WI. lb.
$18 95
PHOTO Bubble Level
fits directly into the flash shoe on your camera and lets you make certain camera is parallel with ground; in vertical or horizontal position. A must for panoramic and wide-angle photography and copying. Order No. 520977 Buy at same time as Panorama Head above, or any copystand and pay only $11.95. Order No. 520985
WITH BUBBLE INDICATOR
for the meticulous still and video camera user Have you ever tried to fine tune level your camera - for critical wideangle work, for architectural photography, for perfectly level panoramas and for absolutely level video pans? Even with the finest panhead or tilttop, it's an often frustrating, hit-and-miss procedure to secure a locked, absolutely level camera position. With the Spiratone Micro Level Adjuster mounted between your tripod and tripod head, you can make exacting side to side tilt adjustments by means of a screw and roller mechanism, to within a fraction of one degree - and lock the Micro Level Adjuster in the exact required position. A removable bubble level fits the shoe on one side of the Micro Level Adjuster; it can also be used separately. Specifications: Construction: steel, brass and aluminum, Size: 3112x 3 1/4x1" overall, Weight: 190 g., Degree of tilt: 10°, 1/4". 20 fittings. all 35, 21/4 , cite and video $29 Micro Level Adjuster, for all Shpg. Wt. 1 lb. Order No. 521 cameras.
1)6t,MCBASIC" TILTTOF A solid tilttop (2 3/4 " high, 1 1/2 " platform) for most any 35mm camera. Provides 360° rotation, 90° tilt. Mounts to any 1/4-20 threaded tripod or light stand and accepts standard 1/4 -20 threaded camera, strobes, other accessories. Basic Tilttop Order No. 522538 Shpg. Wt. 1/4 lb. For shoe-mount accessories, add the Spiratone Shoe Adapter ($2 additional)
$9 95
95
You CAN take it with you! The best tripod in the world - left at home or in the car-does nothing for you when your camera needs a support - on location. That's why we created the tripod you WILL take with you.....
the.5ik4,to .. lw DELUXE
$24.95
MONOPOD WITH BUILT-IN TILTOP The Spiratone Monopod "TT" is a pleasure to carry - as a swagger stick, a walking stick or looped on your belt. As a camera support, it's unique: for normal shooting, using the ground as a support for up to eyelevel shooting or for use with any solid base (building, tree) as a support for shooting at any angle and at any height down to ground level. 5 anodized aluminum tubular sections (from a mansized 1 1/4 " dia. top section to a ly, 6 " dia. lower section), extends to 60", compactly telescopes to 16", weighs only 17 oz. Built-in wrist strap, nonskid rubber tip. Order No. 521957 Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
$27.95
The iiTI, System®of Interchangeable lens and accessory fittings with
TM
It's SO STURDY thanks to all metal channel construction. It's SO COMPACT thanks to 3 section design. Telescopes to 17", weighs 2 lbs. It's SO VERSATILE with its 12 1/2 " travel elevator (total height 46"); 3 way panhead; convertabiiity to close-up and copy stand. One of the sturdiest lightweight, truly portable tripods. Orde r No Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. 522287
pikotttge,
Spiratone Reverse Adapter with manual aperture adjuster for use on Maxxum lens for macro 7 photography Ion camera body or bellows) ALSO AVAILABLE FOR MAXXUM: $25.95 26 Right Angle Finder Att. 39.95 26 Del. (non-reversing) Model 18.95 26 Critical Eyepiece Focuser 79.95 17 Model 360 TXP flash, fully dedicated (incl. TTL) Shipping costs are extra. Several other model duplicators and bellows-lens combinations, not listed above, also available for Maxxum. Lenses, duplicators, bellows-lens combinations work with aperture-preferred and program modes for automatic exposure. Flash does not offer zooming or IR Autofocus assist. Lenses etc. manual focusing.
Micro Level Camera Adjuster
$15.95
Porta-Pod
8.95 15.94 15.95
Male "T" adapters and Female "T" flanges Introduced by Spiratone in the 1960's, the "T" system has become the world standard for lens and accessory interchangeability. Millions of lenses, bellows, duplicators and other accessories utilize "T" fittings, allowing the same lens or accessory to be used with many different cameras - by just using different "T" adapters which simply screw on and off (no tools required). In the Spiratone line, the 500mm Minitel, 400mm Sharpshooter, 300mm Minitel, the Portragon, the Duplivar, the Duplimat, all Dupliscopes, most bellows units and short mount macro lenses utilize "T" adapters. A 2X lens converter, the Tele-verter, extension tubes and a telescope attachment are also "T" compatible. Combining a "T" adapter with a "T" flange produces a short extension tube. "T" flanges can also be adapted to gadget bags to act as lens holders and for other purposes. It should be noted, however, that "T" adapters adapt "T" mount lenses and accessories to specific cameras; they do not convert from one camera mount to another. Male "T" Female "T" Available in the Flanges Adapters following models": $11.00 For Canon, Minolta, Nikon $7.95 For Konica, Olympus, Pentax K 11.00 8.95 (bayonet), Contax, Yashica . 4.50 For Leica (screw-mount) ..... 7.95 4.50 For Pentax (universal screw-mount). For Minolta Maxxum 8 95 -
Special "T" Adapters
For Leicaflex, Rolleiflex 35 SL, Fujica 17. 95 17 .95 For Mamiya ZE 16 .95 For "C" mount tine, video cameras *"T" Adapters and Flanges are also available Sbfik . Orr. each 1/4 for some other cameras - write, stating specific needs. Buy as many "T" Adapters and Flanges as you wish at the same time as any "T" model bellows unit or the Bello-Dupliscope ON "T" ADAPTERS and take a AND FLANGES
SAVE!
250/0(°01
Make your normal lens into a 160mm, your 150mm into a compact 300mm fully automatic telephoto with the 2X FULLY AUTO CONVERTER models for 5000, C/M, EL, EL/ M A high quality 2X converter that maintains the full automation and complete focusing range of your lens, makes your 80mm into an efficient automatic 160mm telephoto lens-your 150mm into a relatively compact 300mm! We unhesitatingly recommend this converter for the critical worker. Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs.
$149 95
NPC INSTANT PHOTOGRAPHY FILM BACK
for use of Polaroid 100, 600 series pack film on models 500C and CM. Image size 2 3402 1/4 ". Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs.
$195.00
tell.
LENS ADAPTER to use Hasselblad
lenses on Nikon or Canon, specify wh i ch. Sh. Wt. 1 lb. SPIRATONE AUX. FISHEYE LENS Shpg. Wt 2 lbs. makes your 80mm into a full 180° coverage fisheye, producing a circular image 30mm in diameter on your negative or slide. (for details see page 36) Aux. Fisheye fitted: for 'Bay-50' fleonr lenslens
$49 95
I. "
$94•95
$100.95
SPIRATONE ULTIMATTE BOX
Shpg. Wt. 11/2 lbs. (for details see page 47) complete with fitting: for 'Bay-50' $55.95 fl:rnBay-60' lens For information on adapting other accessories to your Hasselblad tenses, write, naming lenses you own and accessories.
$61.95
DIRECT BAYONET "BAY 50" FILTERS
with female front bayonets to accept other filters Med. Yellow, Skllight 1A, Closeup + 1, 2, 4 ea. . .$10.95 . Random-type Diffuser . 11.95 . .Shpg. WWt. . . . 8.00 Optical Glass Opticap 1/ 4 Rents Rotating Custom Polarizer 1-3 lb. . . 18.95
SPIRATONE CUSTOMIZERS:
adapt screw-in filters to your lenses For 'Bay 50' Lenses-to use 49mm; 52mm; or 55mm screw-in filters. Specify size Each $6.00 For 'Bay 60' CF Lenses-to use 67mm screw-in filters Each $12.95 Be sure to specify which bayonet size lens you have and what size filter you want to use. BAYONET FOR
REFLEX TwiNLENs CAMERAS
for all 2 1/4x2 1/4 (6x6cm) Size I bayonet Rolle( f/3.5 (Tessar, Xenar only), Yashica, Minolta, other bayonet size I mount cameras. When
ordering, name camera, model, exact lens designation.
PARALLAX CORRECTING CLOSE-UPSETS
Each set consists of two matched close-up lenses one of which is equipped with a prism that shifts the image visible on the ground-glass to that actually 'seen' by the taking lens, making close-ups as simple as snapshots of distant objects. ..•-• Plus 1 set focuses from 38" to 20" Plus 2 set focuses from 20" to 13" s) Plus 3 set focuses from 13" to 10" Shpg. Wt. each set 14 lb. Coated Plus 1, Plus 2 OR Plus 3 set, w/case, ea. . . $ 9.79 $17.79 Coated Plus 1 AND Plus 2 sets, with case, $25.79 Coated Plus 1, Plus 2, Plus 3 sets, with case, BAYONET FILTERS Shpg. W t. 1-3 filters 3/4 lb. Fit directly onto lens, without adapter. Can be used in conjunction with a Bayonet Lenshood. Available in 82A, 80B, 85, 85B, Skylight 1A, red, green, yellow, and diffuser ....Each $5.913; any three for $14.98
Jr
BAYONET SQUARE LENSHOOD
Bayonets directly over camera lens. Can be used in conjunction with Bayonet Filters $5.98 POLARIZER For all bayonet mount Twinlens Reflex Cameras, including Rolleiflex size II, Ill bayonets. Consists of proper fitting and 'special Custom Polarizer with calibrated rotating mount to permit quick transfer at Correct setting from viewing to taking lens. For all bayonet mount twinlens reflex cameras, name your model, lens when ordering. Shpg. Wt. Va, lb. $ For Rolleiflex camera models with size II and size III bayonets (Planar, Xenotar) direct bayonet mount filters and lenshoods are not available - use Series VI bayonet adapter ring and Series VI filters and square lenshood - write for detailed quotations, stating
exact requirements.
REVERSE YOUR LENSES WITH
ptkame "T" REVERSER
FOR QUALITY MACRO PHOTOGRAPHY
Spiratone REVERSE RINGS screw into the front thread of lenses with standard thread sizes from 49 to 62mm. They are T threaded and accept any T camera adapter which then mounts the lens (backwards) to tubes, bellows, or the camera body. For prices of T adapters, see listing at left. Reverse Ring, to fit T Adapter, specify 49, 52, 55, 58, 62 screw-in size or Ser. VII each
$4 - 95 $2.48 98
Purchase AT SAME TIME AS T adapter and pay only Set of 3 "T" Extension tubes for greater Magnification $3 When ordered with Reverse Ring
7
Lenses— Ultra Wideangle, Telephoto, Macro Lenses A fast, affordable, high quality ULTRA WIDEANGLE using economical 58mm accessories, the PLURA-COAT® FULLY AUTOMATIC
For Critical Close-up Work, there is no substitute for a "True" Macro Lens
Spiratone 20mm
94° ULTRA WIDEANL
for NIKON, CANON, MINOLTA, OLYMPUS and PENTAX 'K' bayonet mount While the now 'standard' 28mm wideangle, with its 75° coverage, may be all right for some tasks, there are many times when it just won't do. When you need the extra coverage (94° ultra wideangle view), you need the Spiratone
he IS 0
ac nma emr
3
6 100
ft
(1'4 z
l
ea ymode 284 56 111622 20mm lens. It covers over 6X the field of your normal 50mm, almost 2X as much as a 28mm wideangle. In other words, at any given distance, at which your 50mm covers 100 square feet, the 20mm will cover a staggering 627 square feet. Or, to put it differently, it "compresses" the required working distance by picture. Of course, its sharpness, contrast, 85% (for those occasions on which you can't color fidelity and evenness of illumination are move back any further)! also remarkably good. And depth of field becomes tremendous. At its The 9 element 7 group lens is compact: just 2" smallest (f/22) opening, everything from 10 long, 2 1/4" in diameter and it uses economical inches to infinity is in focus! Even at f/5.6, 58mm accessories. It is simply the greatest depth of field extends from 21/4' to infinity. value in ultra wideangle lenses ever offered! And you can focus all the way down to 8" from the subject — with only a 1/4 turn of the focus- SPIRATONE 20mm f/2.8 ULTRA WIDEANGLE ing ring from infinity. Custom Case $5.95 All this wouldn't be impressive, if this were a 58mm WA Hood $5.95 'fish-eye' lens (fish-eye lenses are great for Name your camera, model special effects, but not when you want a wide Shpg. W 1. 2 lbs. angle view without distortion). The Spiratone 20mm lens is a 'true' wideangle; straight lines e Buy case and hood el OC FOR in your subject r main straight lines in the SAVE.. w. lens and pay only .0v BOTH
Showing the comparative fields ./ the 94° coverage of a 20mm ultra wideangle and that of a 50nim normal lens
ohkitogei A nn e euADDeunATE PRE-SET
R Tm TELEPHOTO vuu-0 7 ounnu luu L-from as close as 6m to infinity, barely weighs 21 oz.
PROVIDES FULLY AUTOMATIC EXPO cIIRE
when used with your Canon A-1, AL-1, T70; Contax; Minolta Maxxum, XD, XG, X series, XK; Nikon F3, FE, FG, FA, EM; Olympus OM -2, 4, F, G, 10; Pentax LX, MG, ME, Super Program, K2; Yashica FX, FR and other aperture preferred SLRs. With all non-aperture preferred SLRs, you use the Sharpshooter's preset diaphragm for stop-down method of metering, still taking advantage of your behind-the-lens metering system for accurate exposures. The Spiratone 400mm f/6.3 SHARPSHOOTER has been acknowledged as the outstanding value in long telephotos for well over a decade. Testimonials from users and test reports and feature articles in the major camera magazines have confirmed the excellent resolution, color correction and contrast it produces. COMPUTER DESIGNED ... SHARP, COMPACT AND LIGHTWEIGHT The SHARPSHOOTER '400-S' incorporates a computer-generated, integrally designed, true-telephoto optical system of 4 elements in 4 groups, to create, a truly compact lens, only 10 inches long. Focuses
and uses economical 67mm filters. It utilizes a convenient pre-set diaphragm with stops from f/6.3 to f/32 for extra depth of field when needed. Imagine the "reach" of the Sharpshooter '400-S' — reducing effective camera-to-subject distance by 87%; magnifying the image 8X (64X the area) compared with your normal 50mm lens! And while this light compact lens is most 'handholdable', it's equipped with a rotating tripod collar for convenient vertical or horizontal positioning when tripod mounting is desired. There are many useful, inexpensive accessories which we have especially designed for the Spiratone '400-S'.
05
SPIRATONE SHARPSHOOTER one '400-S' with coated optics, snap-cap,, camera fitting, detailed instructions. For most any SLR. Please name your camera, make, model. Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs.
Tubular Deluxe Carrying Case w. filter compartment inside cover (illustrated) .. $ 9.95 K(.1 Super Case Model '100' holds camera with '400-S' in 'everready' position (illustrated) 24.95 Custom Screw-in Metal Telephoto long See Lenshood (illustrated) 10.95 pg 42 67mm Custom Coated Screw-in Filters Haze/UV, Skylight, Yellow, Red, Neutral Density 4X, 80B, 82A, 85B, each 13.75 67mm Custom Polarizer ...$16.54 Metal Screw-in Cap 4.00 67mm Hard-coated Optical Glass Opticap 9.00
rm p ouhl ot i o- ctoear t e (1.8n0o0e rmt emr Rae makes the Spiratone '400-S' into an 800mm f/12.6 super telephoto for almost unbelievable magnification of 16X your normal lens, reg. $25. Order at same time as '400-S' $20 and pay only
CONVERT TO 800mm
TM
0
The Spiratone '400-S' is also available with MULTI-COATING in the PLURA-COAT' MODEL The Spiratone '400-S' PLURA-COAT ® MODEL is MULTI-COATED to control ghosting and to provide maximum contrast and color saturation, even in back-lighted, distant scenes. Add to cost of lens or lens outfit
makes your lens into an efficient
Shpg. Wt. 2 1/z lbs.
Fully automatic custom mount models for Canon, Minolta, Nikon, Olympus, Pentax IFYashica-Contax
Name your camera make .,\=. and modei„,-= Lens shown in "nipAal" and extended 10,1 position. keep "True" Macro Design The Spiratone Proxitel represents the ultimate tool for the serious macro photographer. It is specially designed for optimum performance ill the macro range (up to and including same size, 1:1), providing excellent "flat field" image quality with outstanding resolution, high contrast and color correction. So-called "macro zoom" and other close-focusing lenses represent a design compromise which, while permitting reasonably close focus, do not provide the correction required for critical macro work. On the other hand, the Proxitel yields optimum results in the very range in which other such lenses vary from mediocre to unusable.
The 90mm (tele) Macro Advantage
The Proxitel's 90mm focal length is exceptionally well suited for its specialized task; it enables you to photograph small objects at a working distance almost twice as great as that possible with a 50mm lens: you'll have better perspective, valuable added space for placing lights and arranging for proper foreground and background.
ONLY 1
AWL.
Unlike most other "true" macro lenses which require an extension coupler to achieve lifesize (1:1) images, the Proxitel offers a continuous focusing range from infinity to 1:1 so that this single lens can be left on the camera for any series of jobs requiring a wide range of reproduction ratios.
Ideal for Duplicating
The Proxitel can be used for 1:1 duplicating in conjunction with any suitable slide illuminator; with extension tubes, it can be used for somewhat greater magnifications, still taking advantage of its special correction for such work. SPECIFICATIONS: Design: Flat Field, Macro; Construction: 6 elements in 5 groups; Aperture: f/2.5 - f/22 with half stops; Focusing Range: Continuous from infinity to 360mm (14 1/4") from film plane; Reproduction Ratio: Variable (.) to 1:1; Length: 3 3/8" at oo, 7" at 1:1; Weight: 19 oz. approx.; Fitter size: 62mm; Coating: multicoated "WATCH WORKS" at 1:1 it‘
4111
111PS
chased as outfit Shpg. Wt. 4 lbs.
$105.95 With Pluracoat lens, reg. $114.60 To substitute Super Case for Tubular Case—add $10 to outfit prices above
NOW MAKE THE '400-S' SHARPSHOOTER INTO AN EFFICIENT 28X TELESCOPE Screw the Spiratone T-Scope Attachment into the rear of this, or any 'T' mount telephoto, and you'll have a fine quality, powerful telescope. The Attachment produces a bright, sharp, RIGHT SIDE UP, FULLY ERECT IMAGE. T-SCOPE purchased by itself Buy T-Scope at same time g. Wt. 1 1/2 lbs. as '400-S' AND PAY ONLYti .QC $24 95 Order No. 474 002 Order No. 474045 qi(UU4
Now,, tveretsucaolpl.:
ltHfitisooytoonutrlycaomoeneraeroanyoboeri mooamdeeraintloenao
e ThrelelVi TELESCOP E 50mm lens becomes a 5X scope, your 400mm a 40X, your 80-200
zoom a zoom scope of 8 to 20X! Small !2x1 1/2"1 and lightweight (3 1/2 oz.), the Spiratone TELETACH provides you with a variety of telescopic capabilities you'll appreciate at sports events, while traveling or for nature studies. The Spiratone TELETACH, available for Canon, Minolta, Nikon, Olympus, Pentax K mount lenses — .r.r.u4/ Shpg. Wt. 1 lb. name your camera, model. including case
sli pc
8
199 '
9 incl. "Everready Pouch"
Continuous Focusing to 1:1
SPIRATONE '400-S' ACCESSORIES 01 SAVE ON 4 PC. SHARPSHOOTER OUTFIT Spiratone '400-S' Sharpshooter with case, haze filter, metal EXTEND CAMERAILENS VERSATILITY telephoto lenshood, reg. $104.60, when pur$95 95
TELETACH
with continuous focusing to 1:1
95
20mm
■3r
90mm f12.5 PRQXITEL® __MACRO LENS
You r
SAVE $10
Buy Teletach at same time as any SLR lens and pay only
$24.95
At 2:1 with 2X linear magnification attachment
Macro Attachment for 90mm Proxitel
doubles the magnification to 2X linear! Specially formulated attachment screws into front of Proxitel to increase magnification to twice life size. Provides excellent sharpness when used with lens 95 Incl. stopped down case .
$24
The Spikatoge 55mm f/2.8 PROXITEPTRUE" MACRO LENS
with continuous focusing to 1:1 offers stifle "true" macro quality and features as the 90mm Proxitel (above), but in a "normal" focal length lens. Specifications: f /2.84 /16, 5 elements in 4 groups, length to 5 14", weight approx. 12 oz., uses 62mm filters, muNicoated. For all camera models lisied above $1 incl. "Everready Pouch" Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
39.95
35 SLR Lenses,TeIXtender, WHEN YOU'RE READY TO GO BEYOND THE NORMAL 50mm LENSStart with a 28mm in a fixed focal length for economy . . . or a 28-80mm zoom - the basic wideangle-to-telephoto zoom 2,9„, . or a 28-105mm zoom-the extended wideangle-to-telephoto zoom -4111? It's the most useful focal length after your normal '50' It includes almost 4X as much area as your normal lens (from the same shooting position!) You would have to go almost twice as far back from your subject (if you had room to do so) with your 50mm lens, to include the same amount of subject area as you will cover with a 28mm lens And while you can 'crop' and enlarge part of a photograph in order to simulate telephoto effects, there is no way you can 'create' a wideangle effect-you had to have the extra coverage on the negative or slide. That's why Spiratone is offering you three ways to obtain that "28mm Capability" - all with lenses at prices which cannot be matched for optics of such outstanding performance and workmanship. All lenses are fully automatic, meter-coupled and multicoated. Available for CANON, NIKON, MINOLTA, OLYMPUS, PENTAX-K - specify your camera make, model.
28mm f/2.8 Wideangle This fixed focal length, compact lens will satisfy most all of your wideangle needs - from shooting groups in tight interiors, to wide coverage of architectural and scenic vistas. Specifications: 7 elements in 6 groups, f12.8 - f/22, 76° angle of view, minimum focus 8", filter size 52mm, length 38mm, diameter 65mm, weight 192g. Specify camera make, model Case $5.95
Shpg. Wt. 1 lb.
$59.95
Screw-in Wideangle LENSHOODS for Spiratone Lenses 52mm hood for 28mm $5.95 62mm hood for 28-80mm .6.95 67mm hood for 28-105mm 7.95
28.80mm f/3.5-4.5 ONE TOUCH ZOOM with Macro Focusing The "basic", most popular wideangle to telephoto zoom range in a compact, handy, onetouch design lens. Focus with just a twist of the wrist and simultaneo zoom with a simple push or pull of cusing collar. This "workhorse" 76° to 30° angular covers length fn range regdu l`And in the macro ontinually focus a t3 h a sub2- 0ject as s Specifications: in 13 groups, f/3.5 (28mm) 1'4.5 (80m /22, 76° - 30° angle of view, focusing range to 6', in macro to 2', filter size 62mm, length 81mm, weight 450g. Specify camera, make, model Case $8.95
Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
$109.95
28-105mm f/3.5-4.9 EXTENDED RANGE ZOOM with Macro Focusing the "top" of the line of 28mm-to-moderate telephoto zooms The 1:3.75 ratio (28 to 105mm) brings the range up into the telephoto focal lengths most desireable for portraiture, general and moderate distance work. At 105mm, the lens yields an image magnification of oyyy r two times linear (four times the area) of your nor s. The "two touch" construction provides sepsis rings for focusing and zooming, a system y photographers. The macro focusin down to 10 inches, coverin 4it to fill the full .c..0\vs 35mm format. 11'‘ r, Specifications: s, f/3.5 (28mm) . e of view, focusing .; f/4.9 (105mm) range to 61/2'; in macr t Iter size 67mm, length 88mm, weight 500g. pecify camera, make, model Case $9.95 Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. For prices of screw-in filters see page 44
$159.95
SAVE ON ACCESSORIES
TELETACH (see page 81 ULTIMATE (see TELXTENDERS2X, reg. $29.95 $24, 3X, reg. $37.95 $31, telescope/attachment, SLR CASE, page 31 bought at same time as 28mm, 28-80mm, 28-105mm, 28-210mm lenses each case $1.95 (see description on right) reg. $34.95 reg. $24.95 $18.95 $24.95
28mm
50mm
80mm
The focal length of your normal, telephoto and zoom lenses with a,q ikotoge MULTI-COATED p 2X and 3X
TELXTEN DER® IMAGINE! A single Spiratone 2X TeIXtender makes your 50mm lens into a 100mm telephoto, doubles the range of your zoom lens. For example, an 80-200mm zoom becomes a 160 .400mm zoom.
IMAGINE! A single Spiratone 3X TeIXtender makes your 50mm normal lens into a 150mm telephoto, your 135mm telephoto into a 405mm super telephoto! What's more Your automatic lens retains all its automatic features when 'TeIXtended'. Your new, long lens combination focuses just as close as without the TelXtender - so you have the closest focusing, normal, telephoto or zoom lens possible. Example: your normal 50mm lens focused at 11/2 feet covers 3x4 1/2 " or 2x3" with the 2X or 3X respectively. You'll be using the same filters - because the 'TelXtended' lens is only an inch or so longer, but didn't get any wider. And by shooting at just a couple of f stops below maximum, you'll get results that rival exposures taken with the finest lenses. MULTICOATED FULLY AUTOMATIC,
TELXTENDERS $2995
For most current models Canon,Centex, 2)( Konica, Minolta, Nikon (Al series only), Olympus, Pentak K' bayonet, Pentax universal SCREW mount, Yashica bayonet 3)( and other same mount, same auto system cameras. Name your exact make, model camera Case $1.95 additional
$3795
Shpg. Wt.
105mm
1
lb. ea.
420mm (2 1 0+2X)
210mm
All photos taken with the 28.210 zoom lens front the same camera position with focal length settings indicated. Large groups, interiors or scenic landscapes at 28mm; portraiture or still life at 80mm; and wildlife or sporting events at 210mm. Sure, for all these photo-
graphic situations you could use two zoom lenses, a "28-80" and an "80210". But, together these would measure about 10" in length and weigh at least 40 oz. Not to mention the fact that you'd have to switch back and forth f rom one to the other as your subjects require. But now there is a single lens, covering the combined ranges of these two lenses, truly an "ultimate" zoom lens for just about every wideangle, normal and telephoto focal length need!
tk_ 28-210mm 0.5-5.6 Zoom Lens We are proud to offer such a "super zoom" optic, the
with macro capability, zoom/focus lock system and one touch zoom/focus control
SPECIFICATIONS:
Angle of view: 1 1°-7 5° Construction: 14 elements in 11 groups Aperture range: f /4-5.6-f 2 2 -3 2 Minimum focusing distance: at 28mm to 8' at 7 Omm through 210mm-continuous to 34" macro-1:4 magnification Filter size: 7 2mm Length: 5.1"
Only 5.1" long and weighing under 30 ounces, this 7.5X zoom ratio Kiron lens represents a major breakthrough in optical design. With this single lens, you cover everything from the 75° ange of the all-encompassing "28" to the 11° angle of view of the subject-grabbing 2 1 Omm telephoto. And by adding a Spiratone 2X TeIXtender you can double the maximum focal length to 420mm.
It's great in the macro range, too: you can fill the entire 35mm format with a subject as small as a postcard (4x6"). Precision-engineered to provide smooth operation and fine resolution throughout its entire range, the Kiron lens' non-rotating front barrel simplifies the use of polarizers, prisms and other front lens attachments.
28-2 lOmm Kiron Lens, available in custom mounts for Canon, Konica, Minolta, Nikon, Olympus, Pentax K, "A", Yashica/Contax. Name your camera, make, model Lens, including the popular Spiratone Ultimate SLR Case (a fabulous value at $24.95-see page 3 for description-you save $15) Shpg. Wt. lens 4 lbs., with case 5 lbs.
2
09.95
$219.95
Rediscover the unique beauty of the portraits and landscapes of the early photographers losf with the ptjto
100mm PORTRACONT" for Nikon, Minolta, Canon, Olympus, Pentax, most other modern 35mm SLR's
Even with the various diffusion attachments and special effect filters that are available, today's highly corrected, contrasty lenses cannot reproduce the nostalgic quality of yesteryear's optics. Spiratone's PORTRAGON is a modern recreation of the primitive single element lens, mounted in a precision focusing mount which fits most any 35mm SLR. Unlike diffusers, fog filters and other soft tocus devices, the PORTRAGON produces a reasonably sharp center image with noticeable falloff towards the edges characterized by increasing chromatic aberration. This adds emphasis to the important central portion of the picture, while suffusing the surroundings with a most pleasing, soft and romantic frame for the subject. The Portragon's focal length is ideal for portraits, providing an image twice as large as that obtainable with your normal lens when used at the same distance. The aperture is f/4 fixed -you are always shooting wide open to achieve the desired effect; exposure control is automatic with aperture preferred cameras or controlled manually by adjusting your shutter speed. Focusing is from infinity to 3 feet; weighs only 5 oz.
$3495
SAVE 50°70 ON SPECIAL 28-210mm ACCESSORY PACKAGE: Screw-in lens hood, UV/haze filter and regular Custom Polarizer (see page 14), reg. $45.24, when bought at same time as lens $22.62
When ordering, specify model. Shpg. Wt.1 lb. ACCESSORIES:
Velvet-lined Pouch Metal Lenshood
$3.50 $3.50
SwimSTROBE
SPIRATONE PROFFSSIONAI SPIRALITE
The Model 600 is the heart of the most sophisticated, economy-priced, professional electronic flash system ever offered, a marvel of features and versatility.
Model 600 Strobe shown with Light-Holder and Universal Swivel Holder
The Spiralite System Strobe is an AC electronic flash which can be triggered by means of its 12' PC cord (from the camera), the light of another strobe (through its built-in slave sensor) or its open flash/test button. It screws directly into any standard 110/120v AC socket, has a GN of over 100 for ASA 100, a color temperature of 5600°K (daylight) and recycles in a quick 5-7 seconds. It comes equipped with a readylight and accommodates a large variety of custom lighting accessories (see below). 3 for $105 • 6 for $190 Yet, it is only 5" long, has a maximum diameter of 4" and weighs just 10 oz.
Each$3995
The unique light source for ultra wideangle work, for truly omni-directional lighting, •
SYSTEM mum
This is a special version of the Spiralite System Str which uses a bare bulb housed,,i clear, protective sleeve in place, the regular reflector/built-in flash" t _ providing a unique omni-erect nal light pattern with extremely wide coverc‘erly well age. This makes it pea, suitedii0' use with ul ideangle lenses for mult140 e applications e, tWeh light distribution We: Includes slave sensor (Filt arndoors, Softbox not ec,N1lif Shpg. Wt. 1 /b. 2 for $99.95 ' oh
For those professional portraits there's no better choice than that even, north light effect attainable with the
SOFT BOX ATTACHMENT
Collapsible design with double diffusion panel (10" x 10") mounts onto model 600 instantly and features highly reflective silver inside panels for optimum light efficiency. Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
$29.95
4.95
BARNDOORS
4 leaf design, for limiting angle of illumination; for shielding camera lens from flare-inducing direct light.
CONICAL SNOOT AND HONEYCOMBS
Model
32m m in diameter, 100mm SNOOT long ; mounted on the model 600 it restricts the light beam to serve as a hairlight in portraiture; or use it whenever a concentrated light beam for special effects is required. Shpg. Wt. 'Fe lb.
$5.95
FOR ADVANCED LIGHT TECHNIQUES hpg. Wt.1 lb. One of the most useful, yet least understood accessories tor product photography lighting (and portraiture too!), the conical snoot restricts the light from the SSS 600 to a concentrated beam, allowing the photographer to highlight, rim light, or add halos without spilling light into other areas of the picture. Buy any of the accessories on this page at the same time from prices of Adding a honeycomb to the front of the as one Spiralite Strobe Model 600 or BB and 0 these accessories. snoot further restricts the light System beam and creates shadows with dramatic hard edges. Buy at same time as $94.90 or more Models prices of The fine honeycomb attachment provides _ 600 or BB Spiralite Systems Strobes and these accessories. somewhat harder shadows than the me*all items listed on this page can be counted as 'Accessories' except Spiralite Models 600, BB dium honeycomb. Conical Snoot with medium honeycomb Order No. 204412 Shpg. W t.1 lb. $22.50 For perfect balancing of your lights, our PHOTO GRIP-ALLTM Fine honeycomb only SET OF 3 FILTERS, 1 WIDEANGLE ATTACHMENT. Order No. 204447 Shpg. Wt. '/s lb. $14.95 for Slavemates, Spiralite System Strobe These snap onto the front of Spiralite System Strobe, proThe clamp's wide rubber-covered jaws SAVE! SNOOT WITH BOTH HONEYCOMBS, ONLY $31.50 vide, slight warming (81 type), UV-blocking (particularly open to a full 2", providing, with its useful with Polaroid Color films), neutral density (to reduce strong spring, a very firm grip. MULTI-HOLDER light intensity, for close-ups), There is a tripod socket on the bottom or wideangle coverage (appr. for mounting three Spiralite of the clamp—so you can screw it accessory of 28mm WA on 35mm SLR). System Strobes or two —."onto any tripod or lightstand with a o ne / Complete set ... . .1\t \ / Spiralite System Strobes 1/4"-20 thread. And on the top is an Shpg. 1.1/4 lb. and a modeling light (in SSS ' $6.95 I accessory shoe onto which you can \L Light Holders). Fits any triattach a strobe or any other shoe- tripod / pod, lightstand or other socket —■ equipped item and swivel it 360°! holder with 1/4" 20 screw. The light receptacle which is part of the outfit, fits of course, PLUG-IN SLAVE, plugs into s"" Use to create 'flash banks' the same shoe and incorporates a tilter which allows ±80° tilt. for high power lighting needs. Spiralite System Strobe, use it Shpg. Wt. 1 lb. $4.95 The ceramic socket is equipped with an 8' cord with linewhen built-in slave is obstructed switch, and is rated for 600 watts. It can be used to hold a (as with Softbox). reflector flood, a modeling light or the Spiralite Slavemate. Shpg. Wt. % lb. ' vs> MINI-CLAMP $7.95
$1 2.95
'
■
-'1111:114-411.11.111 . DEDUCT 10/ DEDUCT 20q gpbttoge
Attaches to almost anything
Spring-loaded, rubber-covered jaws permit installation of the 5/8 " stud/1/4" thread mount on practically any shelf partition, or at any point on a light stand (or other tubular structure) (up to PA"). When used with the Universal Swivel Holder, the Mini-Clamp provides the perfect solution for those difficult-to-light situations. Shpg. W t. 1 lb
Each $6.95 • 3 for $17.95
P . Ea. $14.95 Og;r9 4
CASES for your LIGHTING OUTFIT FREE
°Ae5r9;11°
or at great SAVINGS!
Buy any item described on this page and earn a 10 % CREDIT toward purchase of either case.
For example, if you order $300 worth of Spiralite System Strobes and accessories, you pay only $9.95 for the Special (39.95 less 30.00 Credit) or $39.95 for the Studio Case (69.95 less 30.00 Credit). And if you order 8399.50 or more, the Special Carry Case is yours free, on request.
UNIVERSAL SWIVEL HOLDER
STUDIO CUSTOM CASE, .10 a rigid case made tilts 155° (+90° to —65° from vertical), swivels of ABS and vulcan 360°. Use to mount Light-Holder or Multifibre on a reinHolder, with or without umbrella or FlexiFlector. forced aluminum Fits any light-stand up to 5/s" diame- $e 95 frame. Measures ter or'". 20 or 3/8 "-16 threaded tops. 13 29" x 12" x 61/2" Shpg. Wt. VA lbs. overall and features egg crate foam cushion in LIGHT-HOLDER, porcelain socket lid with 4" of unwith protective metal cover, 10' cut foam in main cord, in-line switch, fits any tripod, lightstand or other holder with 1/4 rerae: rig2 8 a1/2 2x8 );( 20 screw. 4" compartment for stands, umbrellas. Shpg. th lb.
$8.95
10
3 for $39.95
• Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. each
$69.95
SPECIAL CARRYCASE,
made of heavy vinyl, 271/2" long, 6" wide, 11" deep, with folding partitioned shelf to hold Spiralite System Strobes, umbrellas, lightstands, other accessories. The most elegant solution to "taking-it-on-location" problems. For example, it will accommodate 3 Model 600's, 3 LightHolders, 3 Universal Swivel Holders, 3 light stands, 2 umbrellas and many smaller accessories such as Gaffer's tape, the Power Center etc. Shpg. Wt. 4 lbs. $39.95
STUDIO EQUIPMENT The Spiratone VERSA CLAMPT"SYSTEM The Spiratone Versa-Clamp System is a most complete, professional studio "hardware" system including the Cam-Lock floor-to-ceiling poles and all the versatile hardware for mounting lights and booms, controlling wires, etc. and for constructing almost any studio lighting frame and support. The Spiratone Versa-Clamp itself is truly the "everything" clamp—the most versatile fastening device ever designed for use in a studio environment. It will hold just about anything you can think of, be it cameras, lights, umbrellas, backgrounds or shelves. The screw-actuated, rubber-covered, 1 1/2 " thick "jaws" will firmly anchor the clamp to beams, poles, doors, pipes, tripod or light stand sections, in fact to anything up to 2" thick! A hexagonal socket with screwlock and a safety spring-loaded lock accepts mating studs which can hold background crossbars (use U hooks), shelves (use L brackets), glass panels for shoot. thru effects (use narrow U hooks), lights (use light stud, included), umbrellas or reflectors (use universal swivel holder), or even cameras (use extension arm).
THE DOUBLE VERSA CLAMP
consists of two Versa Clamps fastened together at right angles and is most useful in erecting background supports, gantry bars, light tables, etc.
AN ECONOMICAL, COMPLETE SYSTEM CAM-LOCK POLES Cam-Lock Poles are the easiest-to-use support system for the studio ever made. Whether you use them as background support uprights, light positioning members, or even as horizontal gantry bars, these poles will be equal to the task! From a collapsed length of 2.1m (83"), they extend to a lofty 3.7m (145 ,/2 ") and, thanks to their indetail of genious cam-action locking mechanism, actuend pad ally expand slightly after installation to provide and clamp the most secure positioning possible. lever Large (80mm dia.) rubber pads protect the surfaces upon which the poles are installed. Additional 1.5m extension poles to fit between upper and lower sections are also available. By using the Versa Clamp, or even the double Versa Clamp, a myriad of accessories can be fastened to the sturdy lower (45mm dia.) or upper (40mm dia.) sections. Set of two Cam-Lock Poles Order No. 230006 Shpg. Wt. 15 lbs. $89.95 Set of two 1.5m extensions for Cam-Lok c Poles Order No 230200 Shpg. Wt. 10 lbs. $29.95
System Strobe SOU 23 piece Budget Outfit $229.95 a. Shpg.
Cable Clips, Cable Hooks Item
Code Y
Z CC FF EE DD AA BB
Price
Versa Clamp, incl. light stud two for Double Versa Clamp Extension arm U Hooks, pair Narrow U Hooks, pair L Brackets, pair Cable Clip, set of 12 Cable Hooks, set of 6
Shpg. Wt.
$19.95 11/2 lbs. 37.95 2 1/2 lbs.
34.95 11.95 8.95 9.45 9.95
8.50
7.95
2 lbs. 1 lb. 1 lb. 1 lb. 2 lbs. 1/2 lb. 1 lb.
The efficient way to organize your loose power cables. The Cable Clip simply snaps onto any tube (boom, light stand) of between 22 to 28mm in diameter ( z ," to 11/2") and neatly holds the cable against same. The Cable Hook is used in the same manner, and additionally features a hook to hang unused cable lengths.
TWO fine Bar Graph Electronic Display
1;111tottgerLASH1VIETERS
with Direct ri nely Readout
If you've ever tried to arrive at the proper exposure (when using multiple flash) by calculations, you know what a frustrating experience that can be. By contrast, with a Spiratone Flash Meter at the subject position, just trigger your strobes (you don't need to connect the meter to your strobe) and read off the f /stop as indicated by the bar graph LED display — no confusing calculator dials to contend with. The meters' 180° hemispherical receptors integrate the light from multiple flashes and the efficient Silicon Photo Diode (a highly sensitive and accurate detector) combines with the sophisticated peak-hold electronics to lock in and display the flash reading until (manually) reset, and your f /stop is read off directly from Lie exposure scale — there's no need to "interpret" readings when you change film speeds — what could simpler? Pr-:vision-engineered and manufactured and light in weight, Spiratone Flash Meters will help you get correct exposures with any number of non-auto strobes (or auto strobes in the manual mode), including professional strobes with flash durations of 1/1000 sec. to 1/2000 sec. (1/500 to 1/2000 sec. for Model SSS).
Model SSS
to nearest half stop
$99
50
20' PC•PC Synch Cord for triggering strobes from SSS meter reading position, only $4.98
SAVE!
UY
Readout
to nearest full stop
Accuracy
1/2 f/stop
6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 60, 64, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800, 1000, 1280, 1600, 2000, 2600, 3200, 4000, 5000, 6400, 8000
ASA Film Speed Settings
6, 12, 25, 50, 100, 200, 400, 800 Intermediate settings available
f/1.0 to f/64 in 1/2 stop increments
Aperture Scale
f/2 to f164 in full stop increments
One 9v battery (included)
Power Source
One 9v battery (included)
137x60x50mm 137 grams (without battery)
Size & Weight
115x55x46mm 80 grams (without battery)
Single reading multiple flash exposure scale. Over-range flashing indicator. Measures Reflected and Incident Light. Built-in buffer for cord operation with most any sync cord (PC terminal). Reset button (for cordless mode).
Other Features
DE
Shpg Wt.
40 piece Deluxe Outfit $499.95 851be
Measuring EV8-EV16 (f/2-f/22 at ASA Range 100/21°)
0.2 f/stop
Sr A V EMAP) . T Es
SPikliat System Strobe
SPECIFICATIONS Model M-R
EV9-EV17 (f/2.8-f/32 at ASA 100/21°)
Price includes case, carrying handle/stand and battery Order No. 202266 Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
This four strobe outfit provides an amazingly complete lighting set-up at an unbeatably low price—$65.78 less than the cost of the separate components. Adaptable for virtually every type of photographic work, the Budget Outfit is suited for the small studio as well as for the advanced amateur. And it entitles you to buy additional 'Accessories' listed on page ten at a 10% discountlor, if you choose, you can buy an extra SSS '600' or SSS Bare Bulb unit and qualify for the 20% discount on 'Accessories'.) You also earn a 'Case Credit' ($22.99; more if you buy additional accessories) towards your choice of Special Outfit or Custom Studio Case so that you can economically house and carry most of your equipment. 42" Silver Umbrella The 23 piece Outfit includes: (1)30" White Umbrella (21155-H Light Stands (2) Spiralite System Strobes '600' 131 Light-Holders 121 Spiralite Slavemates 121 Universal Swivel Holders 111 Barndoors for '600' 111 Multi-Holder (1) Snout for '600' 111 Photo Grip-All (1) Set of 3 filters and 1 Wide(2)Ball Adapters angle Attachment for '600'
ttt6A00 SSTROB ES EORSETI&OBRA
Over-range flash( indicator. Socket f
t..
'ill
A
Price includes case, carrying handle/stand and battery er No. 202304 Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
uffer circuit, for triggering strobes from M-R meter reading position, when bought with M-R, only $3.95
DEDUCT $100FO1EcAT.
This six strobe, 40 piece outfit provides the photographer with a most versatile lighting set-up—suitable for portraiture, group shots, product and commercial work. At our $499.95* Outfit price, you save $143.00 over the individual component prices. Of course, you can select additional accessories for this outfit—and deduct 20% from the cost of all such accessory items listed on page 10. And buying the Outfit earns you a $49.95 'Case Credit' so you can get a special Carrying Case free (on request) or a Custom Studio Case for only $20! The 40 piece Outfit includes: 111 30" White Umbrella 121 Pro Stand I 131 Spiralite System Strobes '600' (1) Spiralite System Strobe BB (11 M-R Flashmeter (21 Sp iralite Slavemates WEE Sync Cord 121 Barndoors for '600' (31 Light-Holders (1) Stool for '600' 141 Universal Swivel Holders 121 Sets, each consisting of 121 Multi-Holders 3 filters and 1 Wideangle 131 Photo Grip-Ails Attachment for '600' (2) Plug-in Slaves for '600' CO Soft Box Attachment Ill 50w Modeling Light Bulb CO 44 Square Saver Umbrella Ill Multi-Outlet Power Center 'With SSS flashmeter instead of Model M-R, add $30 to outfit price, (with 20' PC-PC instead of EE Sync cord)
11
Lighting Accessories 5ihrAten
LIGHT STANDS
SPIRATONE PRO STAND I
AND RELATED ACCESSORIES
SPIRATONE LS3 - our most economical stand and a great value. Quite sturdy, extends to a tail 76", telescopes to a compact 26". All metal. Standard tripod screw on top holds any tripod threaded strobe or accessory. Strong, cushion tipped legs with set-screw$i 4 lock. mpg. Wt. 3 lbs. Order No. 106458
I
Buy at same time as Umbrelite and pay only $13.99
Stands, Booms, Polarizers
A
Its light weight (23/4 lbs.) and 27 1/2 " collapsed length (make the 4 section Pro Stand I (PS I) the choice for on-location lighting setups. Belying its compactness, the PS I has an in-use height range of 33" to 99" which, coupled with the steady support of its tubular legs opening on a wide base spread diameter of 33" and 1" diameter base section, allow it to support most any load. The stand's top is fitted with a 1/4"-20 threaded fitting. Wt, 5 lbs. Shpg.
$33.95
SP RATONE PHOTOFLOOD STAND-
identical to the LS3 (but without tripod screw). Includes a swivel action crossbar which allows you to attach clamp-on reflectors at different levels. Order No. 106377 Shpg. Wi. 4 lbs.
SPIRATONE PRO STAND II
$16. 9
,
photoflood stand is illustrated with reflectors, clamp & cord sets ( for prices of these, see other parts of this listing)
SPIRATONE LS5H - for big stand portability, this model can't be beat. Five section, heavy duty (over 4 lbs. net), steel legs, aluminum sections, all with set screw locks. 26" collapsed, extends to 9 feet tan. Shpg. Wt. 6 lbs.
$23.99
Who Says a Good Light Stand has to be a Heavyweight?
THE PROFESSIONAL FEATHERWEIGHTTM
combines the sturdiness of a medium weight stand of outstanding construction with an extremely light weight that belies its sturdiness. The Featherweight collapses to a compact 23 1/2", extends to 77" maximum height and telescopes to a 27 1/2 " minimum height (ideal for background lights)-it weighs a scant 17oz And it's ideally suited to hold small electronic flash units (such as the SSS 600), quartz lights like the Spiratone M0550 and the Mini Spotlight, video lights such as the Spiratone Budget Quartz and VOL-300 and so on. Since it weighs so little, you'll always be able to take along an extra stand or two for location work. without endangering your back. The Pro's Featherweight features 4-section construction with ribbed tubular sections (for maximum rigidity), channel cross-section legs, flip-lever locks (for speed in adjustments); it provides a 1/4"-20 threaded stud for light mounting. For fittings to adapt the 1/4-20 thread to most any mounting configuration required, see at right. each SPECIAL-Spiratone's Utility Case, holds up to three Featherweights, umbrellas etc. (see 3 for $59.95 pg. 6 for full details), when purchased with Shpg. Wt. two or more Featherweights, only .$4.95 each 2 lbs.
SPIRATONE REMOTE CONTROL BOOM. This ingeniously simple device,
in conjunction with the Spiratone LS3, LS5H, allows you to manipulate the angle of a shoemounted strobe without climbing a ladder or pulling it down every time you want to change its position. Two section boom extends from 35 to 65", 24" handle for remote adjustment, counterweight. When ordering separately, be sure to specify stand with which it is to be used. Includes boom bracket. Shpg. Wt. 4 lbs. Order No. 106511 44, • 1,./
191
SPIRATONE MINI BOOM Similar to Remote Control Boom (above) but slightly smaller and without the remote control arm; 2 sections - extends to 45" collapses to 26". Including boom bracket$1 Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. Order No. 209961 I
5
.95
SPikotoN MAXI STAND
a;
The Pro Stand II (PS II) is an extra tall (130") 4 section light stand with a 48" diameter base spread and provides solid support for an over 15 lb. load. Its minimum extension of 45" and collapsed length of 39" make the PS II the choice for most any studio-application, whether it is to support with excellent stability a heavy strobe bank, an umbrella setup or a 'boomed' light. The PS II comes equipped w heavy duty casters for added mobility and ease of positioning g The stand's top is fitted witn a %" stud and 54"-20 threaded fitting, making it compatible with all SSS hardware.
36" stud with 1/4"-20 fitting
"-
ii0--1*-, ity4
socket fits accessory clip of camera or bracket, tripod or 1/4-20 thread of light stand. Female shoe accepts strobe, offering total tilt and rotation control, Holder accommodates umbrella, any rod up to 36" $13.95 diameter. Order No. 201308 Shpg. Wt. 1/4 lb. SPIRATONE BOOMBRACKET. Fits any %" light stand section; functions for boom or umbrella. Provides full control to lock at any height or angle, can be used with LS3 or LS5H stands. $12.95 Order No. 201197 Shpg. Wt. 1 lb. SHOE ADAPTER fits tripod screw of LS3 or tripod and accepts shoe mounted accessories. $2.25 Order No. 206725 Shpg. 14 lb.
MINI CROSSBAR fits (%"1 top section of LS3, LS5 stands. - Contour surface holds any spring clamp light securely. $350 Order No. 206652 Shpg. Wt. 1/2 lb. UNIVERSAL BALL ADAPTER, a combination ball for direct mounting of clamp-light socket, or tripod thread to convert light stands for tripod socket accessories. Shps. W't. 14 lb Order No. 200158 $1.50 SPIRATONE FLASHTILTER fits accessory shoe of camera, shoe adapter, flash bracket, or threads onto tripod or tripod thread of LS3. Locks strobe in any tilt position. Order No. 201314 Shpg. Wt. lb. $4.50 TRIPLE PC CONVERTER for simultaneous firing of up to 3 identical or similar strobes. Order No. 207071..$3.95 UNIVERSAL HOT SHOE BOUNCE ADAPTER • a hot shoe bounce with 360 swivel capability • a hot shoe to PC adapter w/bounce • a PC to hot shoe adapter w/bounce 1/4 lb. $19.95 Order No. 207152 Shpg.
BACKLITE STAND where no other stand will do Clever design permits really low, close-to-theground positioning of electronic flash for illuminating backgrounds and for backlighting the subject. Accessory extension (included) may be Shpg. used to elevate light up to about 3 feet. Mini- Wt. mum mounting height is 4". Fitted with 'A" 4 lbs. stud p and 1/4 " 20 threaded fitting. Order No. 206555 $24.95 FOLDS FOR COMPACT STORAGE
The SPIRATONE PROFESSIONAL BOOM
Now, a truly versatile, extra long boom, to fulfill the exacting requirements of the professional studio. The generously proportioned 1"
FLASH ACCESSORIES BOUNCEMASTERe the universal bounce, umbrella 'bracket' that fills so many photographic 40 4-, j 'SPIRATONE needs! Male shoe with lock screw and built-in tripod S4.5
$69.95 Shpg. 14'5. 16 lbs.
Order No. 265209 diameter 3-section boom arm is readily assembled to a length of over 61/2 feet. Easily repositionable 11 pound counterweight effectively balances the boom (with light attached), even when the boom is extended to the maximum. The oversize boom bracket has provision for mounting onto 4 different diameter lightstand sections & allows for effortless positioning of the boom arm. The end of the boom arm is fitted with a 5/8 " stud and l/4 "-20 threaded fitting, making it compatible with all SSS hardware. The use of a Universal Swivel Holder is recommended for maximum light positioning flexibility. The Professional Boom should only be used on a heavy duty stand such as the Pro Stand II or equivalent.
STUDIO BOOM
with positionable counterweight The perfect solution tor placing electronic flash above the subject. The 4' long Studio Boom comes complete with its own boom swivel clamp, adjustable counterweight and a dual 5/8" stud/ 1/4" thread fitting. For maximum flexibility, use with Universal Swivel Holder. Order No. 206601 $29.95 Shpg. Wt. 7 lbs.
HOT SHOE ADAPTER Makes possible use of PC synchro-cord camera having only a hot shoe sync connection flash units $6.95 No. 207101 01 Shpg. Order 1/4 lb. HOT SHOE TO PC CONNECTOR Allows easy connection of aa hot shoe flash unit to camera not having a hot shoe mount. Order No. 207136 Shpg. Wt. 1/4 lb. $6.95 "• CORDLESS BOUNCER Allows both tilt and swivel adjustment .or of flash on all cameras equipped with a hot shoe mount. It is designed for use with a hot shoe flash unit and maintains synch electrical connections without any external wires. $19.95 Order No. 207179 Shpg. Wt. '14 lb. PC-PC EXTENSION CORDS, with male & female fittings to extend PC synch cord. 5' coiled. Order No. 201685 Shpg. Wt. 14 lb. ...$3.50 20' non-coiled, on spool. Order No. 201820 Shpg. Wt. Yz lb. $4.98
CONTROL, ELIMINATE REFLECTIONS with SPIRATONE DOUBLE LAMINATED
LIGHT POLARIZERS
Use them in conjunction with flood lights, when photographing paintings, show windows, jewelry, any reflecting nonmetallic surface (and, with a polarizer over your camera lens, too, you'll extend your reflection control to metallic surfaces as well). Neutral in color - for b&w and color. You'll control glare, reflections, improve color saturation - in other words, Spiratone Light Polarizers give you mastery over the subject's illumination. Protected on both sides with a clear plastic, they are heat resistant and cleanable. With reasonable care, they'll last a long time. STURDILY CARDBOARD MOUNTED:
6x6" material in 8x8" 1 9 DC 16x16" material in 18x18" frame. Order No. 207845 4 I frame. Order t A 9 95 10x10" material in 12x12"Cqn nc No. 207756 frame. Order No. 207772 .pLa.uo Shpg. Weights: V2 , 3 lb, (polarizer illustrated here attached to a 10" reflector) Set of 4 metal clips to attach each 6x6" or 10x10" model (but not for 16x161 to 5" or 10" dia. flood reflectors respectively. Order No. 207918 $2.95
POLARIZING MATERIAL IN SHEETS
Laminated Pola sheets, suitable for making polarizing attachments for all kinds of light sources. Can be easily cut to required sizes.
6x6" $ 4.75 ea., 3 for $12.95 12x12" $19.95 ea., 2 for $37.95 9x9" $10.95 ea., 2 for $19.95 18x18" $39.95 ea., 2 for $74.95 For more information on Polarizers, see below.
CAMERAS pbeo, POLARIZERS for and LIGHTS the most important filters a photographer can own
The ULTIMATE in roll-about studio light stands. The The lens polarizing filter performs many functions: Maxi-Stand extends to 9 feet, telescopes to 391/2", Used the proper rotational (it's the only filter you can use with color film and which won't affect weighs only 6 lbs. at The sturdy, oversize tubular consetting, it eliminates (or lets you control) glare the colors of other parts of your subject) struction with fine satin finish and silver and black and reflections on glass, in scenery, on water, in trim can handle any studio light or boom setup Used in conjunction with color polarizers (such as Spiratone ColorPolarizer shown foliage-in fact an all non-metallic objects. from the heavy quartz or spot to any flood or elecflow filters) it makes possible a whole range of hues or even differwith Z Frame. tronic unit. ent colors. See page 47 for information on these. By eliminating or controlling reflections, it also See page 12 cuts through atmospheric haze particles. Requires Universal Ball Adapter, New "Circular Polarizers" required by Minolta Maxxum and many $1.50, (see above) to mount It increases color saturation, darkens blue skies other SLR cameras are offered on page 44. Umbrelite units. Built-in heavy The light polarizing filter used by itself provides reflection control similar to that obtainable with the camera lens polarizer. duty locking BALL BEARING In conjunction with a lens polarizer, 'total reflection control' is CASTERS permit rolling the Maxidifferent sizes and types. Our screw-in custom polarizers, equipped Stand to the desired set $65 possible from any material (even metallic) and at any camera angle. with handles for easy rotation, are extra-thin so that they will not location. cause vignetting, even when used with wideangle lenses. Often, you don't want to totally eliminate reflections-you want to Shpg. Wt. so lbs. Order No. 250562 control them for optimum rendering of material textures and best Spiratone Light Polarizers are available in many different types of composition. With the dual (light/lens) polarizing set-up, you can \ j Buy at same time as any quartz mounts so they can be used with virtually all lighting systems (flood, do this. light, flood light or Umbrelite quartz, strobe). In addition, they can be purchased in sheets for and pay Polarizing filters, while much more complex than conventional t en Order No. making 'do it yourself' light polarizers. only • .puu 250588 filters, are relatively inexpensive and are available in a variety of See this page and page 12 for information on these.
14
SPIRATONE SSS UMBRELITES®
I
A full range of Umbrelites for use with System Strobes and other electronic illumination. Each SSS Umbrelite outfit comes with the Universal Swivel Holder (shown on page 10) for the Utmost flexibility of use. Three different outfits are available, each with a different type umbrella. Umbrelites All umbrellas feature fine quality come with frames and excellent fabrics, perfect Universal for both color and black & white, the Swivel color, reflectivity and angle of covHolder erage of Spiratone Umbrelites all working together for maximum efficiency in performing their intended purpose. The Universal Swivel Holder attaches to lightstands such as Spiratone's Pro Stand I, II, LS-3 and LS-5H (LS-5H requires univ. ball adapter) and positions, tilts and extends the umbrella to desired position.
t
Now you can obtain the ultra-portable, featherweight $ 95
Spike Springlite
Reflectors
Stores in small pouch
It's tiny, fits a 14" diameter nylon carry pouch—yet, within seconds, it literally springs to life, becomes a REFLECTOR taut 38" diameter, full-fledged reflector or diffuser You Need Never which you can hand-hold or attach (with the optional Springlite Arm) to most any standard light stand, triBe Without pod etc. The secret of the Springlite's compactness in carrying and quick setting-up and collapsing lies in its clever spring hoop—you remove it from its pouch Springs to set it up (it automatically opens to full size) and open with 'twist' it (see ill.) to fold it for storage and carrying. a twist It's made of tough fabrics, each mounted in a flexible metal rim, and weighs just 12 oz. Use the silver for optimum reflectivity, the gold to add warmth to the subject's illumination, the white for diffusion or gentle reflection and the black for absorbing unwanted light. The 20" diameter model stores in a 7" diameter pouch, weighs just 3 1/2 oz., is your choice for situations in which smaller reflective surfaces suffice.
SSS UMBRELITE®OUTFIT includes a fine white woven fabric on a 30" diameter round frame. For bounce, soft shadow as well as diffused $16 95 shoot-through effects.
SPRINGLITE MOUNT with Spiratone Universal Swivel Holder (prices
on stands on request); Springlite Arm plus Swivel Holder will hold and aim your 38" (only) Springlite in the required position -4)a UU When bought with two or more $ qn nr 38" Springlite Reflectors LU.UJ
nn nr
SSS UMBRELITE®OUTFIT
heavy duty white satin fabric on a large round frame with 825" ribs, providing approximately 42" diameter $28.(35 fabric spread.
For indoor or outdoor use, often more practical and versatile than the best tripod, the
SILVER ROUND SSS UMBRELITPOUTFITS the basic outfits with the basic round 'reflectors', with silver fabrics for higher reflectivity (and thus greater lighting efficiency). Available in the standard 30" diameter size or the larger 42" diameter model for maximum softness and greater coverage. 30" Silver Rou 42" Silver Rnd ou SSS Umbrelitend SSS Umbrelite
piktitryge
$26.95
Deluxe Clamp-it°M
piikotto
TFERAME" RD " RPSIDYESR REFLECTO
The portable folding metal frame opens to hold 48x54" Polyester reflector material, mounts to any light stand with 3/s" to V." diameter top section such as Spiratone LS5H or PRO stands. Fully adjustable mount tilts reflector to any required angle. Lightweight, yet practically indestructible 48x 54" polyester reflector materials attach to frame tips with Velcro strips (supplied by us). Frame folds down to 20", weighs only 2 lbs. Reflectors fold and fit into compact storage pouch. REFLECTORS available in: SILVER (for maximum reflectivity), METALICIZED BLUE (for balancing 3200°K light to daylight film). METALICIZED GOLD (for warming effects), soft WHITE (for diffused bounce effect)
Of course, you've seen lots of clamps. Some literally bore into your nice table, with others you'll have to be careful not to blow too hard (or they'll fall off). The Deluxe Clamp-it, on the other hand, is a luxuriously finished precision device, with a wide jaw-spread of up to 3 1/2 ", individual quick adjustment locks for each soft-lined jaw, a locking screw clamp operated by an oversize knob and a pecially efficient, removable "quick" camera attaching plate. It of course, also be used with any tripod or tripod head. By re clamp jaws from the Clamp it becomes a horizontal fl he ability of mounting a wit handle mount flash (or h the optional shoe adapter) along a 4" long track. CftThe Deluxe Clam and ' 4 1/2 " wide at its widest point, is an asses iscious photowho'll settle for nothing bu lies. Delo
Clamp-it, complete as tlE8 b Att 2 lb Two piece, 1" diem. adjustable extension (from 6 to 1 s end of screw clamp, allows for alternate mounting of camera holder (such as when Clamp-it is mounted on a horizontal railing). ....$8.95
Flash shoe adapter $2.25
Shpg. Wt. 1 lb.
Shpg.
'Spider Frame" t on ne Wts. Order No. 251658 JU.UU 3 lbs. lb. 4804" Reflector . 3 Specify ea. (specify color) Ea. color(s) when 54"x25 ft. roll ordering Reflector $66. 00 3 lbs. itnhlyall 4 $15 SAVE r9LIttrskler5F,rseetw,o
$11 ( 5
a
Spider Frame Collapsed
SAVE
Mount the 38" Springlite to any lightstand with the collapsible (to 21") Springlite Arm
— 42" WHITE SATIN ROUND
$21.95
50n
Every Purchase From This Catalog SAVES YOU
UP TO
The heart of this powerful outfit are three S-1000 pro Quartz lights, each with 1000 watt Superphot® Tungsten-halogen 3400°K, 15 hr. lamps, in an elegant fancooled housing. The quiet, efficient cooling system makes possible continuous operation without the discomfort of the heat produced by high wattage lamps. But there's much more to the S-100: it's also equipped with a safety glass shield, a thermostatic safety cut-off and has a 1/4-20 stand mount with built-in, 180° tilt— you can safely point the light up or down or
anywhere in-between!
s7995
And the remarkably low price for the complete "studio" is only (you save $95 over
separate component prices!) U Individual S-1000s are available at $84.95 each (lamp included); for S-1000 details and prices of other components see pages 10, 14, 15, 20.
w/0 FUZE ORDERS
See details on back cover
01 3000 wrgsaf QUARTZ LIGHTING "STUDIO" Its 75° wideangle coverage makes the S-1000 useful for large groups, interiors and, also, whenever you use a wideangle lens or use a stationary studio set-up. The S-I000 head measures only 4 3/4 x 4 x 5 1/2", weighs 2 1/2 lbs. and comes complete with lamp, folding handle and camera bracket (for optional video camera use).
SPECIAL, spRLACK
INGLITE
Great au( oors and in the udi Absorbs unwanted huh; 20" $ 129s
THE OUTFIT INCLUDES: • 3 S-1000 pro Quartz lights • 2 Universal Swivel Holders • 1 42" Silver Umbrella • 1 Flexiflector • 3 Pro Stand I lightstands • 1 special Carrycase (holds complete Outfit)
Buy three or more white, silver or gold Springlite Reflectors and
"ke a 1550 discount from prices shown.
•
i•
0,24195
, 4
DUAL-PURPOSE 30" WHITE ROUND
11 _ un
FROM AVAILABLE IN WHITE (diffuser), SILVER, GOLD and BLACK
Be sure to specify color(s)
SPRINGLITE 20" including carry pouch EACH White
38" EACH
$16.95 $34.95
Gold or Silver
$23.95 $49.95 Springlite.. 1 20" 1 lb., all 4-1 1/2 lbs. Shpg. Wts.: f 38" 1 1/2 lbs., all 4-3 1/2 lbs. Springlite Arm with Holder, 2 1/2 lbs.
Spigitme lexiFlector At last, there's a way you can simulate the elusive qualities of the broad, expansive illumination from a northern skylight which is a photographer's dream, his said Mike Ballai in "Pack Yourself a Skylight" in enthusiastic article about the FlexiFlector Popular Photography.
The FlexiFlector has become a truly indispensable piece of lighting equipment in our own studio — where it has re-i
placed virtually all other 'soft light':
setups. Whether it's product photography (at least half the product shots in this catalog were made with the FlexiFlector as the main light source!), still life or portraiture, the FlexiFlector 1'4 is a heavyweight in performance whenever a broad, even, soft light is required. The compact (it folds into a 27x8" package), lightweight (20 1/2 oz.) FlexiFlector consists of a sturdy wire frame with a 3/4" diameter mounting stem and a 30X30" heat resistant diffuser. The FlexiFlector attaches to a lightstand or boom, just as an umbrella does. And you can use it with the light source of your choice — strobe, tungsten or quartz. For extra soft lighting, mount a second diffusion screen onto the frame. And for added versatility, the diffusion screens are converted into gobos and lightweight reflector boards by Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. mounting the optional polyester reflectors on them. $24
95
FlexiFlector with Diffuser Order No. 270008 Extra diffusion screen Order No. 270040 ;7.95 FlexiFlector REFLECTORS, of practically indestructible polyester, available in silver, gold, white and blue (converts tungsten to daylight balance), attach to the diffusion screen with Velcro fasteners (supplied). Specify color, Each $9.95, Set of all 4 $32.95 (% lb.) Universal Swivel Holder — to mount the FlexiFlector to any lightstand we recommend the Spiratone Universal Swivel Holder.
Reg. $13.95, when bought at same time as FlexiFlector ti 411
See also Pro FlexiFlector on page 18
7
nE
1 • Uj Shpg. Wt. 1 1/2 lbs.
PC. TWO UMBRELLA, REMOTE BOOM, LITE STAND OUTFIT With this outfit you can produce professional bounced, soft-shadow, diffused shoot-through, special overhead and (backlighted) high lighting effects — never before were you able to buy so much 'professional ! versatility for so little money! Outfit consists of Spiratone 42" Silver umbrella, Spiratone 30' white umbrella, Spiratone 2 section Remote Control Boom with Spiratone Bouncemaster to mount strobe and umbrella to stand, Spiratone LS3 Lite Stand which extends to 76", holds either umbrella or boom or strobe directly, vinyl carrying case to hold umbrella, stand t7 4
95
— all that for only .. I Shpg. Wt. 10 lbs. Order No. 209392 Extra LS3 Litestand and Bouncemaster (se you can use 2 Umbrellas and boom at same tome), if purwith this outShpg.. chased fit. Order No. 209406 $26 95 W l Wt 4 bs 15
Electronic Flash, Accessories Now you can make most Vivitar, Sunpak, and many other flash units using 4 penlite batteries, into "high" capacity, quick` I " recycling, power-to-spare, truly PROFESSIONAL STROBES with.,_
iiaof SUPER GEL PACK
$11 499Sipg.lbs.Wt.
WITH DUAL OUTPUTS FOR TWO FLASH OPERATION The Spiratone Super Gel Pack is a 6 volt '' 'I'" high capacity battery system that will upgrade the power of most flash units which ,7 , ordinarily use 4 "AA" size batteries. These I include dedicated, automatic thyristor as I well as manual flash units. I The Super Gel Pack is an economical power 1 supply with the features you need to do /2 away with pictures lost due to power slowz down or "power outages". And you can even power two flash units simultaneously from the Super Gel Pack.
4 Complete Super Gel Pack inch power pack, cord with battery module, and charger. Specify exact make, model of flash when ordering. Extra connecting cord with battery module $27.95
for appr. 50 full power flashes!
SUPER GEL PACK
QUICK CHARGER $69.95 Full charge in only 30, partial charge in just a few minutes. LED full charge indicator. Measures 2x2x3".
Shpg. Wt. 21/2 lbs.
YUOSUER
DEDICATED STROBE
OFF-CAMERA
111VV,WM,WW.V1V.I'Mflrf
Retain all the automation your dedicated system provides for exciting "off camera" effects. The STROBEXTENDER'", a 'dedicated' 12" coiled cord, lets you use your flash at distances up to 5 feet. Dual dedicated hot shoe design even accommodates a second strobe on camera for dual light set-up. Spiratone STR OBEXTENDER dedicated coiled cords for your CANON; NIKON EM, -- ' -- MINOLTA, incl. X-700: KONICA; PENTAX; S hpg. Wt. OLYMPUS-2, Series N Name your camera make, exact model 1/2 lb.
$19.95
7ht(41k4,414,14■44 \ti4114%, 44.:vtAtii4411441444■14■:4i4k.li4ti,i1JWvi:,iil.4■111+.,1,W
The On-Camera n h „ • .A.„A 2 Light "studio" r ututurloS
AUTO TWINLITE FLASH
now — all the convenience of automatic oncamera electronic flash PLUS light control from two light sources Simple ceiling bounce light just can't produce results which avoid the top light effect of heavy shadows under the eyes, nose and chin.
The Spiratone AUTO-TWINLITE with its straight-on fill-in flash "KICKER" solves that
automatically, giving you the best of two worlos —bounce flash plus straight-on fill: The result: outstanding flash pictures with that special sparkle.
The Spiratone AUTO-TWINLITE'S other features are equally impressive: GN (ASA 25) — a high 60 1120 Tor ASA 100) Power Source — 4 'M' alkaline batteries (not supLightweight — 12.3 oz. Dimensions: 5 1/4x3 ,/sx2 3/4 " plied) Bounce — 90°, Rotation — 340°, for vertical Coverage — wideangle (641 and horizontal use Automatic Distance Range — from a close 2 to a Flash Insurance Light indicates whether you are far-away 42' within auto range capability before and after you Maximum Manual Range — (ASA 400)-120' at f/2.0 take actual exposure Special Accessory Kit Circuitry — battery-saving thyristor, provides recyRatio Power Switch for manual operation at full, half, includes Wideangle and & cling time from 1/2 sec. to 15 sec., 75 to 750 flashes and quarter GN — actual exposure at 1/2 GN is 2 Tele Attachments plus 41 per set of batteries, depending on subject distance stops less, at 1/4 GN is 4 stops less than full output Red, Yellow and Blue Automatic f Stop Range — choice of three (ASA 100. Also, has open flash button, hot shoe and PC synch, filters for special efoff-switch for fill-in light when not needed 1/2.8, 5.6, 11) fects. Reg. $13.95 95 Shpg. Wt. So, if you've always wanted a flash that's small, light, powerful, feature-$ BUY COMPLETE 5 PC. 2 lb:. laden and does much more than a conventional straight or bounce unit, KIT AT SAME TIME AS there's no better buy than Spiratone's TWINLITE specially priced at Order No. 204501 FLASH AND PAY ONLY..
16
FLASH HOLDER FOR 35mm AND MOST
MEDIUM FORMAT CAMERAS
Let's start at the bottom. The 61/2" long, contoured grip with adjustable extension(s) swivels 360° so you can position your flash over the camera, on its side, underneath it or at an angle, whichever way produces the best lighting for a given situation. It's easily tightened with a 1" diameter knurled knob and allows you to change from horizontal to vertical framing while maintaining the light's position. The top of the bracket is equally versatile: the shoe swivels 360°, both horizontally and vertically, so that the strobe can face any way you wish: upwards, for bounce, downwards, for close-ups and so on. The shoe and swivel bracket may also be removed to expose a 1/4"-20 thread to mount other accessories. By means of a Spiratone Universal Swivel Holder (see page 101 you can even make the 'Perfect' Flash Holder into an on-camera umbrella light. There are two models of the 'Perfect' Flash Holder, both having identical base brackets and grips. Model 2S
Model 4L
m," diameter rod provides extension up to
151/2". 3 extension rods of 7/8", 3/4", 3/4" diameter
respectively provide extension of over 25" Extend your regular flash cord with Spiratone 5' coiled PC ex tension cord. If you like to use your dedicated strobes, maintaining their dedication, Spiratone StrobeXtender cords (see at left, below) are ideal for that purpose. So whether you photograph weddings, portraits, products, or even interiors, a Spiratone 'Perfect' Flash Holder will provide you with far more flexibility in lighting your subject than you ever thought possible.
Model 2S 'Perfect' Flash Holder Order No. 205508 Shpg. Wt. 1% lbs.
Quick Release Camera Mount 7 Position
WITH MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL TRIPPING OPTIONS A modernly styled, ergonomic 'pistol grip' The quick release, rubber-covered camera Tilting that, by providing comfortable, safe camera platform allows for instant mounting and Platter holding, ensures sharper photographs. dismounting of camera; threaded t/4"-20 bottom socket permits use of grip on a Along with quick hook and loop, adjustable, tripod. supple leather hand strap for comfort and Jack for security, the Master Grip also features a Optional Electric Connecting Cords, specify camera, Electric seven position tilting camera platform, two motor drive, autowinder brand and model, available Relea;5 locations for attaching a mechanical cable for most cameras Each $7.95 release and one jack for an electric release 33 ft. Connecting Cord Extension (permits use of cable. The availability of these options makes Master Grip as a remote release), requires connectthe Master Grip the ideal companion for Order o. C ing cord (above). Order No. 525138 $7.95 most any SLR, particularly one equipped 521272 $2195 Shpg. with autowinder or motor drive. Complete with 24" vinyl-sheathed mechanical cable release Wt. 1 lb.
r►rr mmv∎mrtmilmi,
'PERFECT
But that's where conventionality ends
• "Immediate" recycling on "auto", 2-3 sec. on "manual", faster than Nicads • Up to 275 full power (manual) flashes per charge, 400 to 1000 on Auto • Increased light output by 1/3 stop (manual) • Deep discharge-proof gel cell for fail-safe discharge/recharge, no memory effect (as with nicads) • Full charge in only 6 hours (after initial charge), partial charge OK • Power one or two strobes from same Super Gel Pack — same quick recycling and output (half the flashes per charge using two heads) • Foolproof, fail-safe circuitry • Tricolor indicator lights indicate proper module polarity and reserve power available • Heavy duty 4' cord and connector • Lightweight (23 oz.) ABS housing, compact (11/2z2 1/2 z51/2"); pocketable or clips directly onto belt
SPIRATONE MASTER CAMERA GRID
Sputtrige
It attaches to the bottom of your camera in the usual manner by means of a grooved, rubber-lined 51/4" long base plate, with multiple slots to allow for freedom of positioning.
FEATURES
,
10 MINUTE CHARGE
'7/
If you've searched for the 'perfect' flash bracket,if you have always wanted a 'do everything' grip, you'll be delighted with the
L Model 4L 'Perfect' Flash Holder Order No. 205559 Shpg. Wt.
r
SAVE •
$19.95
nr
raCeonilln
Cord $3.50 2 lbs. $34.U3 Order No.
ON-CAMERA 'PERFECT' UMBRELLA OUTFIT
Model 4L Flash Holder, Universal Swivel White Umbrella. Complete, only Shpg. Wt.l 3 lbs. Order No. 205605
Holder, 30"
$49.95
Fiber-Flash' a fiber optic spotlight for use with most any electronic flash The Spiratone Fiber Flash utilizes a revolutionary application of fiber optic technology for illuminating — with a controlled beam of light — small or otherwise inaccessible areas to be photographed. The Fiber Flash uses most any compact electronic flash as a light source and consists of an adaptor plate to fit the flash, an interface module with Fresnel lens light concentrator, an 18 3/4 " long fiber optic flexible light guide and an adjustable collimator lens assembly with a tripod mounting swivel holder. Its uses are innumerable. Whenever a small, intense, controllable spot of light is needed, the Fiber-Flash is sure to save the day. Whether it's silicon-wafer photography in industry, highlighting of jewelry in fashion, illuminating a back molar in dentistry, special effects underwater lighting in a tropical fish aquarium, or back lighting an inaccessible linkage in machinery, you'll wonder how you ever got along without this precious accessory. Spiratone Fiber Flash Spotlight Attachment Order No. 205001 Shpg. Wt. 1 1/2 lbs.
$49.95
pit Slavemakerfi rms15 N. 11,7,,r;95 An ultra-sensitive slave trigger which converts most any 1/4 lb. strobe into a slave unit–to flash at distances up to 100' from each the 'master strobe; even when the 'master strobe' is bounced! its solid state circuitry is encapsulated in a clear dome, mak- ar& ing it omni-directional in response; yet, it reacts only to electronic flash and can't be triggered by other strong lights. Fitting standard Va 20 tripod or light stand threads, as well as a camera's or other accessory shoe, the Slavemaker It accepts both hot-shoe and PC cord synched strobes for 'slaving'
Universal Vacuum Mount Stand
with 360' swivel and 170° tilt shoe, attaches to any smooth, flat surface by means of a lever-activated suction cup. Holds Slavemaker 11, other small, shoemounting strobes &i A and accessories a I J Shpg. Wt. 1/2 lb. ena k earnIdI and oSnt layn d Bolt Sol na ev eg
n= .9
SAVE!
pay
$27.95
for set
The Pros know . . . for critical exposure readings, there's no substitute for the handheld meter
Some flash manufacturers want you to believe that dedication is simply matching the number of contacts in the camera's flash shoe with an equal number in the flash—yet they provide only one or two of the available "dedicated" features of which the camera is capable.
1111111111111
"True" dedication means that you can expect the same level of performance as that provided by the camera manufacturer's own dedicated flash—and that's exactly what you can expect from Spiratone's
a super-accurate, easy-to-use
OIGITEIL EXPEiSliViE INTEFi
"True" Dedicated Electronic Flash Model 360 TXP
for reflected and incident light readings Your "built-in" TTL meter is certainly convenient for quick, average shooting, but all too often you realize its camera "locked-in" operation just won't do for critical work. No way can you easily move the me e around to measure highlight, shadow, background values. No way can you take an incident reading without time consuming contortions. The Digital Exposure meter is always ready for use, regardless of your camera's position or set-up. • Digital Readout — three digit LED readout in 1/10 EV steps provides large, bright instant display, visible under any ambient light conditions. • Ultra Sensitive—Silicon photo diode has a measuring range from EV 0.1 to 19.9 at ISO 100/21° • Accurate — 0.1 EV repeatability
• ISO Film Speed Range — 6/9° to 6400/39° • Light Acceptance — 180° incident, 40° reflected • Power Source — 9 volt battery (included) • Automatic Power Off — reading displays for 20 seconds, then power shuts off automatically, conserving battery life
• F Stop Scale — f/ 1.0 to f/ 128 in 1/3 stop graduations
• Automatic Power Check — display blinks when battery is weak • Dimensions — 120 x 62 x 26mm. Small in the hand, with large easy to read scales
• Shutter Speed Scale — 120 seconds to 1/4000 second
• Weight — 110 g. without battery
• Dual Function — for incident and reflected light readings
Digital Exposure Meter incl. battery, pouch Order No. 520926 Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
$89.95
FREE '800'SeeORDER PHONE
"4 SPECIFICATIONS: Auto Ranges: ISO 100/21° f 2.8 5-43 ft. f 5.6 3-21 ft. f 11 2.5-11 ft. Coverage: 28mm WA with adapter (included) 35mm without adapter Flash duration: Manual 1/500, Auto 1/500-1/30000 Recycling: Manual 10S, Auto .3-10S Power: 4M cells, alkaline or rechargeable (not incl.) Flashes: 150 (manual), variable depending on distance (auto) Weight: 11 oz.
Sure, you can get so-called dedicated strobes for less — as long as you don't ask the right questions, you won't find out about their limitations until you lose some once-in-a-lifetime exposures. Spiratone's model 360 TXP, made by one of Japan's foremost manufacturers of electronic flash units (with factory trained and staffed service centers in the U.S.A.), not only provides full compatibility for all of your camera's dedicated functions, but boasts many other capabilities usually not found in other — even much higher priced — units. The 360 TXP has a guide number of 120 for ASA 100 — this means that with an f/1.9 lens and using ASA 1000 film, you can adequately illuminate a subject over 200 feet away! The head swivels and tilts for effortless "bounce" lighting effects. An auto exposure "confidence" light confirms proper exposure of subject. And if you forget to turn off the
flash during non-use, the flash will shut itself off to preserve power. You don't have complicated tables and dials to confuse you — the 360 TXP, depending on the camera's level of dedication, allows you to take automatically exposed pictures by just turning the 360 TXP "ON". At that point, the 360 TXP will set the camera's shutter speed, the lens aperture, indicate readiness in the viewfinder, even measure the amount of light delivered to the subject through the camera lens! For non-TTL flash cameras, you simply choose one of the three available auto ranges which are clearly displayed on the rear of the 360 TXP. So, if you want a quality dedicated electronic flash with a high light output and which does justice to your camera's advanced capabilities, the 360 TXP will be your obvious choice over any other unit on the market.
For Canon A-1, AE-1, AE-1P, new F-1, AV-1, AT-1, AL-1; Minolta X, XD, XG Series; Nikon FA, FE2, FG, FE, FM2, EM; Pentax LX. MV, MV-1, ME-F, MG, ME Super, Super A°, Program A*; Olympus OM, except OM-1, OM-2; Contax RTS II, 139 Quartz, 137MA Quartz; Yashica FX-4, FX-70 *aperture priority only Shpg.
t. 2 lbs.
360 TXP Dedicated Strobe, specify camera, model
$79.95
Soft Bounce Reflector AC adapter, powers the 360 TXP directly from AC outlet. Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs Power Pack, uses 6AA batteries, mounts and looks like autowinder, shortens recycling time, increases available number of flashes. Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs. . StrobeXtender dedicated coil cord, allows offcamera of 360 TXP with full dedication (see page
16). Shpg. Wt. Y2 lb
29.95 37.95 19.95
page 24
Now, set up a most economical electronic flash studio or copylight system — with the From Spiratone — a solution for one of the most frustrating problems in product photography: the elimination of reflections on shiny or reflective surfaces.
HTpikilion
The easily assembled light tent is 24" high, 27" in diameter at its base. Its highly efficient diffusing material allows you to surround the object to be photographed with the softest, the most even lighting im aginable (even while using only Conical two lights on the outside surface.) Light -fen A 3" opening at the cone's apex allows for lens entry into the tent. Included with the tent is a piece _ of black non-reflective Order No. 271004 \ material for a solid Shpg. Wt. 5 lbs. black background.
CONICAL A$1495 LIGHT TENT
For omni-directional even light distribution, there's nothing better than our
BARE BULB SLAVE FLASH
Only "Bare Bulb" electronic flash provides that omni-directional illumination, that extreme wideangle coverage, which this almost-reflectorless bare bulb unit makes available. Our Bare Bulb Slave Flash screws into any standard 110v lamp socket —just like any ordinary light bulb. This can be the socket in your table or floor lamp, or you can use one of several available fixtures ( see at right under 'Slavemate') to position the unit anywhere in your room or office. And it's triggered automatically by the 'master flash' (your regular strobe on your camera), even from as far as 50 feet away! You can use one, two, or a dozen units; all will flash in perfect sync. And the indicator lamps show you from a distance when the power is on, and whether the unit is fully charged (it recycles in a short 5 sec.). There is even an open flash test button. Use the Bare Bulb Slave Flashes for wideangle (up to 210°), large area, background, fill or side lighting. And for special effect work, one each red, green and yellow snap-on dome filters are included. Bare Bulb o2 r more Slave Flash, each each 4,
$39.93
Shipping Weight 11/2 lbs. each
t34.95
loikotiteSLAVEMATE
1M
READY- LITE
The Complete AC Slave Light
FLASH TUBE
Just screw the Slavemate into any standard (110-120v) electric socket (you can use your floor lamp, for example)—or separate lamp fixtures such as those described below. Position the Slavemate where it will provide the light you want— and when you trip the shutter of your camera (equipped with any type of electronic flash), the Slavemate (or as many Slavemates as you have placed around the room) FLASH will light up in perfect synchronization. The Slavemate is a sealed unit which requires no batteries, no extra Slave attach- SENSOR ment. It operates on standard 110-120v houshold current. Each unit is a complete 'strobe' equipped with a readylite and a built-in high sensitivity electric eye which *You can assort Slavemates senses and reacts to the flash from your camera's strobe—whether you use it for and Slavemates PC to earn direct, bounce or reflected illumination. combination price—$5 extra With it, you can build an effective multiple flash system—you can use one or for each PC model instead of a dozen Slavemates, as your work requires. You can use the Slavemate as a fill, regular Slavemate! background, side or hairlight too. You can even use Slavemates in your copylight set-up in place of tungsten illumination. In fact, you'll find many more uses that this convenient, expandable electronic flash illumination system can be put to. SPECIFICATIONS: Create a GN: 64 (ASA 100), Coverage: 50°, Recycling Time: 7 sec., Net Weight: 7 oz. flash "bank"
CUSTOM LIGHT • Light Reduction • UV Blocking • Warming Effects WHEN ORDERED AT SAME TIME AS EITHER SLAVEMATE, ONLY $1 CONTROL KIT J • •
the
4421)1100
n
with DUAL MASTER and SLAVE FUNCTIONS
Combines the AC Electronic Slave Flash capability of the SLAVEMATE with that of a 'MASTER' flash which also works off your camera's synch terminal: it is, in fact, the popular SLAVEMATE equipped with a detachable PC synch cord, can also be placed on your camera's accessory clip by means of the Shoe Mount Cord/Socket Ea. $26.95 (see below).
Shpg. Wt. 1 lb. each
1
light -• set-up
Create a copylight set-up with
1 Slavemate PC and several Slavemates
FIXTURES FOR SLAVEMATES
Shpg. Wt. 1 lb. Order No. 201634 $6.00
$217 $60
Create a 44 multiple
SLAVEMATE PC
THE DIRECT MOUNT CORD/CLAMP SOCKET A phenolic socket with wooden handle, switch, cord and universal ball clamp that mounts to :3 any %" lightstand or crossbar.
EA
FOR Order No. 203513
THE SHOE MOUNT CORD/SOCKET LIGHT-HOLDER, porcelain socket with protective metal cover, 10' cord, in-line switch, fits any tripod, lightstand or other holder with 1/4 20 screw. Shpg. Wt. 1/2 lb.
$8 95
A phenolic socket with switch, line cord and locking shoe bracket to fit any camera and all hardware
with accessory shoe.
Shpg. Wt.1 lb. Order No. 209597
$9.50
17
sh
Bank',' Ringlight Electronic, Slaved Studio"Flash Bank" with built-in MODELING LIGHT
a sealed, self-contained four tube unit which does 'everything'
1
4 flashtubes, located around the central modeling light, provide powerful, even illumination. • High GN, 126 for ASA 100; fast recycling, 0.3 to 4 seconds depending on power setting; full charge readylight on control panel; modeling light on-off switch. Complete"Flash Bank" as described with all this flashpower, all these features, only
• Modeling Light: a mini-reflector flood lamp, centered within the four flashtubes, to indicate the type of illumination your flash exposure will produce; also useful to provide exposure information (by using an incident light meter) without the need for a flash meter. • 5 different power settings, from A 6 u, to full power, so you can choose the amount of light you need for a given subject or illumination ratio. • 2 built-in slave triggers, one in front and one on rear control panel, so you can 'slave' the unit from another strobe regardless of its position in relation to the "Flash Bank". • Operates off standard 110-120v AC line, 10' long AC power cord with in-line switch provided. No batteries required for slave operation. • Also works as 'master' strobe fired by camera's PC synch terminal, 5' long synch cord provided. For PC operation or open flash/test use a PX 28 or equivalent battery (not included) is required. • Mounts to any /4 "-20 tripod screw. See the Universal Swivel Holder, page 10.
$12995 $ Order No.
EA.
TWO FOR
239
The famous Spiratone FlexiFlector makes an ideal cornpanion to the "Flash Bank". 1.That's why we are offering you ONE FlexiFlector per "Flash Bank" when ordered together
Order No. 205249
Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs.
"The -5;:,) Portable /,I Skylight"
— For just the right amount of – light control, the Pro- FlexiFlector's size is adjustable via
Now, with the convenience of a single, digital read-out hand-held meter you can take incident
FLAS H .smes and reflected light readings of subjects in low light (even candlelight) as well as in brilliant F or sunlight! And with the same meter, you determine the correct exposure for a single electronic REGULARR"unw flash or a full studio multiple flash set-up! That meter is the new
— a clever arrangement from 3 x3 ft. to a full 3x6 ft. continuously.
EXPOTROU METER IVA
or reflected mode. lust trigger the strobes and read
Spiratone Expotrol Meter F/A including pouch, battery, and 20' PC-PC synch cord (for triggering strobes from meter position)
$114" Order No. 521604 Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
the f/stop indicated by the bar graph dot mode LED display–no calculations necessary. And the flash reading is displayed until the meter is reset. Comfortably hand-holdable and lightweight, the Expatrol Meter enables you to determine the correct flash exposure with any number of non-auto strobes or auto strobes in the manual mode. Its blinking overrange indicator eliminates the possibility of overexposure. And for those metering situations where it's most convenient to be able to fire your strobes from the meter position, the built-in buffer and PC terminal of the Expotrol make this possible with PC cord equipped strobes and the 20' PC-PC extension cord supplied.
[twee digit LED in 1/10 EV steps
Readout
EV 1-19.9 at ISO 10012)
the
Range
/stop indicated by LED bar graph (dot mode)
EV 8-16 (f.2.0-F/22 at ISO 100/21); flash durations 1/1000 second ond to 1/2000 second
f/0.7 to f/45 in Y2 stop graduations
F Stop Scale
see above
50 seconds to 1/4000 second
Shutter Speed Scale
–
5/9° to 6400/39°
ISO Film Speed Range
6/9' to 6400/39°
Light Acceptance Incident 160° Reflected 40°
160° 40° 140x62x40mm
imensions 140x62x4Omm
162g without battery
Weight
S ave 28% TM
PTHYRISTOR
The full feature, portable ringlite that provides auto exposure from 40" to 8" with a choice of two f / stop settings, as well as manual settings (to 2"9 plus the added convenience of built-in modeling lights. Here's the ideal electronic flash ringlight–the preferred light source for photographic close-up and macro applica-
COIN • STAMP • NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY
tions–wherever evenly illuminated images with maximum detail are required. The Spiratone Auto MINI-RING provides practically shadowless illumination with virtually all normal and macro as well as with some macro zoom lenses. It also works well with lenses used with bellows, extension tubes and TelXtenders.
Here's what makes the Automatic Thyristor MINI-RING outstanding:
1
• Compact, lightweight 2 piece design–circular light (31/2x1x5") with 25" power connecting cable, weighs approx. 4 /2 oz. and separate battery power supply (31/4x 1 /2x3 /8", weighs approx. 7 /2 oz.) • Penlight Power Supply–uses 4 standard penlite batteries in conventional vertical or horizontal hot shoe mounting battery pack which is also equipped with PC sync cord, readylight.
I)
$99.95
$189.95
position at any angle with lightstand of your choice (not incl.)
each f:r Extra panels, with roll-up rods, silver (with white reverse), black or diffusion each y e as 32■ Feixe txrim ca tncerlsa an td spozeo tnilm
162g without battery
btatoR AUTO INI-RING
for • MEDICAL • DENTAL • SCIENTIFIC • SMALL PRODUCT
1 71
You can use the Pro-FlexiFlector with strobe or quartz lighting, even take it outdoors to work with natural light –it's large enough to provide a broad area of even illumination and light and maneuverable enough to take on location and to instantly set up and adjust. So whether you need a large white diffuser for soft, diffused lighting, a silver (or white, on reverse) reflector to fill in shadows and control contrast, or light absorbing black material to control reflections, absorb unwanted light or add contrast, you won't need anything else but a Pro-FlexiFlector with your choice of suitable panels . Spiratone Pro-FlexiFlector, complete with double diffusion panel and lean-to support (shown shove)
as a FLASH METER
So if you want just one meter for all your exposure metering needs, the Spiratone Expotrol is it.
THE IDEAL SHADOWLESS LIGHT SOURCE,
free standing with lean-to support (included)
SPECIFICATIONS as a LIGHT METER
.
The Pro-FlexiFlector consists of a -- self-contained, adjustable, sturdy _ aluminum frame which can be assembled in moments as a diffuser or – reflector. It's free-standing so it can be easily positioned for maximum utility. But it's equally well suited — for use on a light stand for placement above, or at any suitable angle to, a subject–by means of its builtin oversized boom bracket it attaches to a W8" to 1" diameter stand.
See page 15 for details Reg. $24.95
Utilizing a high sensitivity silicon photo diode sensor powered by a standard 9 volt battery, the Spiratone Expotrol incorporates the latest solid state circuitry. Its easy-to-read digital display is clearly visible even under very poor light conditions, avoiding the reading error often encountered with needle movements. AS A LIGHT METER–take reflected light readings of critical highlight, shadow and background values or slide the 180° hemispherical receptor dome over the sensor to integrate the incident light on the subject. And once a meter reading is taken, a hold-switch conveniently locks in the EV reading for remote exposure determination. AS AN ELECTRONIC FLASH METER–meter a single strobe or multiple strobe set-up in either the incident
I
11—
95
FOR ONLY
■
It's hard to believe that as versatile an accessory as the Pro. — FlexiFlector can be so por. = table, weigh so little (5 1/2 lbs. — with difluser) and be so easy to use!
each
SAV E
$ 4.
1
the Diffuser/Reflector light control panel that comes in a compact 48" package
4 Leaf Barn Doors for Studio "Flash Bank"
i
I
PRO-FLEXIFLECTOR
tntio.wsthr".. 205222
'
051totte3x6 ft.
for controlling light spillage and shielding camera lens from flare-inducing direct light Shpg. Wt. I lbs. $23.95
1
and
i
•
1
11 I
i IM MPH i III!1 1 1 1 I I , , 1 I For light control in your studio or on location: for industrial or commercial work, there's no more effective, no more convenient accessory than the
Ill!I
Here, in a single, relatively compact and lightweight unit, are just about all the features you've been looking for in a studio strobe:
• Automatic exposure–with a choice of 2 f/stops from f / 4 and f/ 8 with ASA 25 film to f/ 16 and f /32 for maximum depth of field with ASA 400 film. • Built-in modeling lights–mini incandescent bulbs within the ring aid in focusing, composing. • Thyristor energy saving system–for faster recycling and longer battery life.
IF,
toi ne „pal.u;)
$24.95 for
Other Specifications: 5600°K daylight color balance, modeling
light, power ON indicator light, hot shoe sync plus aux. sync cord receptacle. Standard series VII mounting thread adapts to all popular lenses with appropriate serie tII adapter (see b elow Coverage — over 60° both vertical tally, providing even illumination as clos r_g subject in automatic mode, 2 inches The outstanding buy in to Spiratone Portable Auto MINI-RING wer supply (less bat} and case (with external po battery pack can remain in camera shoe).
Shpg. Wt. 2
lbs.
AC Adapter
12995 or
r No.
568
o. 202517
For prices of batteries, including the "rechargeables", see page 42 Series VII adapter, specify 46, 49, 52, 55, 58mm or 62mm ,each $5.25 Super Gel Power Pack, see page 16
TM
Video Accessories INSTANT PRINTS TV CAMERA FOR UNDER 2C EA. FROM YOUR
THE PUSHABlII BUTTON
with the VIDEO electro imaging
PRINTER
a state-of-the-art video frame "grabber" and monochrome thermal printer
The simplest , most straightforward d evice to video tape your slides—the
pi)(010iff VIDEO-DUPLISCOPE
The Spiratone Video-Dupliscope simply screws into the front of your video camera lens and, thanks tc its built-in close-up optics, allows you to sharply transfer the image of the slide held in its positionabl and rotatable stage, onto video tape. Use your ra's zoom lens to crop unwanted detail and crest iis scenes from your static subjects. An automatic white balance and se video cameras, you can use pr ce to illuminate the slide. FOB5 Spiratone Videollupliscope $5495 The Video-Dupliscope is 8" Ion with fitting weighs a scant 14 1/2 oz., accept unted (state size needed) slide and fits any video camera le ccessory Order No. 750204 Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs. filter threads (you may have to unscre lens shade to expose these threads) from 46 to 62mm in diameter (specify size—one fitting included in price).
At our price, you can't afford to be without one!
Now there is a tool that allows you to expand your video horizons beyond mere "watching" of your television screen. It lets you permanently capture images off the air, from a videotape, videodisc, cable, satellite, or information service (teletext or videotext), your home computer, video-camera or even a videogame for as little as 20 per print! In fact, anything that can be displayed on the video screen can be quickly (in 20 seconds) converted into a monochrome print (image size 3 1/4"x4") on thermal paper with resolution of 280 dots horizontally by 234 dots vertically. Each dot is reproduced in one of 16 distinct shades ranging from white to black. Of course, it's not a photograph, but an electronic print which faithfully represents the video image.
;tikottme BUDGET VIDEO
i
QUARTZ LIGHT
Nothing degrades video image quality as badly as not having enough light—yet most effective video lights represent just too much of an in, vestment for the use you may have for them. Now, at last, there is a lightweight, powerful (3001) AC quartz light for your video productions, at a cost that won't even put a dent into you production. budget. The Spiratone Budget V u z Light comes complete eight, vented, aluminu ' iameter reflecto ng rd, 4" tall shoe mcke.-ins tilt control, an wit handle and eve rtip —all that for the uple of blank videocassettes g Weight 2 1/2 lbs. Spiratone Budget Vid Quartz Light, each mwoc're°, each
2 .95 T
$28.95
No longer need you tie up your equipment (and wear it out) to erase unwanted or obsolete recordings.
1)i)(tAme BULK TAPE ERASER
The printer's applications are unlimited; you can use it to make prints of: • your favorite television personalities, movies or events • important or controversial plays in sports • addresses and phone numbers of TV otters • video surveillance images for a permanent security record • portraits of friends and family (using a home video camera); you don't even need a monitor!!! you get a print of what you see in your viewfinder
• home computer text and graphics and hard copies of teletext data and other computer information sources • educational or cultural information such as language or cooking lessons, health and exercise programs, news, economic programs with stock market quotations, weather forecasts, etc. In fact, anything that can be displayed on a video screen' can be converted instantly into a print.
FEATURES and SPECIFICATIONS • Instant Response–you push a button, and the picture on your TV screen is instantly stored on a special memory chip and printed immediately. • Fast Printing–in only 20 seconds, the complete black and white picture is ready, using an ultra-reliable, quiet printer And then the video-printer is ready for your next selection (or additional prints of the last image printed). • Good Image Quality–the TV picture is broken down into 280 dots (horizontally) by 234 dots (vertically), with each dot capable of reproducing 16 different shades from black to white. This gives an image that accurately represents the picture on the TV or video terminal screen. Three levels of contrast may be selected (light, normal, dark). • Useful Size – the picture is 8.4 x 10cm (approx. 31/4"x4"), a convenient pocket size, with titles, etc., clearly legible. • Low Cost Prints–using low-cost rolls of thermal printing paper, up to 220 pictures can be made on each roll, costing just a few pennies per print. • Any Number of Identical Copies– the "copy" function lets you make as many identical prints as you wish. • "Negative" prints, too – black and white areas can be reversed at the touch of a switch– useful for clear and easily readable displays of text. • Reversible Print Direction –a useful feature which lets the picture be printed from the top down, or from the bottom up, so that the correct sequence of picture "frames" is followed with sequential material (such as computer programs, etc.). • Wired Remote Control Unit–lets you "snap" the screen the instant you want to. from the comfort of your chair and up to 16' away from the printer. • Specifications–Power consumption: 65W 110 VAC, Weight: 111b. 14 oz., Dimensions: (HxWxD) 4j)sx63/4x142, ,16 " approx. • Vote: The Video Printer requires
an NTSC composite video signal such as is available at the VIDEO output or VCRs, video disc players, monitors, home computers, video cameras, etc. It cannot be hooked up or used with a TV set lacking a VIDEO output connection.
Electro-Imaging 532995 Video Printer, incl. remote control Shpg. Wt 14 lbs. Thermal Printer Paper, 4 rolls 021/2 feet each (220 prints per roll) for a total of 880 prints. Shpg. Wt. 21/2 lbs.
la
TM
Spiratone's Tape Eraser is an indispensible accessory for the videographer, audiophile and computer user. In just a matter of seconds, it completely removes all traces of previously recorded material from video tape, video cassettes, audio tape, audio cassettes, computer tapes and computer disks. It allows you to completely eliminate that annoying rainbow of interference at the beginning of video tapes, (when rerecording over a previously recorded section). It will aid you in keeping confidential information on your computer tapes and disks from falling into the wrong hands. The eraser may also be used as a tool demagnetizer. AC operated, the eraser measures 8 5/s x 3 1/8 , weighs 8 lbs. and has a thermal safety shut-off. Spiratone Bulk Tape Eraser $49.95 Order No. 755206 Shipping Wt. 10 lbs.
041
NEW! Portable, Long-Life, Rechargeable
VIDEO SUPER POWER PACK
Whether you want to power your video camera, recorder, monitor, receiver or even a video light, our nickel-cadmium Video Super Power Pack will prove a most economical, reliable, and convenient source of power. Utilizing a deluxe 12 volt nickel-cadmium battery, the lightweight (3 lb), compact (6 ,/2 "H, 5 1/4 "W, 1 3%"D) pack will, for example, run your VCR for up to 6 hours, a 100W video light up to 35 minutes. It recharges fully from a standard 110/120 volt line in just 12 hours, can be recharged over and over — to about 1500 times! Since it uses nickel-cadmium batteries, you needn't worry about accidently spilling acid; and if you leave the pack plugged into the AC line for a few days, it won't overcharge or become damaged. It comes in an elegant and durable DuPont Cordura case, includes a heavy duty AC charger and is fused for extra safety. Adjustable straps fit either over the shoulder or around waist. It is equipped with A standard 12V cigarette lighter receptacle and accepts plug of your accessory car-battery cord to power the equipment. Our Video Super Power Pack gives the videographer the freedom needed to use his equipment away from the AC outlet —safely and economically. Order No. 749001 , 99 95 Shpg. Wt. 4 lbs. 41 A complete, self-contained 100 Watt 12V battery powered light, the
FREEDOM rm VIDEO LIGHT
with CHARGER Why be tied needlessly to an AC outlet when the Spiratone Freedom Video Light allows you full freedom of use of your portable VCR and camera combination? No longer need you concern yourself with AC power availability for your lighting needs. You can now roam at will, find the best angles for your video shots, and be assured of properly lit video exposures. The Spiratone Freedom Video Light is a compact quartz light with vented metal housing and tempered safety glass. It mounts to your video camera's accessory shoe and is powered by a maintenance-free, rechargeable 12v sealed battery and carried in a rugged polyethylene case (supplied), with room for the light and charger. A fully charged battery will provide up to 25 minutes of lighting and can also power your u VCR or other equipment. equint. Shpg. Wt.75lb Freedom Video Light with lamp, battery, Order No. tin Charger and case–complete outfit for only 4/1 50 hr. replacement lamp $7.95 - 2 for $13.95
nr
Add the excitement, the showmanship, the pizazz of professional video effects, right on-camera, with the
..pbotose SPECIAL EFFECTS
VIDEOTACH
Now–all the miriad special effects prisms and filters that were available to the still and motion picture photographer are also available to today's videographers, but with a new twist: you can have motorized, variable-speed, rotational control to add new life to static scenes, and exciting animation to titles and stills. And you can probably use most of the attachments you now own to create these professional quality video effects that add that final, polished look to your video productions. The Videotach filter rotator module simply screws onto the front of the video camera lens (standard screw-in threads 46 to 62mm) and, in turn, accepts most any screw-in filter, prism, or other front lens accessory with 58mm threads. If you own filters in sizes other than 58mm (52, 55, 62 or 67mm), we will, on request at time of pur-
Shown chase, supply you with one adapter (specify with your size) for only $1, to enable you to Multimage® use your own special effects attachments t) 5C prism, with the Videotach. Accessories smaller Ct. ! not incl. than 58mm are suitable for most normal ca and longer zoom focal lengths. The controller power module is connected r4 to the rotator by a 5' coiled cord, houses the batteries (4 AA cells, not included), and enables you to vary the speed of the rotator as well as to stop and reverse rotation. By the proper choice of front lens attachments, you can create moods, accentuate visual relationships, deShpg. Wt. 2 lbs. velop fantasy settings, envelop subSpecial Effects VIDEOTACH jects with dynamic surroundings, put motion into titles and stills and (specify filter size of camera lens) much much more. For prices of batteries, see page 42.
6995
accessories loVIDIUL4p4dcaetsto7tshaen:: time as the mial leisita
SAVE 50 c/0 Il lullyfoOPTINEaind58dneldmu c
19
Video Accessories All the features, all the conveniences of "top-of-the-line" lighting equipment at an affordable price
At last, you can BRING CREATIVE CONTROL TO YOUR HOME VIDEO TAPING
• superimpose titles and graphics over live or recorded action • convert black-and-white graphics into colorful electronic titles • add commentary, music, sound effects to prerecorded tapes when copying them • color-correct film when transferring to video • fade-in, fade-out both images and sound
g r m/tome i
rtrodLsthe
the
VIDEO CONTROL CENTER (VCC)
including Special Effects Generator (SEG), Monochrome Titling Camera (MTC), Video Titling Stand (VTS) Just add our Video Control Center to your video cassette recorder (or two VCRs), color camera, and TV receiver (or monitor) and you'll have your own compact "studio control room". With these, you can create truly professional video productions that even a short time ago were not possible to achieve outside the professional video production centers. •
•
•
•
•
• •
You'll be able to: Superimpose titles and graphics, cast credits, location and time identification, subtitles (all in any of six colors) over your live action, or over any of six background colors Fade-in, Fade-out video image to black, white, or any of a rainbow of colors (not just fade to black as all video cameras with fade capability do) Create wipes, vignettes, progressive title disclosure - the range of effects is virtually unlimited Mix new audio with the old, crossfade (synchronously or independently of video) and control levels, add music, narration, sound effects to your location sound track (when copying tapes, a second VCR is required), overdub faulty dialogue with professional finesse The SEG is also the perfect adjunct to your film (or slide) transfer to video. You can electronically color-correct your original images when transferring them to video tape Even use the SEG as a "black box" to generate truly exciting electronic video art All effects created with the SEG can be superimposed over live camera feed or added to existing footage when copying tapes
No longer need your video tapes have that unfinished "home movies" look. Now you too can proudly show off your video productions without investing a small fortune in equipment.
The VCC consists of the following: the SEG
Video Control Center Complete with SEG, MTC, VTS
Shpg. Wt. 17 lbs. Order No. 760005
CONTROLS: Color Selection - choice of 7 color combinations; Color Base - color correction warming to cooling; Pattern Select - choose positive, negative, or title; Input Select choose VCR or Color Camera feed; Audio-Select — microphone or line input; Audio Fade - from Camera/VCR to Mic/Line; Video-Fade - from Camera/VCR to title; Key Level - sets threshold for title image; VCR Remote - pause control of VCR CONNECTIONS: Video input, audio input, microphone input, audio line input, monitor output, video output, audio output, camera input (video and audio inputs are used for cameras lacking the 10 pin connector) Basic interconnection cables are included.
the MTC
law titling camera with 13mm lens, allowing for easy matching of graphics size to image requirements. The camera connects directly to the SEG via a 6 pin connector ; and is powered by the SEG.
ORIG.
$595
COPY LIGHTS for VCC
Sharp and detailed videographics require bright, even illumination. The VCC copy lights, attached directly to the copystand camera platform, provide, with their two articulated reflectors and 40w bulbs (included), the needed illumination. Order No. 760056
$49.95 95 7
SAVE 20%! Buy copylights atsame
Spiratone
AC-QUARTZ VIDEO LIGHT 14-11*
Model VQL-300
The Spiratone VQL-300 AC Video Light boasts a two-position illumination selector that, coupled with the pebbled aluminum reflector, gives you the choice between a wide angle beam and a narrow beam at almost 3 times the intensity of the wide beam. Its highly efficient quartz halogen 300w bulb is housed in an impact-resistant housing that is superbly vented and remains cool in operation. A heat absorbing glass shield in front of the bulb provides additional protection. The light mounts to the camera's accessory shoe or 1/4 " . 20 threaded stand and may be tilted up for bounce lighting. VQL-300 AV Video Light, complete with 300 watt 120 volt quartz halogen bulb, 10 ft. power cord and barndoors. $39.95 Order No.279153 Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. Replacement 120v 300w bulb Order No. 279102 $15.95
time as VCC and pay only $39 Order No.
60064
Shpg. Wt. 41/2 lbs. l.1\S‘.1:1111.1S\VA1ASN's.Vs7 4 •
the VTS
titling stand with a calibrated upright to enable you to repeat titling setups with a minimum of effort
"`ELECTRONIC VIDEO TITLER There's nothing else you can add to your tapes—that will brand them as "professional"—as good, clean looking titles and credits that cycle on screen page by page, or crawl across the bottom of the screen. You can even create multicolored graphics for your titles and achieve simple animation effects. And all this without having to learn computer languages or complicated routines. A menu type prompting screen will guide you through the many functions available for your use.
Motorized, bi-directional, variable speed
SCROLLING TITLER from qpikotte Ideal companion to video home productions, the Scrolling Titler adds a whole new dimension to your video tapes. With it, you can • Scroll titles up and down the screen, at variable speeds, even start or stop the scrolling at any point • Use it horizontally for bottom of screen crawls or sub-titles
• Produce credit lines of unlimited loop messages
length or create repeating endless
Can be used with virtually any video camera (close focusing capability required) and is particularly effective when used with the Video Control Center to superimpose moving titles on stills or video. Scrolling Titler, complete with 117 VAC power module $99 and 4 1/2 " wide white titling paper. Shpg. Wt. 5 lbs.
95
Extra titling paper rolls, white or black, specify color ....each $7.95
Additionally, the Electronic Video Titler features: • Two character sizes to provide 16 lines of 32 small characters per page, 4 lines of 10 large characters (with individual character color control) per page; character sizes and graphics may be mixed as desired • Seven full pages of memory are available • Variable page cycling delay and variable speed crawls are easily selected
• 5x8 matrix soft touch keyboard provides 150 different letters, numbers, graphic symbols and punctuation marks • Cursor indicates size and color of character4 direction cursor control is furnished • 8 brilliant colors for large characters and graphics: red, blue, green, yellow, magenta, orange, cyan, pearl. These colors available as color bars for test and alignment purposes
Use the Electronic Video Titler to title video productions, to insert messages in Master antenna systems, to add information to sale display videos, to provide directions and warnings in stores and businesses, to identify tapes, and many, many more. An unbelievably versatile video accessory providing professional capabilities and performance comparable with those available in units costing several times as much.
rutuwrts Spas
1000W
Fan Cooled
• Fader allows for fading in/out and superimposition of white titles and graphics over other video; built in gen-lock provides for perfect signal synchronization • Battery back-up retains information even during power failure or transportation • Line video input/output via RCA connectors • DIN output for optional RF modulator • 28 page operator's manual
The Electronic Video Titler is a microprocessor-controlled solid state device housed in a metal cabinet with handsome wood side panels, measures 6.5" W x 8.3 L x 3" H, weighs approx. 2 lbs., and is powered by a 110v power supply (included).
Shpg. Wt. Electronic Video Titler Order No. 7602185 449 5° 4 lbs.
Pro-VIDEO LIGHT
With today's super-sensitive video cameras, you can make video images in available neardarkness. However, you can take a quantum leap forward in picture quality by throwing sufficient light on the subject with a Spiratone Pro Video Light. Now your "acceptable" video images will be vastly improved ... springing to life in brilliant color. • SHARPER IMAGES - the added Alumina- • TRUE COLOR - for proper color rendition, tion allows you to use a smaller lens opening, prothe illumination must be substantially above the viding greater- depth of field and in turn making minimum rated levels focusing far less critical • LESS VIDEO NOISE - get rid of the an• BETTER CONTRAST - for full tonal range noying "granularity" of poorly-lit video images the only way is "more light" All this can be yours by using the superbly engineered and built Spiralite Pro-Video Light. SPECIFICATIONS: • 1000 Watt SUPERPHOT c tungsten-halogen lamp, 3400°K, 15 hr. • Built-in
fan cooling allows for continuous operation without the discomfort or danger of the tremendous heat produced by high-wattage lamps • Thermostatic safety cutout • Safety glass shield • Wide angle coverage 75° • Folding handle (included) • Camera bracket (included) • 1/4.20 stand mount with built-in, 180° tilt - burn straight up or down, or anywhere in between • Light! only 2 1/2 lbs. • Compact! measures 43/4 x 4 x 5 1/2" • 1000W 120 VAC Spiratone's Quartz Pro-Video Light complete with bulb, grip, bracket
$84 95
20
Shpg. Wt. 4 tbs.
ON NOW YOU CAN 35mm SLR LENSES MOST USE YOUR
"C" mount CINE &VIDEO cameras
Spiratone "C" mount Converters are precision-machined to mount your 35 SLR lenses in your "C" mount Video or 16mm movie camera, maintaining correct focus and enabling you to fully utilize your lenses in both camera systems. "C" mount converters are available for NIKON, CANON, MINOLTA, OLYMPUS, PENTAX (bayonet and screw) CONTAX, and KONICA. "T" mount lenses (less SLR T adapter) can also be fitted to C mount (interchangeable lens) cameras with the "T" to C adapter. Name your camera model or specify "T" to C adapter. Shpg. Wt. 1 lb. $P
50n,
Every Purchase From This Catalog SAVES ON YOU 70 FUTURE UP TO ORDERS See details on back cover
VIDEOCASSETTE REWINDERS with fast forward and autashut-off
Not only will you save wear and tow on your Videocassette recorder by using the Spirato ra1nders, but you'll also free your recorder for more im rtant t s. Videocassette is simply inserted into inde he artment door is latched down and ssettg rewinds fast forwards (swit tally A4eri cge' tape e rewound, the,electro to stop mechanism shuts off. A manual eject -buttonA oo provided. AC operation 110v. 60 HZ. Videoerw e Rewinder for Beta or VHS, specify which Shpg. Wt.61bs
$47 95
!Pikoktge FUNC UNCTION TION fANHEAD
A viscous damped, fluid function head for the most demanding videographer at a most economical price. Silky-smooth fluid action with adjustable tension control to match the weight and balance of the camera. A telescoping (190-330mm) control handle with adjustable angle provides effortless camera movement control. A built-in quick on-off camera mount (with removable video/cine anti rotation pin) secures the camera to the head with a simple movement. Anti-dump torsion spring provides extra margin of safety for your camera and lenses. CAMERA QUICK SET SYSTEM
TILT LOCK LEVER
----_______
PAN HANDLE ANGLE CONTROL LOCK
Ma i
il,F"
PAN LOCK LEVED_________
,... .. ,„F4 0,
TILT TENSION ADJUST
iii -u--
Want to get closer still to your distant subject? Want to get even more of the subject into your picture? You can do this all without changing your camera position—thanks to the fine quality, highly corrected
A fine tripod at a price you can afford, the
poem • 'Model 3 SEB VIDEO
TRIPOD
pikittoge VIDEO TELEPHOTO and VIDEO WIDEANGLEttar
with geared elevator, braced tubular legs and your choice of Anti-Dump (AD) or Fluid Function pan head. Full panhead details at left. There is no better buy in a tripod which is as well suited for the videographer and offers the quality construction, sturdiness, versatility and elegance of the Model SEB. The braced 3-section legs utilize tubular aluminum construction with the top section having a 1-3/16" diameter. The tripod extends, with its 12 3/4 " geared center column, to a full 59" (to top of panhead mounting screw), telescopes to a compact 21". The bottom of the center column is equipped with a tripod screw to accept the panhead in a reverse configuration for copying and low angle work. Each leg tip is equipped with a ball and socket swiveling ribbed rubber foot pad, 35mm in diameter, to provide maximum adjustability to surface unevenness and a nonslip grip on most any surface the tripod may be used on. With the 3 lb. 11 oz. tripod, you can select one of two outstanding panheads, the Anti-Dump Panhead ("AD") or the Fluid Function Panhead, each an exceptionally well-designed and' superbly constructed head in its own class. See description at left.
ti
r ideoaenogloearnaeurxooNI Spoirr ay tolonne seVoidnetotooTheleghgeo farondnt VoideyoonW
lens; they simply screw on, the same way a filter or lenshood does. And when you set your zoom lens to its longest focal length and attach the Spiratone 2X Telephoto, you greatly increase the size of the image—in fact, a subject that would ordinarily be one square foot on your TV screen will become a gigantic four square feet! In other words, you would have had to cut the distance between the camera and the subject in half to get the same screen image without the 2X Telephoto. All too often, particularly when working indoors, video camera lenses simply don't allow you to get everyone or everything into the picture. With the Spiratone .5X Wideangle, you'll include twice as much subject area than with your zoom lens set to its shortest wideangle focal length. To put it differently, you would have to move back by an additional 40% in order to achieve the same result land most of the time this wouldn't even be possible!) What's more, thanks to the great apparent increase in depth of field, subjects from close-up to far-away all appear in focus. It's easy to see how Spiratone Telephoto and Wideangle Lenses can enormously widen the scope of your video imaging, how they can make possible video taping of subjects you couldn't approach or fully encompass otherwise. Spiratone Video auxiliary lenses are fine quality optics which, unlike many similar attachments, do not deteriorate the quality of your image. And you have a choice of several lenses:
PAN HANDLE LENGTH CONTROL LOCK
CAMERA PLATFORM
SWING LOCKS—'
' Ilka trot simp, ---w,,--0 0
TELESCOPIC PAN HANDLE
Other specifications: 360° pan, +45° —80° tilt, and 90° swing (flop); Overall dimensions: 110mm H x 130mm W x 100mm D (less handle); weight 2 lbs. Shpg. The Spiratone FluidFunction Panhead 6 Wt. mounts to any tripod with standard 1/4"-20 3 lbs. thread. A remarkable value at only Order No. 521981
$
Your orders can 'earn'
FABULOUS SeeS PREMIUMS
FABULOUS VALUE! Model 3 SEB Tripod, complete with $5495 "AD" Panhead, as illustrated
SAVE ON DELUXE COMB! OFFER! Model 3 SEB Tripod, complete with Fluid Function Panhead,
'94"
Spiratone 2X High Resolution Video Telephoto Spiratone 1.5X High Resolution Video Telephoto Spiratone .5X -Video Wideangle Spiratone .65 Video Wideangle
$89.95 49.95 69.95 34.95 Shpg. Wt. 1 lb. ea.
pikoteve Panhead "AD"
SAVE! $129 „ 90 $94 90
Light, 1 lb 11 oz, but generously sized where it counts (big 31/2 x 4" camera platform, 81/2" long pan and tilt handle, 2" diameter ribbed panning lock knob, 41/4" long flopover handle/lock), the Spiratone Panhead "AD" features a spring loaded Anti-Dump ("AD") mechanism with automatic return to the horizontal position. No longer need you risk banging up your expensive lenses or camera by accidentally loosening the tilt lock and having your equipment crash into the tripod parts. Equally at home with still, video, or movie cameras, the panhead "AD" is a tremendous asset to safe and easy tripod work and a superb value among panheads. Mounts on 1/4"-20 tripod top.
Spiratone Panhead "AD" Order No. 551252 Shpg. Wt. 21/2 lbs.
$29.95
FREE '800' ORDER PHONE
Buy 2X Telephoto and .5X FOR (you save Wideangle and pay only BOTH $301 FOR (y ou save Buy 1.5X Telephoto and .5X BOTH $ 2 5) Wideangle and pay only When ordering, specify filter (screw-in) size of your camera lens— each lens will be equipped with the appropriate fitting for your lens at no extra cost.
SPECIAL BONUS OFFER! I (for detailed descriptions of panheads, see column at left) Accessories for the Spiratone Video Tripod Model 3 SEB PORTABLE DOLLY—lightweight, sturdy, brake equipped 3" casters See below for description. Reg. $54.95 When bought at same time as tripod 3 SEB
$43.96
QUICK-WAY TRIPOD MOUNT—heavy duty, for quick slip-on, slip-off mounting of camera to tripod. See page 6 for details (not needed for
Fluid Function Panhead). Reg. $1.98 When bought at same time as tripod 3 SEB
pikotttge Portable Dolly Lightweight, yet sturdy aluminum dolly with 3" casters (brake equipped) and carrying handle, sets up for use in just seconds. Locking tripod leg shoes accept most any type of tripod tip
A
When you purchase arty Spiratone Video Telephoto or Wideangle Lens, you can select ONE of these special effect attachments (specify Rayburst Stellar, Color Crostar, Mistmaker, SoftSurround—for description see page 44) in 49, 52, 55 or 58mm (specify size) and pay for it only
and provide for a stable 36" diameter base circle. So if portability is an important consideration, then the Spiratone Portable Dolly will be an excellent choice.
pikcitoge Studio Dolly
$5.95
Portable / Dolly Order No. 552011
Shpg. Wt. 8
lbs.
Heavy duty Studio Dolly for the most demanding applications, equally useful for still, cine or video. Features heavy gauge steel, closed tube, 53M 6 " square leg sections heavily plated and hinged to a central casting with a locking knob to securely maintain the alignment of the extended legs. The locking tri- pod leg shoes are individually adjustable for a leg spread of Order No. from an 11" to a 37" diameter circle and will accept most any 552100 tripod tip up to 1 1/2 " in diameter. The double action locking 3" diameter casters are mounted on a 40" $ base circle and are lockable, via a single foot pedal, for both wheel rotation and swivel. Once the three casters are locked, the tripod/dolly combination is as rigid as if there were no wheels between the tripod and the floor. Shpg. Wt. 12 lbs.
9
With 1.5X Telephoto
With 2X Telephoto
• Pikatege CURVATAR
DOUBLE THE ANGLE OF VIEW OF YOUR VIDEO LENSES with the
TM
A most versatile attachment that more than doubles the angle of view of your lens. Moderate curving of straight lines adds to the wideangle sensation. Usable at most WA settings, the Curvatar is most effective at the shortest focal lengths. Complete with fitting for your video lens $49.90 pouch please state screw-in size required.
Shpg. Wt. 1 lb.
21 I
PUT YOUR MOVIES AND SLIDES ON TAPE WITH A SPIRATONE VIDEO CONVERTER, YOUR VIDEO CAMERA AND RECORDER
Now you can view your SLIDES and MOVIES on your own TV Screen—the no-fuss way, thanks to the family of P
60161T VIDEO
Tired of having to darken the room, drag out the screen, projector, projection stand, extension cords, every time you want to show off your prized images? Compare that to simply popping a video cassette into your VCR, pushing a button and relaxing while your movies and slides glide across your television screen! Even if you're heavily into video now, there are still
CONVERTERS
situations in which you'll have to use a still or movie camera (such as when photographing motorcycle racing, skiing, sky diving, scuba, or any other activity that precludes the use of a fragile video camera and recorder). A Spiratone Video Converter will then be the perfect tool for you to integrate the filmed images with the rest of your video production.
SPIRATONE "SVCII" VIDEO CONVERTER
What's more, you can intermix slides and movies with each other and with scenes video-taped live, you can add titles, fade images in and out, include narration and sound effects — in fact, your professional looking presentations will be limited only by your imagination. Consider the savings in doing it yourself, instead of having to pay someone else to do it. And your one of a kind images need never leave your hands!
Our only under $100 Video Converter which lets you intermix stills and movies, superimpose titles, prints, newspaper clippings or any other 10 x 90mm opaque original over the projected image, and fade, or wipe titles in and out,the
Showing various components used with Spiratone Video Converter
SPIRATONE "SMT" VIDEO CONVERTER • A "best value" in video converters for "transferring" movies and slides onto video tape • Lets you superimpose titles on you ide and movie transfers, titles can "wiped" in or out • has built-in close-up le camera, with virtual! will osus sharply on the pr moyet•N In fact the 9.ou eon tak e SMT.
a
The Spiratone SVCII. is a compact 18 3/4 "Hx61/4"Wx61/2"D overall—including stand), precision-made device which utilizes a top quality front-surface mirror and an extremely fine grain rear projection screen to assure optimum quality of the image being transferred to tape. The converter's height is adjustable (to match the height of the projection optics) and the optical center may be positioned anywhere between 21/2" and 71/2" from the surface on which the Video Converter is placed. A broad 6" diameter base and twin vertical supports assure stability and maintain alignment of the SVCII's optical components. "SVCII" VIDEO Of course, you can also use the SVCII as a handy daylight CONVERTER screen to preview and edit slides and movies. While all types of video cameras, slide and movie projectors can be used in conjunction with the SVCII, some may require close-up lenses, depending on the close focusing capabilities of their optical systems, in order to photograph (or to fill with Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. the projected image of) the SVCU's 72x100mm screen. Order No. 750166
$299'
,m.k
lw""" F CHANNEL 3 \,,,,aso SIGNAL INJECTOR l-
The Spiratone Signal Injector is the perfect solution for your television signal routing needs. By means of a multi-stage bandpass-bandstop filter the SSI allows you to feed your Channel 3 (VCR, cable premium channel, video game or computer) outputs right into your television antenna input, along with the rest of the VHF channels from your antenna or cable feed. No longer need you remember to flick that switch on the back of your set to access the CH3 signal. You can now also restore full programmability and remote control to your VCR or television set by injecting the decoded CH3 premium channel signal into the regular (off-air) TV band. Or you can feed your VCR (or Videodisc) playback signal into your antenna down-lead wiring for viewing at any set in the house. Imagine! all this power, all this convenience, in a small (31/2x21/4x 11/2), lightweight (4 1/4 oz) package, requiring no external source of power and which is simplicity itself to hook-up into your system via the 3 standard "F" connectors. Signal Injector Order No. 780008
Shpg. Wt. 1 lb. ea.
Set of two, Order No. 780024
$19.95 $34.95
The SMT c 70 a 90mm fine grainscreen, a precision beam splitter and a close-up lens, all mounted in a metal enclosure which in turn is attached to a heightadjustable stand (optical center may be located between 85 to 178mm above the work surface) for easy alignment.
The Spiratone CCU lens is a precision, coated optic mounted in a special slip-on adapter to fit most any 4 or 5" (102, 124mm) projection lens for Carousel and Ektagraphic projectors. It allows for close focusing and smaller projected images (appr. x 1%") with either lens. This is needed for video slide transfer and other special applications Shpg. Wt. % lb.
$9.95
Close-up lenses for other projectors also available. Write for information naming your projector, lens.
Now you can use your video camera with your home VCR, even if the VCR doesn't have a direct camera imput, with the new, exclusive
16•14‘. /gypOW .
With Spiratone's Video/Audio Transmitter you can now
• Transmit your video camera's output to a tuner- • Use your video camera for babysitting or security equipped monitor purposes without the need for installing cables Avoid running camera cables which may be dangerous • Free your video camera from your (across hallways, staircases, industrial sites, or at any recorder large gathering of people), unslightly (at a banquet hall • Transmit your VCR's output to any or any formal affair or ceremony), or obtrusive (at a TV set in your house corporate meeting or media event). Spiratone's Video/Audio Transmitter is a compact, portable, lightweight television transmitter, broadcasting at a range of up to 200 feet, on UHF Channel 14. Any audio/video signal—be it a camera, VCR, video disc, computer or video game output, color or B&W—will be available for monitoring on any TV set (or VCR tuner) within the transmitter's 200 foot range. The transmitter measures 5 3/4 x 1 1/2 x 8 1/2 " and weighs under 2 lbs. It comes complete with rod antenna and AC adapter for 110v operation. Camera Cable Harness for fully portable battery opVideo/Audio Transmitter eration, provides camera connector, 12v cigarette Order No, 781006 plug connector for powering camera and transmitter, Shpg. Wt. 3 1/2 lbs. audio/video breakout cables (to connect camera outNote: Video/Audio transmitter not usable put to transmitter). Battery not included see page 19 for rechargeable battery packs. with self-contained Camera/Recorder .7 Specify camera connector 10 pin or 14 pie. units lacking audio/video outputs.
$59.95
Buy CCU lens at same time as a Video Converter and pay only
$6.95
Shpg. Wt.% lb,
Rpooke BUDGET VIDEO ENHANCER
AC POWER SUPPLY
for your video camera Use your camera with your home video recorder, eliminate the need for chargers and batteries; use your camera for babysitting, security, or surveillance purposes by connecting it directly to a video monitor. All this is possible by adding the Spiratone Video Camera Power Supply to your video camera. The Spiratone Video Camera Power Supply operates on 110-120 VAC and, through the 10 pin camera connector, supplies the required 12 VDC to the camera. Additionally, it "breaks out" the camera's video, audio (L & R where camera is configured for stereo sound), and remote signals to the proper jacks for connection to your video equipment. Spiratone Video Camera Power Supply (10 pin VHS only) Order No. 749109 Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs.
VIDEO/AUDIO TRANSMITTER
22
SPECIAL
"CCU" CLOSE-UP LENS for CAROUSEL PROJECTOR
Now you can have your very own TV Station
$349.95
50506
pg. Wt. 5 lbs.
4,0
Val DEr. EMANCER
If your tapes suffer from the video blahs when you make camera recordings, or copies of your favorite video productions, the Spiratone Budget Video Enhancer represents the most affordable means to improve the looks of your tapes. Its enhance control. by means of edge contrast enhancement techniques, brings out fine detail and makes the image look sharper, while at the same time the core control minimizes the effect of the enhancement on the video noise content of the image. The Budget Video Enhancer features a bypass/enhance switch, allowing instant comparison of processed/unprocessed images and has three video outputs providing for multiple simultaneous copies. Twelve volt DC operation (110 VAC adapter included) permits field use. Budget Video Enhancer Order No. 761109 Shpg. Wt. 4 lbs.
$39.95
*E4' pikategeDELUXE VIDEO ENHANCER FA-320 with split-screen mode
The latest addition to our Series FA family of video enhancers, the FA-320 features • Split-Screen enhancement display for side-by-side comparison of the original video and the enhanced signal on a single monitor screen and at the same time. A split line position control moves the location of the split left and right, anywhere on screen, so that signal comparison may be made of any image element desired. No longer need you guess as to how much enhancement is being provided. Built-in A and B input selection switching eliminates loose cables and allows for system connections to be left undisturbed while selecting inputs. • Video enhancement is achieved through the dual delay-line contour correction method and results in a more natural looking picture. • Monitor video and audio(L+R) terminals are provided for hook-up to a video monitor. • Two channel audio (L&R) allows for full use of stereo broadcasts and stereo and Hi Fi Beta or VHS recorders. • Twin video and stereo audio outputs are provided for multiple dubbing purposes, also allow for cross-dubbing set-ups. The FA-320 measures only 5 7/s" W x 7 3/4" D x 2%" H, weighs 21/2 lbs., and is handsomely finished in professional black brushed aluminum. AC powered, with switch-selectable 110/120, 220/240 volt input, 50 or 60 Ha, the line cord is provided with both American and European plugs.
Deluxe Video Enhancer FA-320 Order No. 763209
$124.95 Shpg. Wt. 4 lbs.
IMPROVE THE LOOK OF YOUR VIDEO TAPES WITH OUR LATEST ENHANCERS/CONTROLLERS Stabilizer Deluxe Dubbing Console with and RF Converter
There's only one electronic instrument that allows you to set proper brightness level, color intensity, balance the color when copying (or watching) tapes or transferring movies and slides to video.
NEW! N, *OK
The Deluxe Dubbing Console measures 1 01/4x6x3", weighs 2 3/4 lbs. and is powered by a 120V AC to 12V DC adapter (supplied).
Video Color Processor
$99.95
it restores to your VCR the video "adjustments" the manufacturers left out With the VCP chroma gain and phase controls you can correct scenes which are off-color also be used as a fade control, adding that due to transmissions problems, faded color capability to your video post production. Four film, or even those made with wrong color outputs enable you to make multiple, simulbalance settings on the camera. taneous copies. The b&w setting on the mode With the luminance gain control you can switch strips the color burst signal from the brighten up dark scenes, restore overly bright video being processed for a picture-perfect scenes to normalcy, even compensate for black & white output—even when the origibacklight situations you failed to take into nal is in full color. account when shooting. And with its accom- If you're serious about the quality of your panying luminance level meter the luminance videos, the Spiratone Video Color Processor gain control takes the guesswork out of is one instrument you can't afford to be proper video level setting. In addition, it may without. Measures 6 3/4 " x 10"x3"; Weighs 2 1/2 lbs. and is powered $i _ _ lirr dpegr Nic,;7e76 .121066e. by a 120V AC to 12V DC adapter (supplied) 49A 4 VIDEO COLOR PROCESSOR
Order No. 761001
Shpg. Wt. 41/2 lbs. Ideal accessory for the single or multiple VCR owner, the Deluxe Dubbing Console combines the most desired features in signal processors into one easy-to-use unit. • Distribution amplifier provides three sets • Video enhancer with core control improves of audio and video outputs, allowing for the the picture, brings out detail, and minimizes making of up to three simultaneous copies the amount of video noise in the picture. (on three VCRs, of -course) of the input • Stabilizer restores missing synchronization signal. pulses from copy-guarded tapes (which, in addition to keeping you from copying the • RF modulator combines the audio/video tape, may make it unwatchable on your output signal into a channel 3 or 4 television equipment) to allow you to do as you please signal for direct viewing on a television rewith the signal. ceiver. Allows the single VCR owner to avail himself of the benefits of video enhancement • Bypass mode feeds the unprocessed input and stabilization when playing back tapes signal to the output for instant comparison on his VCR. to the enhanced/stabilized signal.
etosspbtotoge
5
ALL-IN-ONE
TM
ENHANCER, COLOR PROCESSOR, STABILIZER, RF CONVERTER, DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
reduction for the audio channels and provides stereo audio capabilities. Truly the ultimate in Spiratone video controls, the ALL-IN-ONE comti 9995 bites all of the capabilities of the above Deluxe Dubbing Console and See summary of capabilities (below) for full feature listing. Video Color Processor; additionally it offers switchable dynamic noise ALL-IN-ONE-PROCESSOR Order No. 761303 Shpg. Wt. 7 lbs. '1
SUMMARY OF CAPABILITIES
SPURATONE VIDEO CONTROLLERS WHAT IT DOES IN A NUTSHELL CAMERA ENHANCER
Input(s)
Output(s)
Video Enhance (Sharpness)
not applicable
not applicable
YES
YES
Dynamic noise reduction
2 video 4 audio (stereo, 2 ea. L&R)
YES
YE
2 video 4 audio (stereo, 2 ea. L&R) •44
2 video 4 audio (stereo. 2 ea. UR) 1 ea. audio, video to monitor
YES, with split screen comparsion
YES
Enhances image while copying or editing tapes from one VCR to (up to) three others
1 video
3 video
YES
YES
Enhances and stabilizes image while copying
1 video 1 audio
3 video 3 audio 1 VHF (Ch 3,4 selectable)
YES
YES
Controls brightness, color intensity and hue of the color signal
1 video
4 video
Combines all of the functions of Color Processor and Deluxe Console and additionally offers dynamic noise reduction and stereo audio capability
1 video 2 audio (tereo, 1 ea. UR)
4 video 8 audiolstereo 4 ea, UR) 1 VHF (Ch 3,4 VHF
14 pin
YES
10 pin
10 pin
YES
2 video 2 audio ***
4 video 4 audio
2 video 4 audio (stereo, 2 ea. L&R)
Enhances image and switches video and stereo audio from two sources. Variable position split screen for enhanceiunenhance comparison
BUDGET VIDEO ENHANCER DELUXE DUBBING CONSOLE
Model 308B (Beta)
Enhances camera video images while recording
14 pin
Enhances image and clears up sound while copying or editing tapes from (up to) two VCR's to (up to) four others Enhances image and clears up sound (in stereo) while copying or editing tapes from (up to) two VCR's to (up to) two others
308V (VHS)a VIDEO ENHANCER Model 306A VIDEO ENHANCER Model 310 STEREO HI-FI DELUXE ENHANCER Model FA-320 with split screen
VIDEO COLOR PROCESSOR ALL-IN-ONE VIDEO PROCESSOR
Video Audio 'Noise Suppress Noise Reduction ion
apseserfroimreone VCR to (up to) three rtheedristinAglietw o f d ire ct hookup to TV set
--,
RF** Video* Stabilizer Modulator not applicable
Luminance Chroma Control Gain (Video Control Fader)
Chroma Phase Control
B&W (color killer) control
Power 12v, 75ma from recorder
not applicable
110VAC
110V AC iiiise"ic reduction
110-240VAC SWITCH SELECTABLE
no applicable
12V.
—
—
(AC adapter included)
YES
YES (Ch 3, 4 selectable)
12V, (AC adapter included)
—
YES
YES
Dynamic noise reduction
YES
—
YES with meter
YES
YES
YES
12V, (AC adapter included)
YES (Ch 3,4 selectable)
YES with meter
YES
YES
YES
12V. (AC adapter included)
***PushbUtton selectable—audio follows video *Video Stabilizer removes copy-guard "jitters" from pre-recorded tapes **RF Modulator allows feeding video signal to regular TV set's VHF terminals for monitoring on either channel 3 or 4 (switch selectable)
Video Enhance
s
Series FA (FA306A, FA310 Hi-Fi Stereo)
Our Series FA Video Enhancers ,are state-of-the-art video/audio processors providing the following capabilities: • Built-in A and B input selection switching. Imagine — no more loose cables dangling about, you can leave both input VCR's, or VCR and video disc players permanently connected. • Video enhancement (sharpness control) and video noise suppression (core control) on two separate controls for the utmost flexibility in optimizing the video signal by edge contrast enhancement techniques. Enhance on/off switch allows for comparison of enhanced signal to unprocessed signal. • A dynamic noise reduction system is supplied for the audio signal.
• Distribution amplifier capability (4 ea. video and audio output pairs for the FA306; 2 ea. video and stereo audio IL and R) outputs for the FA310 Hi-Fi), allowing multiple simultaneous copies to be made or for direct monitoring of the signal on a TV receiver equipped with audio/video input terminals. • Hi-Fi stereo capability (FA310 Hi-Fi only) allows for full use of your state-of-the-art Beta or VHS Hi-Fi video cassette recorder. The smartly-styled Series FA Enhancers measure 7 1/2 D x 6W x 2"H and are AC powered (110v 50/60 Hz 10 w). The brushed aluminum case is sure to complement the modern looks of any home electronic entertainment center. The audio frequency response is 2012,000 Hz (Model FA306A) and 20-20,000 Hz (Model FA3 1 0 Hi-Fi). VIDEO ENHANCER FA306A Order No. 763004 VIDEO ENHANCER FA3I0 Stereo Hi-Fi Order No. 763101 Shpg. Wt. ea., 5 lbs.
$129.50 $154.50
Improved Images with Beta and VHS Cameras, with the piAttlege,
Video Camera Enhancer
Even today's sophisticated amateur video cameras — with their many capabilities which allow you to shoot in available darkness, focus for you, provide titles and captions — still do not deliver the best possible image to your recorder. Certainly, you can use your dubbing enhancer later on (when editing or copying), but that just won't give you the crisp clear image that you can obtain by enhancing the signal before it's committed to tape. And the results of using the Camera Enhancer are dramatic! From the first moment the Enhancer is turned on and you slowly advance the control from minimum to maximum, you will see your subject take on a striking lifelikeness and depth that's almost threedimensional in quality. If you've ever envied the razor-sharp screen images of your local newscaster or weathergirl when compared to your so-so images, adding the Spiratone Camera Enhancer to your equipment bag will do more for your image quality than a rackfull of other equipment. The 7 oz. Camera Enhancer, a compact 5x21/2x11/4", VIDEO CAMERA ENHANCER is powered by the recorder. It simply plugs in beSpecify BETA, Order No. 769002 tween the camera and recorder and has a clip to or VHS, Order No. 769053 attach it to the recorder's shoulder strap. Shpg. Wt. 11/2 lbs.
23
ALL 1:131RECT
OR CREDIT CARD ORDERING You can phone your credit card orders in free from all States *[except Alaska ], and from Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands
221-969
A L 800 TOLL FREE Monday and Thursday, 8:30 AM to 10 PM Tuesday, Wednesday, Friday, 8:30 AM to 5:45 PM Saturday, 9 AM to 4:45 PM [New York Time]
*NEW YORK STATE-
except N.Y. City, Nassau, Southern Westchester counties
00 522-2553
CALL TOLL FREE Monday through Saturday, 9 am to 4:45 pm
For ordering from New York City, Nassau, southern Westchester county, from Alaska, from foreign countries or if you want information, literature, prices or call for any reason other than to place an order,
Call (718) 886-2000 [not toll free] 'When you call Spiratone's mail order department phone number, you'll be able to place your order directly with an experienced sales counselor, thoroughly familiar with photographic equipment. He's knowledgeable in the use and application of a wide variety of lenses, optical attachments, darkroom equipment and the thousands of specialty items that make Spiratone America's leading supplier of lenses and accessories. Our phone service brings our entire store right into your home or office. You'll talk to a 'real person' who'll help you make sure you select what's best suited for your needs - and who'll also give you realistic availability information. He'll even advise against your purchase if he feels you aren't making the proper selection. All you need is one of the credit cards listed below - minimum charge order is $20. (Of course we'll gladly fill your order for a $1 item also, but you'll have to mail orders for under $20 and enclose your remittance.)
PHONE and MAILORDERS can be CHARGED with any of these cards:
(MasterCard
CD
DINERS CLUB
CMCORP 0 Furnish all information on your card which appears in raised letters MINIMUM CHARGE ORDER $20
Please note: our 800 numbers are direct lines Jo our ORDER DEPT. YOUR CALL CANNOT BE TRANSFERRED TO OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE OR INFORMATION DEPARTMENTS.
ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT: when you phone your order to us, or come to one of our stores, be sure to tell our representative before you start indicating your requirements, "my selections are based on this catalog" (see catalog numbers on catalog cover and top of order form). This will enable him to more easily confirm all prices and offers.
piktittieNC 24
To reduce delivery time, choose
SHIPPING INFORMATION
UPS "NEXT DAY" AIR SERVICE
Please read carefully Unless otherwise specified, all shipments are made by Parcel Post or United Parcel Service (at our option). Generally, provided you have given us a street address, we will use UPS which, in some instances, may be most economical, with rates being lower than those shown in the table below. You will, of course, get the benefit of lower transportation costs, when available. Depending on your location and variations in service, a shipment may be in transit toyou anywhere from a day or two to a few weeks. Most UPS shipments reach their destinations within four or five days. There are several ways to speed up transit time. UPS Next Day Air (see table at right) will generally get the merchandise to you anywhere in the continental United States on the day after we make shipment. Other fast means of transportation are also available, but must be specifically discussed with our Order Department at the time you place your order Merchandise which is too large for shipment by mail or UPS must be shipped motor freight (see information at bottom right). Spiratone offers for sale thousands of items which, before shipment, pass through various quality control points, often requiring a thorough knowledge of product compatibility with customers' equipment. Our custom combinations and special outfits are individually assembled. This type of merchandise and custom service do not lend themselves to "assembly line" handling in shipping and our average processing time for orders varies from three to seven working days. If you are in a genuine hurry for your order (not just the type of hurry we are all in for everything) and you advise us so at the time you are placing your order, we will endeavor to give your order preferential treatment. Requests for rush service after an order has been placed can, however, not be complied with. Should you wish to check on an order you placed with us. please write us, giving complete details (when you placed order, what it called for, how paid for etc.) in your letter. Our phone order department cannot give information on such matters. Please see also "Spiratone Policies" at right.
PARCEL POST/UPS RATES subject to rate changes
Any fraction of a pound over the weight shown takes the next higher rate. When flat shipping charges are given, these apply instead of actual postage and cover least expensive means of shipping.
Note: UPS accepts only parcels addressed to street addresses. Whenever possible, we will ship by UPS unless you specifically instruct us not to. For information on shipping to destinations outside the US., please write to our Export Dept.
Note: In all instances, the actual weight of the items is considerably less than their shipping weight. Also, shipping weights given are approximate and will vary somewhat depending on manner of packing and number and type of items which can be packed together.
."C ..
-
;,s ,,,m
6 -,'"L,
1,
',:1'.2.' c
.?,-; E,r=-6 -'-' =°
1.' 2
UP TO
mc.,=.
is ..m
,':',
d._'',
2
$1.51
3 4 5
1.65 1.78
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1.92 2.05 2.19 2.32 2.46 2.59 2.70 2.79 2.89 2.98 3.06 3.14 3.22 3.29 3.36 3.43
e
g'' 0 .
t„
$1.66 1.87 2.08 2.29 2.50 2.71 2.92 3.13 3.34 3.49 3.65 3.79 3.92 4.04 4.16 4.27 4.38 4.48 4.58
4., - 'B ., ,, . 2 °6 ,.-' : '= u 00
.TEE.
$1.89 2.21 2.54 2.86 3.18 3.51 3.83 4.15 4.48 4.71 4.94 5.15 5.35 5.54 5.71 5.88 6.03 6.18 6.33
i;
•k 14
c-' 8 ..`2
=''
,‘,'
-2 .,
',,
3-8
=m2 VD o
$2.13 2.58 3.03 3.47 3.92 4.37 4.82 5.26 5.71 6.03 6.34 6.63 6.90 7.15 7.39 7.61 7.83 8.03 8.22
< &'°2
=
..
,;',
$2.25 2.99 3.57 4.16 4.74 5.32 5.91 6.49 7.07 7.49 7.89 8.27 8.62 8.94 9.25 9.54 9.81 10.07 10.32
$2.30 3.87 4.74 5.62 - 6.49 7.36 8.25 9.12 10.00 10.62 11.23 11.78 12.30 12.79 13.24 13.67 14.08 14.46 14.83
Be sure to read Shipping nformation' above. For heavier packages consult your pos master; see also 'Motor Freight Shipmen s: Please calculate Parcel Post or United Parcel Service charges on the basis of the above table and add for insurance per chart be ow.
Cost of Insurance Cost of Insurance Merchandise Charge Merchandise Charge $ 0.01 to $ 25 $ .50 $150.01 to $200 $2.10 25.01 to 50 1.10 200.01 to 300 3.00 50.01 to 100 300.01 to 400 100.01 to 150 1.80 400.01 to 500 4.40 For shipments of higher value, add accordingly.
Please note that most of our shipments are privately insured and that the insurance charge will not be indicated by the amount of postage on your shipment. Shipping Weights are stated for most items. When no weights are given, shipping cost will still be charged. The inclusion of numerous smaller items with bulky items does not appreciably increase total shipping costs.
Minimum Shipping Charge per order $1.75
WHEN IN NY VISIT OUR MANHATTAN STORE
• 130 West 31st St., NYC
SENO MAIL ORDERS AND ALL CORRESPONDENCE TO
Most orders are shipped within a few working days-see Shipping Information at left. With UPS "Next Day" Air Service, you'll receive your order the "next day" after we ship it. For method of payment, see Order Form. Weight not to exceed
1 lb. 2 lbs. 3 lbs. 4 lbs. 5 lbs. 6 lbs. 7 lbs. 8 lbs. 9 lbs. 10 lbs.
$11.50 12.50 13.50 14.50 15.50 16.50 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00
11 lbs. 12 lbs. 13 lbs. 14 lbs. 15 lbs. 16 lbs. 17 lbs. 18 lbs. 19 lbs. 20 lbs.
$22.00 23.00 24.00 25.50 26.50 27.50 28.50 29.50 30.50 32.00
SPIRATONE POLICIES please read carefully
We'd like you to know all about our policies and practices-and why so many photographers have been dealing with us for many decades. We have been in the mail order business longer than almost any other photographic retailer-for over 40 years. When you buy from Spiratone, you buy with confidence. Spiratone sells no cameras; we specialize in camera, darkroom, projection, audio-visual and video accessories, many of our design and manufacture. Spiratone sells only brand new merchandise; we take no trade-ins and do not sell on a returnable basis, thus assuring you of receiving unused, not trial-rejected merchandise. We describe our merchandise accurately and in detail; if you have any questions, please write us before ordering. We are anxious to help you decide which merchandise will suit your needs. (Correctly supplied merchandise is not returnable.)
"full" warranty on all Spiratone items (while most photographic products carry only "limited" warranties). Our warranty is printed on every invoice and a copy may also be obtained by requesting it in writing prior to ordering. We give a
When we make an error in shipping or a warranteed item has to be returned for service, we reimburse you for return transportation costs, provided you write for our 'return' label and shipping instructions. Your invoice contains detailed instructions on what to do in case of a problem-please follow these. We generally respond within 24 hours to requests for adjustments. The prices and offers in this catalog are in effect from the time it is issued for a period of 90 days. Any increase during this period will be absorbed by us. In case of reductions, we will credit you any amount due you. All items listed in this catalog are believed by us to be in stock in adequate quantities and to continue to be readily available. However, in offering thousands of products, a few may not be available promptly, or may become unavailable sooner than we anticipate. Also, newly introduced items may initially be in short supply until production on them gets fully under way. Because of the rapid changes and advances in electronic products, we may, without prior notice, supply an improved or updated version of an item you are ordering. Of course, in all cases, the item you will receive will not cost more than, and will include all features and capabilitiesof, the ordered product. You will also automatically receive the benefit of any price reduction that may occur. It is our policy to notify you of any delays beyond our normal shipping schedules; not to cash your check or charge your credit card until shortly before we actually make delivery; and to refund promptly any prepayments for merchandise which became unexpectedly unavailable. All special offers, discounts, bonuses and 'same time purchase' offers listed in this catalog are valid only on orders based on selections and prices in this catalog and must be taken advantage of in the manner stated; subsequent requests cannot be honored.
MOTOR FREIGHT (TRUCK) SHIPMENTS The majority of items in this catalog can be shipped by UPS or by mail. However, a few items (clearly identified as such) must be shipped by motor freight. Motor Freight shipments are made with shipping charges 'collect' (you pay truckman on delivery) and are most economical when the total shipping weight of your order approaches the 100 lbs. minimum you pay freight for. Thus, you can include all items in an order, including those not requiring motor freight shipment, with those that do, for the greatest economy. Examples of appr. motor freight charges from N.Y. are:100 lbs. (min.) TO: Boston $35.00 TO: Houston $58.00 TO: Chicago, Atlanta 42.00 TO: San Francisco 72.00 Charges vary, depending on item and other factors.
OUR MAILING LIST If your name and address appear on the back cover of this catalogue you are on our mailing list. Occasionally we make this list available to carefully selected companies and organizations who will send you information on products or services which might be of interest to you. If you prefer not to receive such mailings, please copy your name, address and code number exactly as they appear above your name on the address label and mail to: Spiratone, Inc., Mail Preference Service, P.O. Box 47, Flushing, NY 11352.
ALSO VISIT OUR FLUSHING STORE (Near Main
St.)
135-06 Northern Blvd., Flushing, NY 11354-4063
Your INDEX to the Finest Values in Photo and Video Accessories AIR CLEANER AIR COMPRESSOR AIR RELEASE ANTISTATIC DEVICES A/V EQUIPMENT AUTOWINDERS BACKGROUNDS, SUPPORTS BARE BULB FLASH BATTERIES, CHARGERS BELLOWS UNITS BINOCULARS BOOKS: Close-up, Copying, Duplicating Darkroom Dictionary of Photography Filters High Contrast-Kodalith Lighting, Portraiture Multimedia Projection
Page 40 40 36 39 30-35 36 4 10, 17 16, 19, 42 27, 29 31 26, 29, 35 40 Order Form 44, Back Cover 41 13, 35 30, 34
Chances are your order qualifies for a
GREAT PREMIUM Details on back cover
CABLE RELEASES 36 CENTERSHARP FILTERS 45, 47 CLOSE-UP LENSES 7 44, 47 COLOR ANALYZER/METER-TIMER 43 COLORFLOW GRADUATED TONE BACKGROUND MATERIAL 4 COLOR PRINT PROCESSING SYSTEMS 39 COPYING EQUIPMENT 6, 8, 26-29 CUTTERS: Film, Paper 33, 41 DARKROOM EQUIPMENT 35, 37-43 DEDICATED FLASH, EXTENSION CORDS 16, 17 DICHROIC ILLUMINATOR FOR DUPING 28, 29 DIFFUSERS: for Lighting 4, 10, 12, 13, 15, 18 7 44-47 for Lenses 30-32 DISSOLVE UNITS DOLLIES FOR TRIPODS 21 DRYERS for Film, Paper 39, 40 DUPLICATING EQUIPMENT 8, 26-29, 42 EASELS 38 ENLARGERS 39,43 "EVERREADY" CASES 3, 36, 42 EXPOSURE METERS 11, 17, 18, 24-A EYEPIECE CRITICAL FOCUSER 26 EYEPIECE ANGLE FINDER 26 FIBER OPTIC ATTACHMENT for flash 16 FILING SYSTEMS: for Negatives, Slides, Prints .. 35 FILM, Bulkfilm: B&W, Color, 41 Kodalith 28 Duplicating
Page FILTERS: for Lenses 7, 44-47 for Lights 10, 12-15 for Safelights 41 FINDER ATTACHMENTS 26 FISH-EYE LENS 36 FLASH. ELECTRONIC 10, 11, 16, 17, 18 FLASH HOLDERS, GRIPS 10, 13-17 FLASHMETERS 11, 18 FOCUSING AIDS 26, 40 FOCUSING RAILS 6 26 GADGET BAGS 3, 42, Back Cover GELS - WRATTEN FILTERS 47 4 GRADUATED TONE BACKGROUNDS HASSELBLAD, ACCESSORIES for 7 INSTANT PRINTS from Video 19 KODALITH FILM & DEVELOPER 41 LAMPS: Floodlamps (3200° 3400°K) 13 12 Quartz 34 Projection LENS CAPS, HOODS Back of reply envelope
OMB \ MEIN
MOIR 1•1111111
It's Easy to Shop Spiratone in the Comfort of your Home or Office
CALL p teen DIRECT S
For complete, toll-free credit card ordering information, see page 24
LENSES: 2, 8, 9. 21, 26 Camera 7, 8, 26, 44, 47 Close-up and Copy Enlarging 42 8 Macro 33 Projector 7 LEVELS, for Camera 34 for Projector (Slide) 10-20 LIGHTING EQUIPMENT 8 9 26 MACRO LENSES 47 MATTE BOX 2 MIRROR LENSES 5,7 MONOPODS 19, 44, 47 MULTIMAGE LENSES 7 PANORAMA HEAD 41 PAPER CUTTERS/TRIMMERS POLARIZERS: 7 44, 47 for Lenses 12, 14 for Lighting 16 POWER PACK for Strobes 37 PRINT-ALL STABILIZATION PROCESSOR PROJECTOR ACCESSORIES 6, 30-36 PROJECTOR PROGRAMMERS/ 30-32 CONTROLLERS
PROOFERS QUARTZ LIGHTS REAR PROJECTION SCREENS REFLECTORS/DIFFUSERS REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEMS RINGLIGHT
Page 35, 38 12, 13, 15, 19, 20 28 4, 12, 13, 15, 18 36 18
Every Purchase From This Catalog SAVES 0 % FUTURE UP TO I° ORDERS details on back cover
SAFELIGHTS 41 SFS FILTER SYSTEM 45, 46, 47 SINKS 40 SLAVE LIGHTS, TRIGGER 10, 16, 17, 18 SLIDE COPIERS 19, 28, 29, 42 SLIDE VIEWER/PROJECTOR 36 SLIDE MOUNTS, MOUNTERS 33, 34 SLIDE SORTERS/VIEWERS, STORAGE 35 2, 8, 9 SLR LENSES SPECIAL EFFECT ATTACHMENTS 19, 36, 44-47 SPIRALITE SYSTEM STROBES 10 SPOT LIGHT (FOCUSING) 13 SPOT METERS 24-A SPRINGLITE REFLECTORS 15 STABILIZATION PROCESSOR 37 "T" ADAPTERS 7 TELEPHOTO LENSES 2, 8, 9 TELESCOPE ATTACHMENTS 8 TELXTENDERS 9 TIMERS, Programmers for Darkroom .. 38, Back Cover TRIPODS. HEADS, GRIPS ........ 6, 16, 21 TWINLENS REFLEX, ACCESSORIES for 7 UMBRELLAS 15 12 VELCRO FASTENERS VENTILATORS for Darkroom 40 19-23, 36, 47 VIDEO ACCESSORIES WIDEANGLE LENS/ATTACHMENTS 8, 9, 21, 36 47 WRATTEN FILTER "GELS" 9 ZOOM LENSES
See the many money saving
DEDUCT $ OFFERS overprinted on many items throughout the catalog.
When you order these items, simply DEDUCT the amount or percentage shown. But you MUST indicate DEDUCT amount on your written order or ask for it when ordering by phone or in the storeotherwise full amount is charged. Offers expire Jan. 31, 1986.
EXCITING NEW PRODUCTS INTRODUCED IN THIS CATALOG Comet-Tracking Bracket/Scope VIDEO CONVERTER SVC II ZOOM LENS 28.210mm (!) p
HI-LO TRIPOD
for photographing Halley's Comet -see page 248
only $29.95- seepage 22
-see page 6
"TV station" wireless transmitting-seepage 22
VIDEO/AUDIO TRANSMITTER
Split-Screen Video Enhancer
EX IPOTIZOL Combination Flash/Regular Meter
MULTIMAGE DIGITAL DISSOLVE PROGRAMMER
MINOLTA MAXXUM
SCREENSHOOTER
PRO FLEXIFLECTOR
1
-see page 18
Pro Panhead FT (Fine-Tune) -see
NEW
page 5
for only $269 -see page 32
for photographing video, computer screens - see page 31
items are being introduced on pages 5, 6, 7, 9, 18, 19, 20,
21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 35, 36, 40, 44, and 48. All of these are identified in this catalog with a large "NEW" next to the heading. ©1985, SPIRATONE, INC., FLUSHING, NY
-see page 22
Accessories for -see page 7
3 x 6' reflector/diffuser-see page 18
While most of these items are already in full production and readily
available, a few may initially be in short supply, with some delays in delivery. Of course, we'll advise you of such delays.
25
Copy Stands, Close-up Accessories HIGHLY CORRECTED, COATED, SHORT MOUNT, FLAT FIELD
P.voion
MACRO LENSES for use with bellows on virtually any 35mm SLR camera
Specially corrected for extreme close-up and macro work, Spiratone's short-mount, flat field lenses have long been acclaimed the most versatile and economical means of producing high quality, edge to edge sharp exposures. Designed for use with bellows extensions they provide an extended focusing range on most any 35mm SLR. Each lens covers a different magnification range — your selections of one. two or all three will depend on the field sizes you wish to cover.
150MM F14.5 MACROTELT
35MM F/3.5 MACROTAR® yields from 1.5X to 6X lin- Stops down to f/16 ear magnifications covering a greater than life-size range in which normal lenses are practically unusable. $24 95 !/.., /b.
/
75MM F/3.5 FLAT FIELD MACRO,
yielding a range from a reduction of 1: 4 to a magnification •of 2.2:1, is particularly well suited for duplicating slides and for small object photography, allowing a comfortable working distance of 10 1/2 " to 31/2 " from the sub- 0q8 95 1/4 lb. 0 1 Stops down to f •16 ject. Shpg.
Buy any Spiratone bellows unit at same time as Macrotar, Macrotel, 75mm Flat Field Lens (any or all 3) and take 10% OFF COMBINED BellowsLens total.
SAVE 10%
yields the largest Stops down to f/22 uninterrupted range — from almost lifeon BOTH size to infinity. It BELLOWS is ideal for copying and small photographs, magazine and newsShort Mount paper pages, as MACRO well as for changLENS(ES) ing from closeups See Bellows, page 27 to conventional Spiratone short mount macro lenses telephoto work withare front threaded to accept accessories. out switching lenses. Focuses continuously from infinity down Special fittings to to approx. 12". Shpg. Wt. IA lb. USE YOUR 52 OR 55m FILTERS $39.95 Ranges indicated are approximate and Adapt any of these three macro lenses for use vary slightly, depending on min. and with 52mm or 55mm accessories (specify which) max. extension of your bellows unit. and pay only $2 when ordered with lens(es).
.
THERE IS NOFINER. NO MORE PRECISE MACRC POSITIONING SYSTEM THAN THE
S
Basic Rail
n
iAtitry„
p
ULTRA-PRECISE,
u DUO-DIRECTIONAL
uadrail
MT
Whether you choose the Basic single direction rail "A" or the complete Duo-Directional Rail System, you will be investing in quality instruments e tial for accurate camera position control in ultra close-up, macro, copying or duplica Made to high precision standards the Spiratone Duo-Directional Quadrail s p ible the shifting of your camOptional era position by fractions of a millimeter, h a Poi ock at any point within its range. Rail Attached to a tripod or copystand, for h ' I or varfir lime, both rails provide calibrated camera travel of 90mm. The Basic Rail "A" can be used by i s or biOgh d forth camera movement; and, in conjunction with the optional Rail "B" (which you may purchase e #u wish) you can control separate movements (at right angles to each other) for the ultimate' ti oning your camera in relation to a small subject. Made of aluminum with a diecasiOlatfonn, rails are suited for 35mm and 120 cameras and mount between the camera and tripod ortopy 9 The complete Spiratone Duo-Directional Quadrail System Shpg Wts., each rail, incl. Basic Rail "A" and Basic Rail "A" (with ell nc Optional Rail "B" (no 11/2 lbs., complete 11J. camera platform) .FIVJ.UJ camera platform) Quadrail System 3 lbs. optional Rail "B" sysW) _
Ctt
sea g 58.
Sp e
$37.95
WITH LEVELING CONTROL
SPIRATONE COPYSTAND
$45 95 n
Shpg. No. 520446
Shpg.
Makes copying, small product photography, many other SPIRATONE $20. 8 lb,. phases of close-up and macro work simple and efficient. Order No. COPYLIGHTS' 202037 It consists of a 1 1/2" diameter pole, a spring loaded paral*(fit Spiratone. other 1 1/2" or lelogram camera platform fcr effortless raising and lowersmaller diameter poles) ing, a leveling control and a 16x19" baseboard. With the Spiratone Copystand, you can conveniently posiSPIRATONE LIGHT100 0 si hipbg. iv/. tion the camera up to 30" above the subject — at that POLARIZERS, le distance, with a normal lens on a 35mm camera, you'll Iff Order No. PAIR, WITH CLIPS U cover a subject about 11x17". For larger subjects rotate 702118 See page 14. the parallelogram arm 180° to shoot below baseboard height. The optional COPY-LIGHT mounts twin 12" goosenecks to the pole at any 'OFFER A OFFER B OFFER C desired height, providing flexibility in illuminating both flat and three Copystand Copylight Copystand, dimensional subjects. Two 5" chrome reflectors accept 250w r1 photoand set of Copylight, and floods or 3200°K bulbs or smaller wattage bulbs (not supplied). Copylight Polarizers° set of The optional LIGHT-POLARIZERS, made of a plastic-coated, Polarizers heat-resistant, washable material, which fit the reflectors, enable you to control reflections, when copying pictures, oil paintings or photographing shiny objects. In fact, if you use a polarizer over the camera lens, too, you'll be able to control and eliminate (if you wish) all reflections, even on metallic objects! See money saving Light Order No. Order No. Order No. Table offer at right. For detailed information on using polarizers on lenses and lights see page 14. 520454 202053 520462
88095
s
p
iitoR
el Q EYEPIECE Eficus
VP
w
%
ER
'5
89395
c F o rn:t aC xangy, mKonica, i neonItta,x,F,giscia,cN o, pus 1 tiM ,p a k an ac and other t SLR cameras. Name your camera and exact model. One of the most needed accessories tor the SLR user • Fits directly to eyepiece of the camera viewfinder who demands critical sharpness in his pictures — a e • Quickly hinges out of way allowing entire virtual "must" for close-up and telephoto focusing and viewing screen to be observed for composing whenever depth of field is limited. Shpg. Wt. 1/2 lb.—r" • Individual eyepiece correction — magnifies Buy at same time as Spiratone SLR lenses, `'"•• central portion of the finder image so that truly accessories, costing $25 or more and pay only '14 50 critical focus can be achieved
CRITICAL
pinutot ANGLESCOPETM For PENTAX, MINOLTA, NIKON, CANON, KONICA, OLYMPUS, most 35 SLR's LOW-
Name your exact camera model
ANGLE IT Whether for copying, for overhead or -7\,, for low angle shooting, the Spiratone ANGLESCOPE adds viewing versatility to the 35mm SLR. Mounts directly to eyepiece of most 35mm SLR cameras. Built-in ocular adjustment. Rotatable, 90° clickstop settings for vertical, horizontal viewing; 5 minor cut-off on 4 some cameras.
Shpg. Wt. 1/2 lb.
COPY-EASE IT
'58
DELUXE MODEL — incorporates a "correcting" optical system showing a left to right (un- r reversed) viewfinder 4 image. Sh.Wt.1 lb.
$18. 95
The Manual of Close-Up Photography Whatever type of close-up or macro work you do, you'll benefit front the information and ideas in this comprehensive 272 page volume by well-known photographer, author-lecturer Lester Lefkowitz. Covering all aspects of , close-up work, including lighting and evaluation of current equipment and accessories, effectively illustrated throughout. This Manual is recom, mended for both amateurs and ...) professionals. Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs c Buy at same time as $25 or more of $ 6.4 7 $12.9 J close-up equipment, and pay only
SAVE 10% Buy either model Anglescope at same
time as SLR lens, close-up or duplicating equipment costing 525 or more and deduct 10% from cost of Anglescope.
PROFESSIONA pikotoge COPYING OUTFIT
1 for copying, duplicating, macro and product photography.1),
I I I 91
.i..
with tungsten or flash illumination
Socket for Slavemate
Adjustable hold-down masking bands
Socket-Reflector Assembly
Copying and photographing small objects is one of the most frequently required tasks of photographers — and one that can be greatly simplified by the use of the proper equipment. After supplying copystands for three decades and learning what our customers expect in a stand, we've come up with a model which provides virtually every desirable feature, yet costs little more than an 'ordinary' stand. A 11/2" diameter pole with a spring loaded parallelogram camera platform allows for positioning of camera up to 30" above subject to cover an original about 11x17" with a normal lens on a 35mm camera. For larger subject,rotate the parallelogram arm 180° to shoot below baseboard height. The all metal baseboard measures 17 1/2X183/4" and has a built-in adjustable borderless easel to hold down flat materials to 12X18". Its MP Copylight assembly moves up and down on the post and also allows horizontal positioning of the individual lights, thus providing complete illumination flexibility. The Copylight includes two socket-reflector assemblies for regular lamps (up to 250W ea.) and two sockets suitable for use with Spiralite Slavemates (for cool, consistent electronic flash, particularly useful when very short exposures are required). When you use electronic flash, you'll be using the socket-reflector assembly for composing and focusing lights. (SeeSlavemates page 17). For larger originals, you can add two more socketreflector assemblies or plain sockets so you can use a total of four regular or four electronic flash lights plus two focusing lights at one time — no other copystand under $600 provides such versatility. mplete Copystand, MP Outfit includes complete with two socket-reflector assemblies and nd two for above. Shipping Vt. 25 lbs. Order No. 520322
$9
9.95
ACCESSORIES FOR COPYING OUTFIT Set of two extra socket-reflector assemblies. Order No. 520330 . $20.90 Set of one Slavemate PC, one Slavemate. Order No. 203602 $48.90 Set of one Slavemate PC, three Slavemates, two sockets. Order No. 203637 $100.90 Set of Light Polarizers, for use with socket-reflector assemblies. Order No. 520349 2 for $33.80 see page 14 Order No. 520365 4 for $55.80 250W. Photoflood Bulbs, Set of 2 3200''K (ECA) $4.50 Set of 2 3400"K (BBA) $4.30
For small product photography, copying slides and much more! THE SPIRATONE
LIGHT TABLE COPY STAGE ('TCS')
for use with most any copystand or heavy duty lightstand The Spiratone 'TCS' attaches in seconds to most any vertical column (1 to 3" diameter) and provides a 13 3% x 163/4 " horizontal surface of 1/4 " thick, diffused, white acrylic sheet. Steel and aluminum frame construction assures rigidity and long life. Use the 'TCS' as a copy stage for transparencies (just bounce a light off a reflector placed at an angle under the stage) or as a convenient transilluminated support for small item photography — it's a great accessory for the commercial as well as for the advanced amateur photographer. In fact, the 'TCS' is a most versatile accessory and you'll find many other uses for it, too—inspecting and sorting slides for example or even retouching negatives._ Spiratone 'TCS' Order No. 520802
Shpg. Wt. 7 1/2 lbs. Buy 'TCS' at same time as any Spiratone Copystand (except Ultimate copystand) and pay only(Order No. 520810)
$5
1.95 $4295
BRIOWSMASTER SST
Ideal for product photography!
The fastest, simplest, perhaps the only way, to add the versatility of the view camera to your 35mm SLR Control Focus
Spiratone BellowsMaster SST "T" threaded to adapt to most any 35mm SLR by means of "T" adapters and to accept most any SLR lens by means of "T" flanges (no "T" flanges needed, if you wish to use Spiratone short macro lenses)
The swing or tilt of the front standard helps to obtain sharp focus when the principal plane of the subject and the film plane are not parallel.
1899Shpg.
Control Composition Writes expert Ellis Herwig in the professional publication Photomethods ... "(The) monorail Bellowsmaster SST is the neatest wedding of view camera capabilities to a 35mm SLR that I've ever seen . .." Mini View "Remarkab le feats with SLR known authorcamera" headlines well illustrated here photographer Lester Lefkowitz in his enwith normal lens thusiastic Modern Photography for macro use only report on the capabilities of the Spiratone Bellowsmaster SST. The basic purpose of a bellows unit is to increase the distance between the camera body and the lens — and all Spiratone bellows units perform this task with precision. The Spiratone BellowsMaster SST (for Swing, Shift, Tilt) is similar in design to the Spiratone Bellowscope, but adds to a bellows' basic functions what might best be referred to as 'view camera capability'. In fact, it makes possible with the 35mm SLR camera all the movements of a fine view camera —and then some. The BellowsMaster SST has a 61/2" long geared nylon track, calibrated in millimeters (to 150) plus a built-in focusing rail along which the complete camera-bellows-lens assembly can be moved within a 5 ,/," range. This provides much greater freedom in choosing lens-to-subject distance, and in composing and focusing.
Horizontal and vertical shift adjustments help to centralize the image on the film.
Control Perspective
Wt. 3 lbs.
The swing or tilt of the rear standard is used to correct the shape of the image or to control perspective. The sturdy metal standards, between which the bellows are mounted, are "T" threaded to allow for complete interchangeability (as well as mixing) of camera and lens fittings by means of "T" Adapters and "T" Flanges (see page 7). Both front and rear L-shaped standards provides these adjustments: a 60° SWING (horizontal rotation to either side) a 20mm SHIFT (horizontal movement to either side) a 60° TILT (up or down rotation) a 20mm RISE/FALL (vertical up or down movement) Focusing and composing are done by moving either the geared rear or the geared front standard, or both. If, for example, a small object is being photographed at great magnifications, moving the front standard to the very front and focusing with the rear standard will eliminate interference from a protruding bellows rail. Similarly, a ringlite or other accessory which does not clear the bellows rail can be used when focusing only with rear standard. Every adjustment in focusing, rotating, swinging and shifting has a positive lock; with red dots indicating 'normal' positions. With the BellowsMaster SST you can, of course, use any SLR
BELLOWSCOPE
THE .Ciikotoge
SAVE on BOTH BELLOWS and Short Mount MACRO LENS(ES)
10%
SEE LENSES ON PAGE 26
Buy any Spiratone bellows unit at same time as Macrotar, Macrotel, 75mm Flat Field Lens (any or all 3) and take 10% OFF COMBINED Bellows-Lens total.
WITH MOVABLE REAR STANDARD AND BUILT-IN GEARED FOCUSING RAIL The Spiratone BellowscopeS is a precision bellows unit for use with virtually any 35mm SLR, providing an adjustable extension of up to 6" between camera body and lens, movement of both front and rear standards, built-in focusing rail, and featuring a self-storing design which completely encloses the bellows for storage protection. The bellows is extended for focusing along a 1" wide track, equipped with a nylon rack and pinion, by means of a large knob attached to the front standard. The push-pull rear standard also moves for 'quick' focusing and composing, allowing the lens to be positioned at the extreme front end of the bellows for clearance with ringlights, and when photographing at great magnifications where the lens must, of necessity, be positioned very close to the subject. Another deluxe feature of the Bellowscope® is its built-in 'focusing rail' which makes possible minute adjustments of the camerabellows-lens assembly, forward and backward along the full length of the track, essential for critical focusing and balancing. An accessory shoe on the top of the front standard permits ideal placement of a strobe or strobe sensor for macro flash photography. The BellowscopeS can be used with your own lenses (depending on their suitability for macro work) or, with the special Spiratone short mount, flat field 35, 75 and 150mm macro lenses which are especially designed to provide optimum definition in close-up and macro work and which, since they use the bellows as their focusing mount, provide a much greater focusing range than regular camera lenses (see page 26). The Bellowscope® can be purchased equipped with male and female fittings for most 35mm SLR cameras; or in the special model 'T' which utilizes a 'T' adapter to fit your camera and a 'T' flange to accept your camera lens; thus, it offers you complete interchangeability and, also, lets you 'mix and match' different camera mount bodies with different mount lenses. A built-in series 7 fitting will reverse-mount your lens when equipped with an appropriate series 7 adapter, thus enabling you to take advantage of the improved definition of most normal lenses in the macro range, when used in an inverted position. For availability, prices, special discounts on lenses, 'T' camera adapter and lens flange fittings for Bellowscope ® , see page 7. For series 7 adapters. see page 44.
For prices, availability of "T" adapters, "T" flanges, see page 7.
lens suited for close-ups or macro work, but in order to take full advantage of the BellowsMaster SST's capabilities, a lens of adequate coverage (when the lens is not parallel with or centered in relation to the film plane, as in the various swing, shift or tilt positions) and fine definition at close range is recommended. Our 75mm and 150mm macro lenses (see page 26 for details— your selection will depend on your specific needs as to range) are particulary well suited for the BellowsMaster SST. The 150mm Macrotel offers two advantages: it covers a film format of 5x5" so that even with extreme swings and tilts, no loss of image is caused by the optical system; and, unlike your automatic lenses designed to be used directly on the camera body which will focus only in the macro range with the bellows, the 150mm Macrotel will focus from infinity down to almost 1:1. The Spiratone BellowsMaster SST allows you to rotate the camera from horizontal to vertical use and to invert your nonmacro lens for better definition by means of "T" Reverse Adapter — in other words, it's the most efficient, sophisticated bellows unit available.
-FREE '800' ORDER PHONE See page 24
pbotetiv,35 SLR Duplimat The
TM
the easiest-to-use slide duplicator ever made If you want to be able to quickly and effortlessly
make same size duplicates of your color slides, the Spiratone Duplimat is for you.
SPIRATONE BELLOWSCOPE*
model for Canon, Contax, Konica, Minolta, Nikon, Olympus, Pentax K (bayonet), Pentax Univ. screw-mount, Yashica
SPIRATONE BELLOWSCOPE,,,,
model 'T' with male and female 'T' threads (order 'T' camera adapter and lens flange separately see page 5 for listing)
$6950 Shpg.Wt.2 lbs.
$5950
Shpg.Wt.2
lbs.
Mount the Duplimat directly onto your camera (as easily as you mount your camera lens). Then insert slide to be duplicated into the Duplimat, connect flash cord to camera's PC terminal and, with ASA 25 or 64 slide film in your camera, press the shutter release button. That's all there is to it—a properly exposed, sharp duplicate is yours! With the Duplimat, you needn't worry about focus or composition (though you can still view the slide duplicated in your SLR finder): there are no scales (just set for ASA 25 or 64 speed film), nor is there need for any calculations or exposure readings—the Duplimat makes your 35 SLR camera into a virtually 'automatic duplicating outfit'. Complete Duplimat Outfit, ready to be attached to your 35 SLR camera, including $3995 flash, battery Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs. Name your camera make and model
For details on accessories, see
pikittegt
T7/ ADAPTERS
land FLANGES p age 7
PikOtftgt
pikt,tittn
DUPLICATING
35MM F/3.5
OUTFITS page 29
MACROTAR' page 26
PROFESSIONAL
pive ikat
pikattoe
150MM
75MM F/3,5
F/4.5
FLAT FIELD MACRO
page 26
MACROTEI.®
page 26
The,Cpikologe AUTO MINI-RING page 18 27
Duplicators, Film, Accessories; Copystand
Du pLivm
Here's the ideal tool for RE-PHOTOGRAPHY — it's far more than just a duplicator
The)blik,,og
The Spiratone Duplivar is not just a 'slide duplicator'—it is a most versatile system which, at a modest price, provides the 35mm SLR user with many exciting capabilities—all without the need of a darkroom. Its virtually foolproof design, coupled with the availability of different films and accessories, make the Spiratone Duplivar what is probably the Most useful system camera accessory an SLR owner can own.
4444,4 with Constant Focus, Variable Magnification and Multiple Light Sources
WITH IT, YOU CAN ... • enlarge (crop)—to simulate the effect of having used a telephoto or zoom lens—after having taken the picture. • 'blow up' an area as small as 9 1/4 x14mm to the size of the full 35mm slide. • produce artistic 'zoom during exposure' effects in the unhurried convenience of your own home. • correct poor color in the original, subtly change or emphasize colors as you wish, create special effects. • produce montages, multiple exposures and other incamera effects. • make b&w or color negatives from color slides, b&w slides from b&w or color negatives, and color slides from color negatives.
The other light source is the Spiratone Attached to the Dupli-Rail, it enables you to place a light bulb of your choice of wattage and color temperature (for lamp prices see below) in its holder for use as both a convenient previewing and exposing light, matching the color temperature of tungsten and duplicating films preferred by the serious photographer for critical duplicating requirements. In most instances, the camera can be used for TTL exposures with the Dupli-Lite. For critical duplicating requirements, we recommend Kodak Ektachrome 5071 Slide Duplicating Film, low contrast emulsion, processed in E-6 chemistry. For making color slides from masked (Kodacolor) negatives, we recommend Kodak 5072 Vericolor Slide Film, processed in C-41 chemistry. Both 5071 and 5072 are balanced for 3200°K and require CP filters (see below) for optimum fidelity. Tungsten color films, such as Ektachrome Tungsten can be used with 3200°K lamps; Kodachrome Type A with 3400°K lamps.
THE SPIRATONE DUPLIVAR • is a completely self-contained duplicator which fits directly into your 35mm SLR body. • maintains focus automatically throughout its entire magnification range. • is equipped with a coated, highly corrected lens of a fixed aperture, especially designed for duplicating. • provides a proper magnification safety factor at the 1:1 setting so you will not inadvertently include part of the original slide mount in a duplicate. • holds one or two cardboard mounted or one glass mounted slide(s) in the slideholder and up to 3 2x2" cardboard mounted filters in the filter compartment. The Duplivar's slide holder shifts and rotates about the optical axis allowing complete freedom in cropping.
FILMS
36 exp. rolls ea. $5.90 3 for $16.40100' bulk roll $33.95 5071 ea. $5.90 3 for $16.40 100' bulk roll $54.50 5072 (S02791
LAMPS
Use these lamps as light sources for exposing tungsten films as well as for greater convenience in composing when using the Dupli-Strobe. DAN 200W 3400°K (2 1/4" dia. reflector) BEP 300W 3400°K (3 1/2 " dia. reflector) DXH 375W 3200°K (4 3/4 " dia. reflector)
DUPLIVAR SPECIFICATIONS Magnification Range: (continuous) from 1:1 to 2.6:1 linear (6.76:1 area magnification); Smallest portion enlargable to full 35mm size: 9 1/4 x14mm; Focus: automatic throughout entire magnification range; Exposure: automatically set with Dupli-Strobe, TTL metering with tungsten illumination; Lens: 6 elements in 3 groups, macro flat field design, hard coated, set for optimum f/16 aperture; Dual Channel Stage: accepts any 2x2" mounted slides, or Duplistrip Attachment and up to 3 2x2" CP filters.
FILMS AND LIGHT SOURCES The Duplivar is used with two light sources which make it easy to obtain correct color balance as well as proper exposure. The Spiratone Dupli-Strobe'', which attached to the unit's Dupli-Rail, provides automatically correct exposures for all daylight balance color films from ASA 25 to ASA 100 at any and all magnifications. Uses 1 AAA battery. You can use any daylight color film, such as Kodachrome or Ektachrome, producing duplicates of good quality, with a slight build-up of contrast.
ASTEM
Shipping cost additional
SPIRATONE DUPLIVAR
l
Shpg. Wt. 6 lbs.
,112g
Duplistrip Tm Attachment, fits slide channel for making duplicates from uncut 35 ,,.otrWorod rolls. $9.95. Shpg. Tio6011. 22 pc. 2x2" mounted set of CP Filters in calibrated densities of Magenta, Cyan, Yellow, and a
UV. Shpg. Wt.
lb.
$13.00*
Extra T adapters to fit Duplivar to most any 35 SLR, from $7.95. See page 7 for full listing.
*price when bought at same time as Duplivar
Ultimate COPYSTAND
with electronic flash illumination
For 35mm and medium format cameras, even when equipped with long bellows extensions, our European-designed and-produced Ultimate Copystand provides the solidity and precision critical professional and industrial photographers demand (and advanced amateurs appreciate). Every component, from the 1" thick, 17 3/4 " x 17 3/4" square baseboard to the 3 1/2" wide, 11/2" thick 34" high, extruded column (scale for a 50mm lens) with rack and pinion drive camera platform, the cast base flange and adjustable camera holder (camera OPTIONAL base may be positioned from 6 to 9" away from vertical column), exudes ACCESSORIES: quality workmanship and painstaking attention to detail. "Quick-Way" Tripod Mount, for The pivoting light holders are attached to the base flange so that the light intensity and angle of illumination (of the subject) do not change as the instantly mounting/dismounting camera is raised or lowered on the pole. The holders can be adjusted in a camera from stand. 22" radius arc and provide a 16" long horizontal bar for placement of the See page 6 ... $7.95 lights. Pro "Quick-Way" Tripod Mount, Each light holder comes equipped with one heavy duty socket which can be for medium and large format adjusted along the horizontal bar. Extra sockets may be mounted to accom- cameras. See page 6 ....$15.98 modate additional lights for making the exposure or for focusing and com- Proxiscope, for optimum preciposing when using electronic flash. sion in positioning camera (laterTwo matched, slaved electronic AC flash units, one with a PC sync cord to ally) and (vertically) for exacting connect to your camera, are included in the basic outfit. Light reduction, UV focus adjustment. blocking and warming filters for each flash are also provided. See page 6 $59.95 Complete Spiratone Ultimate Copystand Outfit 95 Set of two socket-reflector aswith two lightholders, two sockets, two flash semblies for use of non-reflector units, six filters. Shpg. Wt. 25 lbs. bulbs (up to 250w max.) ..$20.90 Buy any of the optional accessories at right at Set of two Light Polarizers for yim;roam s tchoes tUltimate Co y tand and the use with socket-reflector assemSAVE! deduct 1e0 t oaccessories. blies. See page 14. Set of 2 .$33.80
28
TM SYSTLIA
The complete, self-containedc •rtera-mounting duplicating system including Denoffiktr, with se cam fitting (please name your make, model 35mm SLR), Dupli-Rail; Dupli-Stro e (incl. battery), Dupli-Lite (less lamp)
It's simply the best, that's why we call it the
[ ikrAtim
$7.25 $6.50 $7.50
PROJECTION
RE-PHOTOGRAPHIleSCREEN the answer to many copying, titling, cropping and special effect problems
Spiratone's 18x18x1 /16" Re-Photography Screen is a high-resolution, rear projection screen, ready for mounting by you in a frame of your choice. It provides uniform diffusion over a wide angle so that the image projected from a quality projector can be rephoto. graphed with optimum fidelity. By utilizing this system of Re-Photography, you can: (for correction ■ FILTER or special effect
■ DODGE OR BURN-IN
• Cm
your transparencies you TITLES virtually any extent you wish (straighten out ■ CORRECT DISTORTIONS converging lines Superimpositions, Vignettes, ■ CREATE MONTAGES and many other effects And thanks to its acrylic construction, the screen can be curved, making possible some most unusual effects, unattainable in a ny other way. 0 0995 S piratone Re-Photography Screen 41 Order No. 691518 Shpg. lb,. ‘.0
rive
FREE '800'e Se
ORDER p age
PHONE 24
FILMS FOR DUPLICATING
Any daylight film such as Kodachrome or Ektachrome, with daylight or electronic flash, or Ektachrome Tungsten, with a 3200'S lamp, produces very good quality duplicates, with a slight build-up of contrast. But for critical duplicating requirements we recommend the Kodak duplicating films. Two balanced for tungsten (3200°K), one balanced for flash; all require the use of CP filters for optimum color rendition. Basic filtration instructions are included with them.
Kodak EKTACHROME 5071 Slide Duplicating Film Ektachrome 5071 is the duplicating emulsion the professional and advanced worker needs for most accurate dupes. A specially made low contrast, high resolution tungsten emulsion for optimum control in reproducing the full color and tonality of the original. Commercial or home processing in E-6 Ektachrome chemistry. 36 exp. rolls ea. $5.90 • 3 for $16.40 • 100' bulk roll $33.95
Kodak EKTACHROME SE Duplicating Film SO - 366
Ektachrome S0-366 is similar to 5071 but with improved response tailored for exposure to electronic flash. NOTE: due to slow emulsion speed SO - 366 is not usable with ECLS or DUPLIVAR outfits. 36 exp. rolls ea. $5.90 • 3 for $16.40 • 100' bulk roll $33.95
For Slides from Color Negatives The only do-it-yourself way to make color slides from your masked (Kodacolor) color negatives — and it's as easy as duplicating or making color prints! A tungsten film, process it yourself (in C-41 chemistry, even at the same time as regular color negative film) or send it out as negative film for "developing only". Your color negatives can now be made into slides and included in your slide shows! 36 exp. rolls (S0279) ea. $5.90 • 3 for $16.40 • 100' bulk rdll($54.50 Shpg. Wts. 100' 4 lbs.; 36 exp. 3 rolls V2 lb. Kodak VERICOLOR 5072
DICHROIC LIGHT SOURCE FOR DUPLICATING AT A PRICE YOU CAN AFFORD
Everyone who has ever tried his hand at duplicating agrees —a dichroic light source is the only source of "duplicating illumination" which lets you correct and improve—with precision—the slides you are duplicating. That's why many photographers, generally unsuccessfully, try to 'adapt' their enlarger heads into dichroic illuminators, usually ending up with cumbersome contraptions hardly suitabb• for precision work.
he Nit** DICHRO IUPLI-LATE
TM
is a compact (4X91/2X5"), lightweight (under 4 lbs.) dichroic quartz illuminator with built-in stage for 2X2" mounted slides and 35mm strip film originals. The 12 volt 75 watt quartz lamp with built-in reflector is filtered by three calibrated (0 to 130cc) controls in Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan. A separate control allows for instant removal of filters from the light path (for a brighter image in focusing, corn. Order No. posing) and return of the filters to their preset position. The Dichro Dupli-Lite 520519 Spiratone is usable as a light source for bellows/ Dichro Dupli-Lite, lens copying set-ups and most selfComplete with contained tubular duplicators; and is transformer, lamP ideal for tungsten-balanced duplicating 95 films such as Ektachrome 5071 and negative printing films such as Vericolor Slide film 5072 (details above). Spiratone Dichro Dupli-Lire, illustrated without Shpg. t.10 lbs. transformer (which is included in price). See the complete Dichro Dupli-Lite outfits on opposite page.
$1
p ot*
Choose from the family of
il
Slide Duplicating Equipment
Whether you need a fine, straight duplicate of your slides, or you want the opportunity to "reshoot" and crop (simulating the effect of having used a lens of twice the focal length) or change the color subtly for better balance, or creatively add any desired filtration, there is a Spiratone Dupliscope that's complete, mounts directly to your camera, and is as easy to use as it was to shoot the original. Spiratone Dupliscopes are made in three different models, to suit most any slide duplicating requirement (some models are suited for macro work as well). All of them consist of the following basic components: a highly-corrected flat field lens, specially designed for duplicating, mounted in a precision barrel; a slide-holding stage providing vertical, horizontal and rotational adjustment, with a second track which will accommodate up to five 2x2" cardboard-mounted filters to enable you to correct or
m
VARIO-DUPLISCOPE
I TM
BELLO-DUPLISCOPE with ECLS OUTFIT $127.90
The most versatile of all the Dupliscopes. Instead of a focusing mount barrel as on the VarioDupliscope II and III, the Bello-Dupliscope employs a smooth, rigid, solid base, geared bellows extension with twin nylon guides. Front and rear fittings are 'T-threaded so that the bellows can be used with an infinite number of fittings. For example, with the appropriate l'-adapter and 'T'-flange, you can use a Nikon lens on a Canon, a Minolta lens on a Pentax and so on.
The Slide duplicator and macro system for the novice or advanced photographer. 1:1 (same size) duplicates or crops any portion of your slide up to 4x the original size. This means you can blow up any part of the original slide as small as 1/204" to the full 35mm size. Detach the front end (part of the barrel and the slide stage) and you have a macro system capable of blowing up tiny objects — 1/2x3/4" to lx1V2" — to the full 35mm format. Ideal for photographing coins, jewelry, other small objects.
$57.95
The optical component of the Bello-Dupliscope is mounted in a short barrel and, thanks to the use of a bellows instead of a metal tubular focusing mount, provides up to 5X area magnification. As on the Vario-Dupliscope III, the Bello-Dupliscope's front end is detachable for the use of the system for macro work. The Bello-Dupliscope thus enables you to perform the same tasks as with the Variobut provides somewhat more magnification and, additionally, includes a bellows unit you Dupliscope MI use independently of the duplicating system. The approximate extension range of the bellows with 'T' fittings is from 40mm to 80mm.
VARIO-DUPLISCOPE II TM with ECLS OUTFIT $75.90
S PI 10.
1 5 9
BELLO-DUPLISCOPE"$109.95
VARIO-DUPLISCOPE !W $73.95
4c,,/
nbeudd get $5
emphasize colors in duplicating; a hinged diffusion plate that assures even illumination and, in the swing-away position, maximum brightness in focusing and composition; and an interchangeable camera fitting (one supplied with each Dupliscope; extra ones available so you can use the same Dupliscope on different SLR's). And to make duplicating simpler still, we offer our famous "ECLS" Exposure Calibrated Light System. With it, you position the light at the proper distance for automatic correct exposure with all popular daylight-type color films, even for different magnifications— no need for any calculations! Spiratone Dupliscopes don't limit you to duplicating slides—with all of them, you can also make negatives from positives, positives from negatives and you can also crop; and with the Vario-Dupliscope Ill and the BelloDupliscope, you can even do macro photography.
VARIO-DUPLISCOPE III TM with ECLS OUTFIT $91.90
nto
fr
TM
Dupliscopes du p licators
Identical to the model HI, but without macro feature. An excellent duplicator with variable magnification capability.
Shipping Weights for Dupliscope: Any Dupliscope 2 lbs., Dupliscope with ECLS 3 168.
THE EXPOSURE CALIBRATED LIGHT SYSTEM (ECLS) the virtually foolproof light system for all Dupliscopes With the constant, cool, daylight-balanced flash and the Exposure Calibration Scale, you get perfect repeatable exposures every time. Simply connect the flash to your camera with the coiled extension cord provided, place the light on the Exposure Calibration Scale at the point indicated for the ASA speed of your
For most any 35 SLR Name your camera make, model
Optional Dupliscope Accessories lUPLISTRIP ATTACHMENT, ;fides directly into slide channel, enables you to duplicate from 35mm strips I nd uncwith ut rolls; pur;cope hased Dupl when is
SAVE ON 2x2"
daylight color film and magnification used—and shoot, assured your exposure will be perfect. Outfit includes the three penlite powered electronic flash (batteries not included), a 5' coiled extension cord and the Spiratone Exposure Calibration Scale (of course you can also use the strobe for normal flash use on your camera, or it can be "slaved" for a multipleflash set-up).
$9.95 CP FILTER SETS
'OUCH, for Variolupliscope II, Ill
$3.98
ECLS System, includes electronic flash, 5' 'C. C. coiled ext. cord and Exposure CalibreScale; when purchased separately
$21.95
Add filtration control with 2X2" mounted Magenta, Cyan and Yellow filters in graduated densities. Six-piece BASIC CP Set (yellow, magenta) reg. $6.95 — buy WITH duplicator Complete 22-piece set, includes different densities in Magenta,, Cyan, Yellow, plus a UV, reg. 19.95 — buy
$3 $13
The Exposure Calibrated Light System
The piktitoge Duplicating and Macro
the standard reference work
Ph otography System Here's a component system that offers the Convenience of
Versatility of
Capability of
DICHROIC FILTRATION COLOR CONTROL VARIABLE/MAGNIFICATION/CROPPING continuous precision in Magenta, Cyan, Yellow, from 0 to 130cc, with white light control switch
4 pc. outfit shown with camera (not included)
continuously variable from full size 1:1 (35mm format) to over 2X linear magnification (enlarge an area less than 1/2 x 3/4" to full frame 1 x 11/2")
,CPUtteeDICHRO DUPLI-LITE' s pikotoxe, BELLOWSCOPE ® a precision made nylon rack and a compact (4x91/2x5") dichroic illuminapinion drive bellows with extentor with built-in stage for 2x2" mounted sion up to 6". Advanced features slides and 35mm film strip originals. 12 include independent movement of volt, 75 watt quartz light with built-in both front and reflector is filtered by rear standards, three 0 to 130cc call, built-in focusing brated controls in Magenta, Cyan and Yelrail for critical adjustment of en. low; lets you fine tune tire bellows/ your color reproduc; rrxx.;.. camera system, Lion. A separate conself storing detrol removes the id- **-.„..... r-; sign for compact ters from the light and safe storage, path for maximum image brightness in auxiliary accesfocusing and composing, returning the sort' shoe on set filtration for the exposure. Shpg. we. 12 the. $189.95 front standard. With male and female fitting for See complete description most any 35 SLR. e on opposite page
Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. 4
Spiratone Dichro OupliLite, illustrated without transformer (which is included in pricel
.
3 PIECE SPIRATONE DICHROIC / DUPLICATING/MACRO PHOTOGRAPHY OUTFIT includes Spiratone lichen Dupli-Life, 75mm FP lens, Bellowscope for most any .35mm SLR camera (name your camera, make, model). Shpg. Wt. 14 lbs.
$2
sqpikatoge75mm FLAT FIELD LENS
a high resolution lens specifipally designed for duplicating, copying and macro work in conjunction with the Bellowscope; to yield magnifications up to 2.1:1 to reductions of 1:4. Shpg.
MULTI-USE COMPONENTS thanks to the inclusion of high quality macro and duplicating elements
Spy
COPYSTAND
(optional, included in the 4 piece System Outfit) with spring-loaded parallelogram copy arm for convenient counter-balanced camera positioning up to 30" above copy; includes 16x19" baseboard. A well made, easy to operate basic copystand for duplicating, copying and close-up work.
Shpg. Wt.
14 lbs.
$45.95 —
16 a . $28.95 ',..:,
69
4 PIECE OUTFIT gigt sdx,zirat'lft,. $ 95
PLUS the Spiratone Copy. Stand. Shpy.lizt. 28 lbs .
95
Copying and Duplicating in Black-andWhite and Color Whatever phase of duplicating or copying you may be interested in — and even if you are an experienced pro — you'll find this new work to be encyclopedic in its coverage of the subject. Not only does it cover lighting, close-up accessories, duplicating equipment, filters, how to choose films and all the related subjects you expect to find in such a book, it also tells (and shows with superb illustrations, literally hundreds of them) how to copy documents, what to do about old faded pictures or shiny daguerreotypes, when to worry about copyright laws, how to make title slides and how to expose and process films to obtain the best results. If you are just getting into copying and duplicating, you'll find information on basic equipment; if you want to know what the latest professional equipment will do for you, this book covers that, too. We recommend this lavishly illustrated, finely printed 8 1/2x11", 182 p. book for everyone who has occassion to do any kind of copying or duplicating — it will quickly pay for itself in saved time and materials.
Shpg. Wt. 1 lb.
$ 24.95 29
Mame ProuraMaster
the h
Now you can add all the excitement and impact of professional staging techniques to your slide shows; with just two Carousel (or Ektagraphic) projectors, a stereo or 2-track tape recorder (such as the Spiratone Synch rocorder II, see page 32) and the Spiratone Multimage PrograMaster you can perform the following functions:
Many of us work hard to produce a 'creative' photograph, a photograph which is not just technically good, but which reflects our ability to present a subject in a meaningful manner. But when it comes to projecting these slides, we almost take it for granted that the simplest, straight. forward way is the only way — and let it go at that. Yet, we have all seen and often envied the dazzle and excitement of effective showmanship in a professionally prepared slide presentation. One of the reasons most of us don't even try to compete with the pros is because we envision vast amounts of costly equipment which is complicated to use — so we accept the fact that our own slide shows have to be dry and dreary, with the eyestraining "image on, image off" projection cycle — not too different from the way our ancestors projected lantern slides for their friends and children. But they needn't be! Your existing images, presented properly, can have infinitely more impact. Thanks to Spiratone's introduction of a variety of 'creative projection control' devices, you can now make a slide show as 'professional', as entertaining, as exciting as those you have seen at fairs, museums, lectures and sales presentations. Basically, these control devices allow you to dissolve or fade one slide into the other, to flash titles over slides, to change slides rapidly or slowly to suit the mood, to apply synchronized sound — music, your discussion of the subject matter, a sales talk — and to add a new dimension of creativity to ycur photographs. Indeed, you'll find yourself taking photographs with slide presentations in mind, you'll be looking for new angles, for different perspectives of your subjects. You'll find a whole new way of seeing, of being able to tell the whole story with a series of related images and not to try to get everything in one shot, which so often leads to failure and disappointment. Slide dissolves provide a smooth transition, lending a sense of continuity to your photographs: you need not ever again have to say: "And that's another angle of the statue", when one image gradually dissolves into the other instead of being "chopped" by the slide advance. Since every control device has special features, in addition to its basic controls, your selection of the particular device you want depends on what type of shows you wish to put together. We know, of course, that putting together 'professional' slide shows is a new experience for most of our customers and will be glad to discuss your needs with you — and, of course, answer any of your questions to help you decide.
IMAGES, IMAGES, IMAGES
Q
The Book of Programmed Multi-Image Production If you're new to the art of creative slide projection, or even if you're an old hand looking for ideas and state-ofthe-art techniques, we heartily recommend the new 3rd edition of the Kodak book: IMAGES, IMAGES, IMAGES — the Book of Programmed Multi-Image Production. Expanded, updated (including information on computer genci erated graphics) — a lavishly illustrated 260 page encyclopedia of the tools and techniques used for slide presentations. Shpg. Wt. 1 lb.
$24 .95
30
0 0 0 Q Q 0 0
• Dissolve at any of five digitally timed dissolve rates: Cut, 1 sec, 2 sec, 4 sec, 8 sec. You can also change the rate of dissolve at any point during a dissolve. • Hold any dissolve in progress at any point. • Freeze either projector lamp in the ON position while performing a fade with the other. • Stand-by extinguishes both projector lamps. Actuation of any dissolve command from Stand-by fades in an image from a black screen without the use of blank slides. • Homing command returns both projector's trays to the start position by the shortest route, either forward or reverse. Tray size of 80 or 140 is switch selectable. • Reverse Dissolve to change the direction of a dissolve in progress allows for animation and rippling effects. • Slide Advance of the dark projector may be performed to skip slides in sequence or to superimpose titles. • Automatic Slide Advance of the dark projector, after a dissolve is completed, may also be overridden. • Timer function is available for unattended operation without tape control signals. Choose any of the five dissolve rates and select any of the five as delay between dissolves (for a total of 25 combinations). • Remote socket for the Carousel hand control allows the use of a 2 sec. dissolve, projector reverse, and electronic homing commands. • Tape programming: all the above functions (except Timer) are tape programmable for accurate reproduction. Automatic volume control on playback guarantees flawless recreation of your program.
Spiratone Multimage PrograMaster
110. 120VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 watts, 6" wide, 81/2" deep, 21/2" high, wt. 3 lbs. Indeed, the Spiratone Multimage PrograMaster is one of the most advanced projection control devices available, rivaling in quality and features elaborate professional equipment costing many times the PrograMaster's modest price. If you have the need for — or the desire — to produce truly creative slide presentations with the impact of those you have admired at trade-shows, in lecture halls and at AV centers, you will find that the PrograMaster is the tool that will make this possible with ease, with elegance, and with much less effort than you would expect.
Remote Controller for the Spiratone Multimage PrograMaster and Memory PrograMaster
Add a new dimension of flexibility to your PrograMaster dissolve slide presentations. The Micro Remote not only puts all of the PrograMaster keyboard functions at your fingertips in a hand-holdable package the size of a pocket calculator, but also features a "Reverse Cue" button which allows you to back up the show to a previous slide and yet retain the slide-toslide synchronization. In addition, the Micro Remote features an input lack for the sync track of a taped presentation, allowing you to alternate between live and prerecorded program sections. Its 25 foot cable may be extended to 100 feet using standard Kodak remote control extension cables. And since the Micro Remote is powered from the PrograMaster dissolve, it requires no separate AC connection. Order No. 675016 Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs. Kodak 25 foot remote extension cable Order No. 675024 .... $14.95
A digital fail-safe redundancy circuit repeats each cue signal 8 times within 65 milliseconds to ensure that tape flaws or splices do not affect the program. When making tape duplicates with the PrograMaster the cue regeneration circuits will provide "master tape" quality signals on the copies. All of this is made possible by a microcomputer (an integrated circuit no larger than your thumb) which monitors and controls every command and resulting operation. Internal monitoring circuits check for each projector's completion of forward and reverse cycles. If a projector fails to cycle (let's say somebody accidentally pulled the plug), the failure to cycle is actually remembered by the computer and the stored commands are executed as soon as cycle capability is restored, allowing the projector to catch up with the rest of the show. For information on Carousel Projectors, See page 33
$195
Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
SAVE OFF LOW P
a truly powerful production tool for professional slide presentations at a most unprofessional price,the
t
= 1! MEMORY l 1.
El !
a
— , _—ii _ fl
II
illfile rcr/
TM —
Order No. $5 • SPLIT SECOND ANIMATION EFFECTS CAN BE 675040 AUTOMATICALLY REPEATED • LED DISPLAY FOR EASY PREVIEWING, EDITING OF PROGRAMS • PROGRAMMABLE FOR UP TO 10 CUES PER SECOND • EXPANDABLE FOR USE WITH UP TO 6 PROJECTORS Multi-image programmers usually were one of two types, real-time programmers or memory programmers. If you've ever used a real-time programmer to synchronize a slide show to tape, you are familiar with the difficulty of pushing the command buttons, in the right sequence and with precision timing, while the tape recorder ran. With memory programmers, the entire cue repertoire would first be stored in the programmer's memory allowing for leisurely editing and fine tuning. But memory programmers were apt to cost the proverbial arm and leg. Now, a hybrid approach to the solution of the problem has enabled us to introduce the Spiratone Multimage Memory PrograMaster, a stateof-the-art two-projector dissolve unit with programming capability for up to six projectors and internal 127 cue program memory. An additional standard PrograMaster is needed for each 2-projector expansion beyond the built-in 2-projector dissolve control. The SMMP combines the ease of operation of a real time dissolve with the sophisticated sequencing capabilities of a memory programmer. For ambitiously complex presentations, you may mix real time programming (for the leisurely portions of your show) with the computerized Simple Memory Assisted Real-Time (SMART) programming capabilities of the Memory PrograMaster. A six digit alphanumeric LED display guides you through the simple steps in programming five different rates of dissolve (cut, 1, 2, 4, 8 sec.), hold and freeze commands, standby and electronic homing, ripple dissolves, animation and flashing.
ir
49
"'"'''''".•.,..,-.,...,,,,, L--/
ShPg . Wt. lbs.
OUR
RICES
ON
SYNCHROCORDER and "SSPC" 71 sflasug yneEtiimrH:EcRaosurndpreor t: mage Prog raMaster or Men1OU PrograMaster
AND PAY ONLY S174.95 for
1 the
S449.00 for the "SSPC"
By using the Autostep control, the programming of complex sequences lat a rate of 10 cues per second) becomes a snap. Programmable delays, in 1/10 second increments, make split-second timing a reality. Loop control allows for repeating of a sequence, or animation, up to 63 times without using any extra cue memory. Insert and delete cue functions allow for changing and editing of the program before committing it onto tape. A save command and an automatic sequencing control will return the slide trays to the start position (user definable) of a sequence and to the correct projector lamp status for both preview and taping, allowing for rehearsal and review without going back to the beginning of the show. And for actual taping, only the CUE button need be pressed to call up each command (or linked series of commands) as programmed in the memory; the correct command, screen area address, autostep and loop status will then be encoded onto a single sync track on your recorder with a fail safe digital signal that is repeated eight times for each cue. On playback, the auto level control insures flawless recreation of the program. SPECIFICATIONS: All of the projector control features of the standard Spiratone Multimage PrograMaster (see above) PLUS • Area 1, 2, or 3 screen selectable for both encoding and playback • 2-projector dissolve and 6-projector programming expansion modes • 6 digit alphanumeric readout showing cue number 11 . 1271 and command • Timer delay .1 to 6.2 sec. programmable in 1/10 sec. steps • 3 Auxiliary control outlets, 2 momentary contacts, one on/off toggle function — use for special effects, control motion picture projector (with optional interface) • Print command (memory dump) to save programs on tape permits expanding of memory capacity beyond 127 cues • Loop repetitions programmable up to 63 times or open ended until manually terminated • Autostep cue linking @ 1/10 sec. intervals • 40 page Operations Handbook and Technical Manual Dimensions: 2 1/2 x 81/2 x 10" — Weight: 41/2 lbs. Power: 115/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 watts
i Toe 4
i mayl i
Speakers f Mike mixing! t Metal tape Vilal F d th 5 IN Aft 114S a er! Uninterrupted capability! 2I vitt wi 4 f Stereo Sound! Output eat".
Ster eo
many times have you been frustrated in your efforts to produce a truly 'professional' slide show by the limitations of audio equipment that was not designed with AV requirements in mind? How often have you sorely felt the lack of that 'black box' that would have added the right accent to your soundtrack? Have you ever wanted to make a 'safe' copy of that all-important
Tape tallying! A v48Suenpt iptial 4 -uto program Sync Slidee Sync! al , for rat Cassette Drives!
locale!
I
synched tape and belatedly realized that you would need two specialized AV recorders to do it? How many times have you yearned for the added dimension of STEREO sound for your dissolve presentations but were thwarted by the single audio track capabilities of the sync recorders available until now? All that is now history — with the advent of a new age in electronic technology, with the State-Of-The-Art "SSPC" — the
• from
the perfect companion to the Multimage PrograMaster, Memory PrograMaster, Multimage Digital Dissolve/Programmer, other dissolve units with tape sync capability. Now, in a single compact, (21x13x6") affordable, easy-to-use package, you have all the audio capabilities which will satisfy your requirements for even your most sophisticated AV presentations: • Stereo Sound with Automatic Program Locate Device (APLD) which allows you to automatically skip forward and reverse to find and play any desired tape segment. • Fully independent access to a THIRD (SYNC) TRACK to play, record, directly dub as well as externally regenerate the sync signal. • Dual Cassette drives gape 1 playback only; tape 2 playback and record) allow for continuous play, editing, and DUPLICATION of stereo tapes on Metal, Chrome, as well as normal tape formulations. • A full range of controls includes: separate volume, balance, tone (bass and treble), pause, automatic or manual record level control, variable sound monitoring, external microphone mixing (with or without variable echo), record edit, tape fader control, cue and review on both cassette drives. • Two color LED sound level meters also function as sync track signal locating indicators. • Two built-in electret microphones and 2-way front mounted stereo speaker systems 12-6 1/2 " woofers and 2-2" tweeters) with 5 watts RMS power output per channel (10W RMS total). • Automatic end of tape shut-off (Full Auto Stop), in any mode. Spiratone's AV Sound Order No. 674001 • Inputs include: microphone, mixing mic., audio line, sync line, phono t. 25 lbs. Studio/Production Center (magnetic), remote pause. • Outputs include: external speakers, audio line, sync line, headphone Buy "SSPC" at same time as Memory Progra(stereo), and monitor headphone. Master, Multimage PrograMaster or Multiple While the SSPC was designed with specific AV applications in mind Digital Dissolve/Programmer and pay only (such as multi-media production and presentation in business, education, institutional applications), it is a natural production tool in "Suitcase" styled ABS Case with high density foam-fitted numerous other 'creative' sound applications such as are required compartment for SSPC. Removable lid allows operation in radio stations, home recording studios, and by lecturers and without removing unit from case and makes musicians who may need to duplicate tapes as well as produce them SSPC into in a Suitcase" with unlimited flexibility and a control."Studio 120v 60 Hz, permanently attached $109.95 3 wire grounding power cord. Shpg. Wt. 7 lbs
$
499 Shpg. W
SAVE $50
$449
SUMMARY OF SLIDE PROJECTION CONTROL DEVICES CAPABILITIES
SINGLE PROJECTOR CONTROL
TWO PROJECTOR DISSOLVES Use for manual control or with tape unit for sound sync MULTIMAGE PROGRAMASTER TM : digital dissolve control with keyboard input is fully programmable and compatible with multi-screen area programming by the Memory PrograMaster. MEMORY PROGRAMASTER TM : editing digital dissolve control with 127 cue memory and digital display with prompting. Expandable to 6 projector, 3 screen area shows. MULTIMAGE DIGITAL DISSOLVE/PROGRAMMER: digital dissolve with keyboard input for fully programmable two projector dissolve presentations.
TAPE SYNC UNITS SYNCHROCORDERLf IL sound synchronized slide advance for one or two Carousel or Ektagraphic projectors, or programmed separate sync track recording for preceding two projector dissolves.
SOUND STUDIO/PRODUCTION CENTER SSPC: the ultimate audio tool for all dissolve units and programmers. Stereo sound, tape duplication, and separate sync track make the SSPC the ideal choice for the audio visual specialist.
COMBINATION DISSOLVE/TAPE SYNC UNITS
Use with two projectors for complete audio visual dissolve presentations SIGHT 'N SOUND RECORDER/DISSOLVE: tape drive and programmable dissolve in a compact two piece package. Also provides for sound sync slide advance for one or two projectors. PRO/SHOW DIRECTOR TM : tape transport and built-in dissolve in a heavy duty configuration suitable for the most demanding conditions. Sound sync slide advance for one or two projectors, programmable tape stop function and lOW RMS two way speaker sound system
from your Computer or TV Screen
1114
Polaroid Instant 35 Color Slide Outfit
including Polaroid Auto Processor, Auto-Quick Mounter, 50 Quick Mounts, a 12 exposure roll of Polachrome slide film and 6 1/2 x 8 3/4 " Magna-Frame magnifier—everything you need for instant color slide photography. See $94.95 pg. 33 for description. Shpg. Wt. 6 lbs.
Just place the ScreenshooterrM against the screen (up to 13" diagonal)and press the camera release—it's as easy as that! Exposure, framing, and focus are automatically set and the Polaroid print is ejected from the camera immediately following exposure. The Screenshooter is a complete system containing everything you need to make instant color prints from the computer or video screen. The outfit includes a modified Polaroid 600 camera, the CRT hood, adapter and close-up lens; and a camera bracket for 35mm SLR cameras. To produce 2x2" color slides, mount your 35mm SLR on the camera bracket (provided) and attach the CRT hood—no focusing, no framing— and your camera's TTL system will provide accurate exposure automatically. And by using Polachrome Slide Film, you can produce instant slides in minutes; the film is processed in the portable Auto Processor. Complete Screenshooter system including Polaroid cam era, hood, adapter, close-up lens and 35 SLR bracket. Shpg. W t. lbs. $175 Screenshooter System and Polaroid Instant 35 Color Slide Outfit and pay for both only
BUY BOTH
$249
Prices on other Polaroid 35mm films see page 88.
PRO/SHOW DIRECTOR
extended service recorder/dissolve/synchronizer In the Pro/Show Director, the manufacturer has successfully combined in one compact (14 1/4 x 6 1/2 x 11"), portable (16 lbs.) package all the components needed (for sound-synchronized dissolve shows) to faithfully perform its multitude of tasks, even — under the most demanding conditions. Backed by a heavy duty audio cassette recorder (of proven performance over the years as the Spiratone Synchrocorder), the Pro/Show Director also features a 10 watts RMS PA amplifier with separate high fidelity woofer and tweeter and a separate track projector synchronization system with both slide/sync and dual function, quasi-programmable dissolve capability.
OUTSTANDING FEATURES:
• Industry Standard Separate Track Sync System to produce and play back one or two projector slide/sync shows (1000Hz and 150Hz) • 150Hz Program Stop Capability with restart switch and jack for remote restart • 1000Hz Two-Projector Dissolve System to record and playback standard two projector dissolve shows with two separate rates of dissolve. 1000Hz cues recorded on the tape produce the first rate and 150Hz cues produce the second. The first rate (which is selectable by the user at the time of presentation) can be anywhere from a quick cut to an 8-second slow dissolve; and the second rate is fixed as a cut. A switch is also provided to offer the user 150Hz program stop (in place of the second rate of dissolve). Additionally it is very easy to convert basic one-projector slide/sync shows to exciting multi-image presentations, usually with no re-programming being required! • One-Projector Fade-In/Out Capability • Foolproof Sync Track Record Interlock prevents accidental erasure of separate track sync signals • Direct Access to Separate Sync Track to interface with virtually all of the more advanced slide control devices currently available • 10 Watt RMS (18 Watts Peak) Solid State Amplifier is matched with a two-loudspeaker sound system. This highly efficient speaker system employs a separate woofer and tweeter for better clarity and reproduction of both voice and music. • Full Auto Stop at tape end in all modes, including fast forward and rewind • All Metal Tape Transport with locking fast forward and rewind, plus cue and review and mechanical pause controls • Built-in Electret Condenser Microphone plus inputs for an external microphone and line (auxiliary) source • Line (auxiliary) Output plus a Speaker/Headphone Output are provided • PA (Public Address) System, Record Monitor, Switchable ALC (Automatic Record Level Control) and a VU Meter are all built-in. • Wood Carrying Case Enclosure covered in durable vinyl with metal corners, sturdy carry handle and detachable lid provides the user with a secure and very portable package • Additional Features: tone and volume controls; "Braille" marks on function keys; NAVA "2X" standard 3-digit tape counter; AC operation (120V, 50/60Hz), plus an external 12 Volt DC input (for making field recordings and audio playback); Commercial UL and CSA approved
Just add two Kodak Carousel or Ektagraphic projectors (with full remote accessory outlets and using 500W [maximum] lamps) and you're ready to dazzle your audience with the professional showmanship of dissolve effects accompanied by your recorded narration with or without music and sound effects.
$
PRO/SHOW DIRECTOR Order Ho. 687006 Shpg. Wt. 18 lbs.299
Choose the Slide Projection Control Device best suited to your needs — each unit (or combination of units) has been care fully selected by us for value, quality and maximum utility in its class. Be sure to read the detailed descriptions for each unit—we've tried to provide as much information as possible to make your task of choosing the right equipment easy.
op. Instant Color Slides or Color Prints 1
The
B
PORTABLE AV SOUND STUDIO/ PRODUCTION CENTER ("SSPC")
AUTO-FADE: Single projector fade-in, fade-out control with automatic slide advance—use with Synchrocorder II for sound sync. AUTO-FADE 2: Same as above but with built-in timer to activate fades.
from SPIRATONE
Pikttfrin
.BINOCULARS
A GREAT GIFT for yourself, a relative or friend Even when you compare our binoculars with the 'big brand' binoculars which cost several times as much, you'll marvel at the bright, clear, crisp image, the absence of color fringing, the sharpness across the entire field of view. You'll like the smooth center focusing, the easy individual eye-piece adjustment, the wide 8.2° field covering 431' at 1000 yards, and the neat way the elegantly finished 8 oz. contour shape fits into your hand. Use while traveling, to watch your favorite sport, in the theater—since the Spiratone binoculars are only about 4" across and 1 1/2 " igh, you'll always carry them along in their handy c We wouldn ing these binoculars to our photography orient ers if didn't em utstandin a an unbe value at otta ot, special pH
t
Order No. 519103
Shpg. Wt. 1 lb.
31
A-V Programmers, Recorders 0
If you've always wanted to have the professionalism of a dissolve presentation for your slide shows, but were put off by the complexity of the different components required, then our most versatile.
5101711 Sound'
111550111 RECORDER COMBO is for you.
'349"
LIMITED TIME OFFER Simplicity itself to operate, the Sight 'N Sound Recorder/ Dissolve Combo consists of an audio-visual cassette recorder with separate sync track, and a two projector dissolve controller, all a light-weight two piece package. Just add two Kodak Carousel or Ektagraphic projectors Order No. ail 684023 (with full remote accessory outlets and using 300W [maxiShpg. Wt. mum] quartz lamps) and you're ready to dazzle your audi10 lbs. ence with the professional showmanship of dissolve effects accompanied by your recorded narration with or without music and sound effects. Use the convenient remote control dissolve knob (on a 5 ft. cord) to dissolve, fade in, fade out between the two projectors. The infinitely variable dissolve rate allows you The Sight 'N Sound to have a .3 second hard cut or a dissolve as long as you Recorder/Dissolve Combo our mos fabulous value in projection control devices. wish — you can even stop in mid-dissolve, change rate of dissolve, animate or sway back and forth — the tape play• RECORD, PLAY, STOP—extra • TONE and VOLUME controls. back will re-create every move exactly as you performed large control keys with lock- • Switchable ALC (Automatic ing FAST FORWARD and REit while recording. After the visual effect is completed and Level Control) for recording. WIND and also CUE and REthe 'off' projector is completely dark, the slide will be • P.A. (public address) capeVIEW capabilities. automatically advanced. bility. • PAUSE control and level Other visual effects available allow you to superimpose • Sync track IN/OUT jack. meter. images for titling effects and flash one image over another • Records and plays back sep• 2X ratio NAVA standard 3 (once or repeatedly). To make it even easier for you to prearate track 1000Hz signal digit tape counter. pare your slide/sound programs, the Sight 'N Sound tapes, also plays back 50Hz • 1/4" jack for headphones or (superimposed signal) tapes for Recorder/Dissolve Combo allows you to record the soundexternal speaker. single projector advance. track and the separate signal track independently of each Built-in microphone and jack • •• Remote dissolve control on other, so you can concentrate your efforts on only one for external microphone. 5' cord. task at a time. This also enables you to erase or change the • AUXILIARY (LINE) input jack. • 5 ft. projector connecting signal track at any time. cords. Operates on 115AV AC 50/60 Hz and is supplied with grounded 13 prong) AC cord and all necessary interconnecting cords.
At last! an a ffordable, state-of-the-art, digital dissolve/ programmer for two projector (Carousel or Ektaowdaozfzliemyaoguers awuidthienorcewswhitohu at spyrnocfes stuangdeda,ncdonntainr ruaotitt:n(n( o ssec areneyn2btlraacekkdo esupflt o h rsoi on ni zaeldlyso ) esleindeslsih \ g oruatpbbei tcw
S
stereo tape recorder or Spiratone Synchrocorder II or SSPC).
•
Multimage®Digital Dissolve/Programmer The The Multimage Digital Dissolve/Programmer is simplicity itself to operate. Eleven
command pushbuttons logically arranged on the sloping front panel, put all of the Multimage Digital Dissolve/Programmer's powerful microprocessor-controlled functions at your fingertips. Five status LEDs complement the control array so that you need never wonder as to the current command readiness. Use the Multimage Digital Dissolve/ Programmer manually for live slide presentations or record the effects on tape for hands-off, unattended, sound synchronized slide shows. verse cycle command—useful in editing Commands available include: and in live presentations. • DISSOLVE at any of five digitally timed dissolve rates: Cut, 1 sec, 2 sec, 4 sec, 8 sec. Rates may be changed in mid• TAPE programming of all of the above functions will redissolve and direction of dissolve may also be reversed. create all commands on playback, exactly as they were • Automatic SLIDE ADVANCE of the darkened projector folperformed in recording. lowing a dissolve, may also be cancelled by the INHIBIT • Cue regeneration provides "first generation" signal tracks command. on duplicate program tapes. Modern microprocessor tech• SLIDE ADVANCE of the dark projector may be commanded nology makes possible all of the powerful effects described to skip slides. Great for modifying shows without having above, plus many more—such as flips, progressive disto reset all the slides in the trays. closures, flashes, dissolve reverses, ripples (when more than one command is called up in sequence)—all in a • FREEZE command stops a dissolve in progress and permits compact and affordable package. a variety of effects. • Individual HOLD commands lock the respective projector's If you're envied slick professional slide presentations you're status until cancelled. Perfect for a series of superimposed seen, here's your chance to emulate them with your own audiotitles over a background slide. Also allows for fading to and visual shows, made possible by and produced with the Spiratone from black without wasting a tray slot on a blackout slide. Multimage Digital Dissolve Programmer-42 page Operations • SWAP command changes the "active" status of both pro- Manual provides detailed, yet easy-to-follow instructions that take you from "getting started" to "advanced programming in a stepjectors and is useful in performing advanced effects. by-step process". • HOME command extinguishes both projector lamps and SPECIFICATIONS returns both slide trays to their starting positions. Invalu110-125 VAC 60 Hz, 10 watts, 6' grounded line cord 9V2 x able' in editing a show for "instant replay" or slide se- 6 3/4 x 3 t/2 ", 4 lbs. quences. Control: two 600w projection lamps via built in 40" cables • TIMER function provides automatic dissolves (presettable 3 grounded convenience outlets, 1500w total capacity at any of the five available dissolve rates) at four selectable Tape recorder interface: high impedance, line level For all Kodak Ektagraphic and Carousel projectors with full delays (1 sec, 2 sec, 4 sec, 8 sec) for unattended operation without taped signals. remote accessory outlets • REMOTE socket for your Kodak remote hand control pro- 42 page Operations Manual included vides a one second forward dissolve command and a reShpg. Wt. 6 lbs. Order No. 676500
$269.00
Now—you can add to your SINGLE projector shows, that 'professional' fade-in-and-out effect-
v foirthurtr$100 AUTO-FADE
Order No. 672009 Imagine . . . instead of those annoying, unpleasant, jarring, eyeShpg. Wt. 2 lbs. tiring, abrupt slide changes, you can let one slide smoothly fade out, the next one gently fade in—no sharp transition of light to dark and back, but a smooth *flow of images with an automatic slide advance in between fades. It's done with your single 300 watt Carousel projector and our new Auto-Fade projector control. Auto-Fade a compact (1%"x41/4"x3,4"), light (7 oz.), solid state device, plugs right into your Carousel or Ektagraphic projector, needs no external power. Your projector's remote control plugs ee into the Auto-Fade and the FWD button is used to initiate the cycle. Want to present an even more 'Professional' show? Add the Spiratone Synchrocorder' and you can create sound-synchronized slide shows with smooth transitions from one slide to another. See description of Synchrocorder on at left. *1 sec. fade-out, slide advance, 1 sec. fade-in
SAVE ON COMBINATION OFFERS:
Auto-Fade + Synchrocoder 11 Shpg. Wt. $274 90 11 lbs. Order No. 672106 Combi. Offer with Auto-Fade-2, Order No. 672300 $294.90 32
AUTO-FADE MODEL 2 — all of the Auto-Fade features plus built-in timer with automatic cycling for unattended continuous showings. Timer delay range 3 to 20 seconds, continuously $119.50 variable. Order No. 672203 Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
ptkamvSvochrocordern TOP VALUE IN SLIDE-SYNC RECORDERS
Now, with your present Carousel projector (or even two projectors) and the Spiratone Synchrocorder you can create sound synchronized. automated slide shows. Add a dissolve unit, such as the Spiratone Memory PrograMaster, the Spiratone Multimage PrograMaster, or the PrograMaster Digital Dissolve/Programmer and you can create slide shows to rival even the most elaborate professional presentations.
SAVE $20
Buy Synchrocorderllat same time as Memory PrograMaster or Multimage PrograMaster and pay only $179.95 for Synchrocorder.
The Spiratone Synchrocorder IL is an AC-DC powered, two track cassette recorder with built-in synchronizing circuit for automatic slide advance of one or two Carousel projectors. The independent signal track allows it to be used with programmable dissolve units to record and play back the encoded signals that control the projector functions of the dissolve. Completely portable, it is also ideal for location sound recording, Its high sensitivity, built-in electret microphone provides sound quality that compares favorably with that obtainable with the best microphones available. The built-in amplifier and 4 1/2 " dynamic speaker deliver 5 W RMS/101A/ peak at 5% THD for faithful sound reproduction with superb clarity and enough volume for most applications. Full keyboard tape control features auto stop at end of tape during record or playback, cue and review keys for fast forward or rewind without going through stcp, and a pause control (invaluable to add synch signals to a pre-recorded tape). The Slide/Filmstrip synchronizing system will play back programs using the 50 Hz signal or will record and play back tapes using the separate track 1000 Hz projector advance signal and 150 Hz second projector advance (or program stop) format. Foolproof sync track record interlock prevents accidental erasure of the sync track signals. So, whether you're an amateur looking to add pizazz to your slide shows, or a professional aiming at slide presentations that will be performed excitingly and flawlessly, the Spiratone Synchrocorder 11 is a dependable, versatile instrument for your slide sync audio requirements. FEATURES • 1000 Hz, 150 Hz sync signal record and playback. 150 Hz may be used as "program stop" signal. • 50 Hz sync signal playback. • Restart button, jack for remote restart switch, • Direct access to sync track (line-in, line-out). • Auto stop at end of tape in record and play modes. • Mechanical Pause control. • Built-in electret microphone — jack for external microphone also provided. • Switchable ALC (auto level control) for automatic or manual recording level setting. • NAVA standard 3 digit tape counter. Spiratone Synchrocorder
Shpg. Irt. 10 th.
• Cue and Review controls allow for quick locating of desired portions on the tape. • Standard 1/4" jacks for external microphone, auxiliary input and headphone/external speaker. • Five segment LED record level meter. • Full range tone control. • Public Address (PA) switch allows use of amplifier and speaker through external microphone. • Permanently attached grounded AC cord with storage compartment. • Battery operation, uses 4 "D" cells. For prices see pg. 42. • Furnished with two Carousel Projector connecting cords.
It $19995 For low prices on Carousel Projectors, see offer on page 33
Carry case for Synchrocorder II and 'Kodak type' projector. High impact ABS luggage-style case with screen in removable top. Die-cut foam interior holds projector. Synchrocorder II. zoom lens. extra lamps, cassettes and cables.
Shpg. Wt. 12 lbs.
$85.00
Projection Lenses, Slide Mounts, Mounters, Cutters r•Iihtittt( 2" 111.7 SUPER-VIEW" ELEMENT8, PROJECTION LENS 1.for all Carousel and Ektagraphic Projectors
will
40" --.1 ..1-
I.- -
literally do wonders for you: if you project
in a small room, you can cover a 40" wide screen at an amazingly close 1 2 from the projector!
5/'
If you need a large image, but don't have a giant room, the Spiratone 2" lens will fill an 8 ft. wall at 12 1/2 ft. j (with a 5" lens, you'd have to be 301/2' from the screen t an 8 ft. image on a all at only 12 1/2 ft. or to get this size picture!). What's more, the resultant , t l:, IT , .e ... 40" image o een at only 51/2 ft. N __--a image with the Spiratone Super-View Lens is one and one third stops brighter for a same image size than with a .,a vf--- -- Other top quality ojection Lenses: standard f/2.8 lens. on '-...../ 3" f/1.7 5 element h viLOY larger screen ag But that's not all. Want to project your slides right than with you $39.9 your desk? Easy - at 3', you get a big 20" wide picture! 011/4 S 4" f/2.8 3 eleme 19.95 And all this extra convenience and versatility cost so little. 5" f/3.2 3 element sl 294:995 ktA‘.Spiratone 6 element 2" f/1.7 Super-View coated pro- $59 7" f/3.5 3 element orium e jection lens Order No. 682004 Shpg. Wt. 1% lbs. Shpg. Wts. 3, s s ch % lbs. lbs.
95
!Vow- you, too can use "Post Production" techniques to imp rve your slide shows. You can create the effect you might have gotten with a zoom lens on camera. You can crop and project the desired portion for greater emphasis, change from a 'wide' view to a close-up.
Its the new Sp Wm
)13N0101)ES
when purchased in conjunction with any of our projection control units ( dissolves or recorders)
Spiratone 7 element 3-5" f/3.5 Zoom Projection Lens, Order No. 682128 $59.95 Spiratone 7 element 4-6" f/3 5 Zoom Projection Lens, also suited for use in large rooms where a long throw is $54.95 needed, Order No. 682144
Shpg. Wt. per lens 1V2 lbs.
For church, school, A/V users and demanding amateurs A truly SOLID, yet portable
PROJECTION STAND sufficiently sturdy for the heaviest equipment - 11x19" cast aluminum top - fully portable, with its own carry handle has rubber leg tips to absorb vibration, prevent slipping has individual fully height adjustable legs, permitting horizontal or tilted setups-accom modates optional bottom shelf for holding recorder, other accessories
A NEW, BETTER, MORE PROTECTIVE
CASE for CAROUSEL PROJECTORS A heavy duty carry/storage case for your Carousel or Ektagraphic projector. Double walled and made of practically indestructible high density polyethylene, it carries projector with tray, zoom lens (or any other), power, remote, extension cords-even has room for spare lamps. The 14k16 1/2 x7", 4 lbs. clamshell design case has two safety catches to event accidental opening, may be padlocked for security. Available for both old and new model Carousel projectors (except 'Custom') - please specify projector model # when ordering. A A nc Projecter Carry Case Shpg. Wt. 5 Ms . 41'4.UJ
Accessories for Dissolve Controls and Carousel Projectors ' -
,pz I .ua
Projector Stand Model 256, height 32" to 56" variable, Order No. 685038 Shpg. 04
95
Wt. 14 lbs. ....
141/2" x 22" Accessory Shelf, Order No. 685062 Shpg. Wt.
6 lbs
$i
1.95
FILM CUTTING MADE EASY
MAGNI-ILLUMINATED 35mm FILM CUTTER
Shpg. Irt. 3 lbs.
110v. AC, brightly illuminated viewing area, with large square magnifier for evaluating and accurate positioning of your slides and negatives. Calibrated transport guide, precision cutter, scratch-free transport system. Order No. 601411 Extra Bulb, Order No. 601403 ..$1.75
$22 95
STANDARD-ILLUMINATED CUTTER
Order No. ti 7 OE Similar to above, but without magnifier. 601330 4111 • Extra bulb, Order No. 601403 $1.75 Shpg, WI, 2 M. Buy either model cutter ($22.95 or $17.95 model) at same time as 500 or more slidemounts and deduct $5 from price of cutter.
$25.95
Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs.
SAVE $5 .1
-.-
25' PROJECTOR CONTROL EXTENSION CABLE: Full control cord allows use of dissolve units at extended distances of up to 25' from the projectors.
Each $37.95 2 for $69.95
This ingenious device will even hold your 35mm Instant Polaroid film (still in the cassette) in its special cartridge holder and lets you ever so smoothly transport the film with a single push-pull motion. With the built-in knife, you quickly cut the frame while automatically - without your touching the film - inserting it into the special sturdy plastic Quick-Mount. No need to wear cotton gloves with the Auto-Quick Mounter - your fingers never touch the image area.
NO-TOUCH SLIDE TRANSPORT
For Kodak Carousel and Ektagraphic projectors -
MODEL 4200 BODY, includes 300 watt, 70 hour FHS lamp, remote control/cord, 140 capacity slide tray Order No. 680508 Ea. $165 Order No. 680516 2 for $310 MODEL 4600 AUTOFOCUS BODY, includes 300 watt, 70 hr. FHS lamp, remote control/cord, 140 capacity slide tray Order No. 680559 Ea. $240 Order No. 680567 2 for $450 For lenses, see above.Quotation on Kodak Ektagraphic FF Flat Field Lenses on request.
PIGGY BACK STAND: Allows instant "stacking" of two Carousel projectors (pre '82 models except "Custom") one above the other for best on-screen if: picture alignment. Order No. 690023 PIGGY BACK MODEL II for 4000, 5000 ,,-Series Carousel and Ektagraphic projectors. Order No. 690058 &q7 ne
411100ffirm
3-5"113.5 PROJECTION ZOOM LENS
With it, you get a much larger image than with your standard lens; at the 3" setting, the lens projects a 40" wide image at a close 8' from the screen! And if you position your projector so that it fills the screen with the lens set to 5" focal length, you'll be able to enlarge any portion as small at 3/4 X 1" from your slide to full screen size, at the same projection distance. That's like having had a zoom lens for the original exposure. Our 3-5" lens covers the most desirable range-the short 3" focal length for extra large images at short distance, the 4-5" focal lengths for 'normal' projection. 3"-5" ZOOM
Kodak Carousel Projectors
Our deluxe Magnifying Illuminated Film Cutter/Automatic Slide Mounter
n'te'aveti,
r SLIDE TRAYS & MAGAZINES 5 FOR 10 FOR Appr. Shpg. Wt. MODEL Cabin, Cabintat, 36 capacity $13.75 $24.60 4 lbs. per 5 28.95 Kodak Carousel Transvue 80 57.95 10 lbs. per 5 Kodak Carousel Transvue 140 45.95 91.95 10 lbs. per 5 Kodak AV780 Universal Tray 39.95 78.95 10 lbs. per 5 European Universal Tray 50 capacity 6 for $12.95 4 lbs. per 6 (Leitz, Rollei, Braun, Voightlander, etc.) Minimum Quantities As Shown
MINI PROJECTION SCREEN
VALUE 21x29" Back of screen showing stand support
WITH STAND for wall or table
White vinyl ufrface 21x29" suited for slide and movie projection. Chrome - plated metal stand stores inside one of the two roller tubes for compactness. Can alto, be used as vertical or horiShpg. 1 Wt. 3 lbs. zontal wall-hanging screen. with your purchase of $25 Limit: one per customer or more of other items
FREE '800' ORDER PHONE See page 24
AUTOMATIC SLIDE INSERTION INTO QUICK MOUNT You would expect a state-of-one-art device such as our Auto-Quick Mounter to cost far more than conventional cutters without any of the AutoQuick Mounter's many capabilities, - but it is, in fact, amazingly inexpensive. Powered by 2 'C' cells (not included - see page 42 for prices).
e90 Or Order No. 601489 The complete unit incl. 50 Quick Mounts is priced at an unbelievable 4LU.UJ Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs. QUICK MOUNTS which mount 'automatically' with the Auto-Quick Mounter, can also be used for manual mounting, are sturdy, plastic mounts which fit all projectors, including Carousel 140 trays and stack loaders. Thanks to their one piece construction and slip-in design, Quick Mounts can't be improperly closed, nor can they accidentally open. And here is more good news! Quick Mounts cost less than other mounts, in fact they are the most inexpensive, sturdy plastic mounts available - under 30 each in quantities!
500
200
2500
5000 Approx. Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. per 500
$9.25 $18.95 $15.00 $135.00
"INSTANT" 35mm COLOR SLIDE AUT MOUNTER OU O-
TFIT
With P o ca e p rtil r st r
WITH MAGNIFIER, ILLUMINATED CUTTER, AND AUTOMATIC, NO-TOUCH MOUNTER
Includes Polaroid Auto Processor, Auto Quick-Mounter, one roll 12 exp. Polachrome slide film with developing cartridge, 50 Auto Quick Mounts, 6 1/2 x 8 3/4 " Magna-Frame Magnifier (for viewing slides up to nine at one time!), everything you need to get started in 35mm 'instant' ONLY FROM SPIRATONE photography. Shpg. Wt. 4 lbs.
$94.95
Order a supply of 35mm Instant Slide Films Polachrome CS Color (Transparency) Slide Film, QQ pc Daylight, ISO 40/17° medium grain . .12 exp.
36 exp.
.PO.i1J
12 95
Polapan CT Continuous Tone B&W Slide Film, ISO 125/22° for conventional B&W work 36 exp. Polagraph HC High Contrast B&W Slide Film, 0 nr ISO 400/27° for titles, graphics etc., 12 exp. 0.JJ Each roll of film comes with its appropriate developing cartridge For prices of extra Quick Mounts, see above.
12.95
33
Lamps, Slide Mounts, Gels, Press For MOUNTING—or REMOUNTING to replace your dog-eared mounts simply and economically — choose the Spi'Aittoge
For virtually every tral, magazine, cuhe, stackloader system
0
THIN PLASTIC 2x2" MOUNT 0
IT EVEN FITS THE CAROUSEL '140' TRAY No more bent mounts jamming the projector. And mounting's a snap with the new Spiratone SNAP-IT plastic mounts—just place slide in position, snap in insert! No tools, no presses needed.
C EACH in quantities
Here's the economical, wearproof plastic, universal 202" mount for ALL PROJECTORS andtray systems, including the CAROUSEL 14 place your fragile, dog-eared paper your new slides in the 'permanent' mounts and m plastic mounts that fit all projectors including CAROUSEL with 80, 140 t ys, GAF, - -; 80 trays, virtually all other circula aid s tre y (04gazines) and cubes. 0 a
e
100 200 1000 3000 Sh. $4.40 $8.0D,0 • .00 $34.00 $90.00 Wt.1 1/a lbs.
5 lbs.
2 lbs.'
8
lbs.
21 lbs.
TIC PLASTIC CF 1P-IT" MOUNTS for CREATIVE PROJECTION
2x2"
CROP-IT MOUNTS open up a whole new Veld of cies), CROP-IT mounts are the easiest-to-assemble, creative imaging—no longer need you project the permanent plastic mounts which fit all projectors entire original slide, with its frequently distracting — even Carousel 140 trays! They are available in portions or limit yourself to a single shape and ten different framing shapes and sizes to allow you format. Identical in design to the popular Snap-it to crop your 3t5ti ra slides for optimum composimounts (for standard 35mm 1x1 1/2 " transparen- tion and best e . ondONE OF H TE,OttlitgmENT SELECT PAC CHOOSE ASSORT MENT A" O R "B" OR 2 0 each "of: A 1 Dia m
lmm), A-5 Circle (1 T A " (3"ASS ' 20 each of: R ASS'T "B" Centered— (21x28mm)
SELECT
11\11\1111
95
Order No. 3 693103 Set of two $7.25 Order No. 693146
lb.
Shpg. OW
E
TWO
PROJECTION
Buy The Pair
ELH
LAMPS And Have A Spare! LAMPS for \■V`. . Check 3 letter code on lamp in your projector and order by code, not by KODAK '4"A` description. Lamps are supplied in CAROUSEL $ a 95 various brands, all of proven quality. THE PAIR 1-0 Sorry we cannot offer choice of brand. AVERAGE AVERAGE Code LIFE Price Per Two Code LIFE Price Per Two
TWO FHS
50 2 for $65,50 DEE CBA 15 2 for $28.95 CLS 25 2 for 19.95 OIL 15 2 for 31.50 CZA 25 2 for 30.95 ELH 35 2 for 29.95 KODAK 53295 CZX 25 2 for 31.95 ENH 175 2 for 52.95 CAROUSEL the pair DAK/DAY 25 2 for 28.95 EXR 35 2 for 30.95 25 2 for 31.50 EXY 200 2 for 49.95 DEK Series 4000, 5000 FHS 70 2 for 32.95 Ektagraphic III Sh Wt 2 lbs. per 2 lamps; 8 lbs. per 4 lamps LAMPS for
SLIDES—Planning and Producing Slide Programs Kodak's all-new, step-by-step, production manual and quick reference for all AV communicators on how to plan and produce effective one- and two-projector slide and audio tape shows. Five major sections cover, Planning Production, Photography, Preparing Graphics, Putting the Show Together and Post Production. 160 pgs with over 200 color illustrations. si2 Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
.95
50A
Every Purchase From This Catalog Saves you
up to
34
on Win fu future
V orders
See details on back cover
Appr Shpg. Wt 1001 lb.; 200 2 lbs.; 1000 6 lbs.
} 100 for $3.85 200 for 7.00 1 000 for 31.00
2 1/4"S0. (606 cm) MOUNTS (Hasselblad, TLR) 35mm STEREO MOUNTS (Realist, etc.)
Shpg. Wts. 100 2 lbs., 200 3 lbs., 1000 11 lbs.
SPiltatotte
COLOR CODED Mounts
with ROUNDED CORNERS for longer life
For the commercial user, AV supplier, 1,000 professional — anybody who will benefit from quick color identification for $22 subject categories, or who appreciates ,000 the distinction of personalized slide mounts. Select the Spiratone color coded cardboard mounts with rounded corners in the 10,000 color(s) of your choice. Same high quality heat sealing mounts as described above. Prices apply to minimum of 1000 per color — please fperif).
DELUXE HEAT SEALING Ant /1B11
SPECIAL WESS MOUNTS FOR DUPLICATING
Our "full frame" 35mm duplicating mount has an opening a full millimeter larger in every dimension than the "standard" opening mount, allowing for full 1:1 slide copying. Glass plates hold film flat for utmost sharpness in the duplicate. Black, heat-resistant plastic frame minimizes reflections and flare in your duplicating system and makes originals easy to recognize. The duplicating mount features pin-registered film location and the same easy-to-use snap loading as the Pin Registered mount. Duplicating Mounts — set of 50 Order No. 693308 Shpg. WI. 1 lb
$15.50
For true precision in your Multiple Image Presentations, you'll appreciate the benefits of
Wess Pin Registered Slide Mounts If your audio-visual needs are critical, if you need the utmost precision in positioning your images on screen, there's only one solution — pinregistered glass slide mounts. The Wess pin-registered slide mount — a product of the latest technology in mounts — is made of heat resistant material which can withstand projector gate temperatures of up to 300'F. The mount comes pre-assembled with two anti-Newton ring glass plates sealed in place, to both protect and hold the film flat. Using it is simplicity itself: just place the film's sprocket holes over the registration pins and snap the cover closed! To enable you to take advantage of the Wess mount's precision design, your camera must be able to expose film reasonably "in register". If in doubt, contact our Technical Service department for more information. Standard aperture (34.8023.4mm opening) Pin-Registered Glass Mount: SET ti3 Or rde No. 693200 SET t cn Order No. b OF 50 ,PI A Shp g. Wt. 1 in OF 250 4I4U Shpg. W's .5
l
PROJECTION POINTER
inal size openings: STANDARD 35 (1011/2"), HALF FRAME 10Iympus Pen, etc, 3/401"1, SUPERSLIDE 127 (P/e01%"), 16mm SUBMINIATURE 19/1607/16"), MINOX M05/16"1, ROBOT Gel") 126 INSTAMATIC (11/201 1/8"), 110 INSTAMATIC (11/16x1/2").
EA. IN LOTS OF 10M Quantity prices per size, specify size 100 for $2.80 200 for 4.90 500 for 11.25 1,000 for 19.75 3,000 for 52.25 10,000 for 145.00
SLIDE MOUNTING PRESS
For prices on larger quantities (Over 500) of ONE format, write for quotation, stating SPECIFIC quantities required. Shpg. Wt. 1% ba. per 100
A must for critical alignment of projectors in dissolve presentations. 2x2" slide bubble level, with refer ence lines to adjust horizontal plane of projectors, also has reference marks for slide frame sizes. Level slide fits standard 80-slide capacity trays. simply drops in projector's gate and provides instantaneous guides for projector placement and alignment.
2x2" MOUNTS available with these nom-
Order: BLUE, YELLOW, GREEN, ORANGE, RED 500 (100 each color) $13 Shipping Wt. Mini Assts. 1,000 (200 each color) $25 Pe, 1000 6 lbs.
$7.95
PROJECTOR LEVEL! ALIGNMENT SLIDE
Sturdy cardboard heat-sealing mounts (like those used by photofinishersl, for all size transparencies, to fit all projectors,.changers.
$168
$7.95
Buy $20 or more of SNAP-IT and/or CROP IT mounts at regular prices and you may order one Box of 100 CROP-IT mounts in your choice of SELECT B2, B3, B4, or B5 for just $1 additional (that's just 10 per mount!).
FOR ALL SIZES • FOR ALL FILM FORMATS • FOR CROPPING less than
$56
—8-1 (12x35mm), B-2 ( 7x24mm); mm) and B-5 TV form. Asst. of 100 Box of 100 of 0 r'p-It format-100 each A-2, A-3, A-4, A-5, B-1, B-2, B-3, B-4, 8-5, 011 er ( for example) "1 Box Select ' ( 100 B-3 CROP-IT !Mounts) each S
$1 SALE
Ass't.
,
Ilegy‘hole A-4 Oval Asst. of 100
SLIDE MOUNTS
$6.95
Lecturers as well as family showmen will upgrade their showmanship with this. .hanelr Order No. accessory which projects a .poinaerNT-row onto 690309 the sot:gen.-Palm size (1 14 021/4 4,7,2 -r, operates on 2 "C" batteries, convenient pushbutton switch, ad- less batteries justable focus projection lens. See 42. lb. Extra Pointer Bulbs Order No. 690333, $1.95 Shpg.
for standard 2x2" cardboard mounts The heavy duty heat sealing press for quantity production. Spring loaded twin handled vise grip with auto lock and quick release, slide stacking bin for convenient, fast mounting. To use, you simply insert the mount with film chip in place and squeeze the handles together. Just fifteen seconds later, pull the release lever and the perfectly sealed slide drops down the built-in chute and neatly stacks in a compartment. All metal construction for a lifetime of use, cushioned handles, rocker type on/off switch with built-in pilot light, 110v AC, 10 Watts. Order No. 801608 Shpg. wt. 6 lbs.
$125
COLORGELS O —ontrol Slide Color
Colorgels give you that second chance to change the color of the finished slide. These thin colored polyester "gels" sandwich with the slide in most any format 202" mount including the cardboard and Snap-it mounts. Available in two different assortments of 100 "gels" each. WARMING and COOLING Asst. "WC" includes different hues of magenta, yellow and blue, plus neutral density gels. ND "gels" correct slightly over exposed slides, do not affect color. SPECIAL EFFECTS Asst. "SE" includes 10 ea. of ten vibrant colors: yellow, orange, red, lavender, purple, raspberry, two blues and two greens — to add the "pizazz" that only deeply saturated colors can. WC Assortment (Order No. 601144) $4.95 SE Assortment (Order No. 6011601 4.95 Set of both Assortments (Order No. 6011871 . 9.25
Shipping Weight
lb.
Buy either assortment at same time as $12 or more of mounts and pay only each
$3.50
Automatic cardboard slide mount opening with the easy to use
2x2" SLIDE MOUNT SLITTER/ OPENER
One simple, quick operation cuts open and separates one edge of the cardboard mount allowing you to quickly and safely peel the mount apart and remove the film. Use it handheld or mount on your work surface. Uses inexpensive single edge razor blades and comes ready for use with 3 blades (6 cutting edges). Shpg. Wt. 1 lb. 2x2" Slide Motint Slitter/Opener
$3.95
STEEL SLIDE ALE CHEST Steel chest with gold hammertone baked enamel finish. 71/2x141/2x2", offers optimum protection for your 2x2" slides. Holds up to 750 cardboard mounted slides in "group" compartments Order No. 3 for ty q; Order No. Shpg. Wt. EA. $6.95 604712 8 lbs. ea. 604739
gpikokle FILING SYSTEMS ARE TOPS
TM
FOR YOUR NEGATIVES FOR YOUR SLIDES 2x2"or 21/4 SQ. o
MODEL
beix
P 00
Ic
1)ikotoge TOP-LOADING
DOE ILE
FOR STORING, PROTECTING AND IN-FILE PROOFING
tile Proof sheetsder ch Proottle1 Or 'NW laSee "Print Display ""stte P8 Ones ' ;. I fight. Pages a
35mm O PER NEGATIVE
FOR LESS THAN
IN QUANTITIES
The ideal negative storage and retrieval system
• Dust • Scratch • Light Diffusing and Proof Proof Transparent Construction for effective visual evaluation of negatives. Lets you make CONTACT SHEETS without removing negatives — no overlapping perforations: numbers print clearly for identification. Proofile has File Data Imprint and fits 3 RING BINDER. Buy Giant MAGNA-FRAME (6 1/2 x 8 3/4" magnifier) $
at same time as $13.95 or more of Proofile or Slidefile pages and pay for it only See below for details
likotoxe
PROOFILE PRINTERTM For contact printing Proofile pages on paper (sizes) up to 81/2 x 11". Also doubles as borderless easel. Order No. 123757 Buy at same time as $11.50 or more of Spiratone Proofile or Slidefile pages and pay only Order No. 123765
$18.95
SAVE
Shpg. Wt. 6 lbs.
$14.95
pikotegp, JUMBO SORTER/VIEWER The sorter/viewer that handles 80 • X a a • a slides at a time to edit a full Carousel — ► be a air ihg" tray. Bright, even illumination provided •• a 4 by twin 60 watt lamps in-white enamel all metal housing; includes 6 ft. cord and on-off switch. Translucent styrene / screen accommodates 10 slides in each — a, of 8 rows. Folds easily for storage. — air ;:g measures 12 1/2 x20 1/2 x12" set up. Shpg. Wt. 8 lbs. Order No. 604585 $17 . 95 less lamps
35mmt or 120 0 Model
25 Sheets $ 4.00 50 Sheets 7.50 100 Sheets 13.95 250 Sheets 32.50 500 Sheets 57.00
pkitoge ATTACHE LIGHT
BOX/SORTER
FOR YOUR PRINTS
• P3 for 8 31/2x5" prints • P4 for 6 4x6" prints P5 for 4 5x7" prints
Same heavy vinyl, clear both sides; individual pockets • P8 for 2 8x10" prints display two prints back-to-back. AS LOW Shpg. Wts.: 10-1 lb., 50-5 lbs., 100 - 9 lbs.
. 4 strips of 3
SPIRATONE SLIDE FILE OR PRINT DISPLAY PAGES
AS
10 FOR $2.50-50 FOR $11.50 . 100 FOR $21 . 500 FOR $100 quantity prices per single size
SPECIAL ,Cpbotuge 3 RING BINDERS
for your Slidefile and Proofile Pages
Finished in an elegant, scuff-proof vinyl, Spiratone Binders Models 15B and 20D are ideally suited for storing and protecting your "filed" slides and negatives. Model 15B is a 1 1/2 " capacity binder which holds approximately 200 Proofile pages or 600 slides in vinyl, over 800 in PP Slidefile pages. It comes complete with cardboard storage box for virtually dustproof storage. t r nn Order No. Model 15B Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. 4K ).1111 604518 // Model 200 is a 2" capacity binder featuring a transparent cover and spine pocket which allow you to slip in an 8x10" photo on the front and a full length index over the spine. Inside each cover is a transparent pocket in which you can store yetto-be-sorted slides or papers. Model Order No. 604534 Cr 20D Shpg. Wt. 4 lbs. J•50 Buy either 3-Ring Binder at same time as $13.95 tq from cost or more Proofile or Slidefile Pages and deduct 44 of binder.
Spikoton
Great for draftsmen, illustrators, teachers, salesmen, medical and dental professionals and photographers on the go
NEW'
Small individual pockets provide excellent protection. 2x2" hold 20 slides, 2 1/4 Sq. hold 6 slides per page. Clear front with diffused matte rear surface for effective viewing—without touching slide. Fit three-ring binder albums. Specify 2x2" or 2 1/4 Sq. • P2 for 12 3 1/283 1/2" prints
Spiratone Print Display Pages •
Shpg. 11, ts. : 25 sheets 1 lb., 50 sheets 2 lbs., 100 sheets 3 lbs., 250 sheets 6 lbs. -17 strips of 5
HEAVY VINYL SLIDEFILE PAGES WITH CONVENIENT TOP-LOADING* FEATURE
in quantities
"Archival" Storage for 2x2" Slides with Spiratone "PP" Pages
Er--7]
Spiratone's new, soft, flexible polypropylene slidefile pages, safely hold 20 2x2" slides — cardboard, plastic, ■* I even many glass mounted up to 3/41" thickness — within 1 their smooth, spill-resistant, non-scratch pockets. OD Polypropylene is the material of choice for storing your precious slides, and is so safe, in fact, that it meets the requirements of the Food Additives Amendment ' En E117 of the Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act. . _ PP Pages offer other advantages, too. Since ..\•• 'm•N`..1__ -4."' they are made of a tough, but very light gauge \____ ., material, you can fit about 25% more pages ------ into an album. And you can fold each PP Page, complete with cardboard mounted slides, into a neat 'package' to fit a standard business size envelope for mailing! S P IR AT 0 N E Yet, Spiratone PP Pages have reinforced binding ' 'P P " P A G E S edges which won't rip, so you can easily store them in 3-ring binders — just like the heavier 50 for $10.95 vinyl pages. Clearly, Spiratone PP Pages are the safe, eco- 100 for $19.95 nomical answer to archivally safe slide filing! 500for$94.95
Shpg. Wt. 2, 4, 14 lbs.
MAGNA-FRAME
Order No. 604798
Shpg. Wt. Y2 lb.
TM
A GIANT (6 1/2 X81/4") MAGNIFIER FOR VIEWING SLIDES, NEGATIVES, PRINTED MATTER
Here is a most useful aid for every photographer—the Spiratone Magna-Frame. Neatly mounted within a 71/2 x 11 1/2 " vinyl frame/holder, the Fresnel-lens Magna-Frame allows you to view up to 9 2x2" slides simultaneously—this lets you choose the best one for printing or to prepare slides in proper sequence for a show. Hold Magna-Frame about 4" from subject for comfortable viewing with close to two times area magnification.
PORTA-VIEW LIGHT BOX The elegant solution to the problem of illuminating your
$74.95 Shpg. Wt. 8 lbs.
Overall dimensions: 20x12x41/2" Travel in style with this handsome, sturdy attaché case which houses an impressive light table. The 5000' Kelvin fluorescent light source preferred by critical photographers, provides remarkably even illumination across the flat 1 lx 14" viewing surface. Molded into the light table, outside its viewing area, are five sorting wells for 2x2" slides. A removable sorting screen conveniently holds up to 42 slides in 6 rows over the viewing surface. The detachable hinged cover which has a compartment for 8 1/2 x1 1" file pages, also acts a3 a base cradle for placing the light table at a convenient viewing angle. The scuff proof, handle equipped leather grain finish plastic case features a compartment for the 6 foot, on-off switch equipped cord: two locks seal the case for carrying and storage.
ACCESSORIES for LIGHT BOX/SORTER
Slide Sorting Screens (42 slide capacity) ea. $5.95 Layout Grid Sheets ea. $9.95 Protective Cutting Mat 2 for $9.95 Buy two or more of the above accessories at the same time as Attache unit and deduct 25% SAVE 25 U from the price of the accessories.
70
slides—from 35mm to 12X17"—with the 'perfect' light source: an ANSI standard 5000°K fluorescent lamp with a CRI rating of 94 and which provides well distributed, daylight-simulating, light. Utilizing all metal, welded construction with baked enamel finPorta-View Light Box Shpg. Wt. ish, the sturdy Porta-View Light .15 lbs. Box weighs 10 lbs. (most of the other under $100 light boxes are cheaply made of lightweight plastic) and is equipped with a tough, break-resistant, translucent acrylic 17X12" panel.
101
The Box can be used flat on a table, hung on a wall, stood either on end or inclined, with its built-in stand. In the vertical position, slide pages or individual transparencies may be fixed in place by means of the two spring clips attached to the cabinet. Overall size 18X14 1/2 X3 1/2 ", heavy duty strap, protective vinyl dust cover. Suitable for color slides, X-rays, A-V materials and much more.
EXTRA-LARGE PROFESSIONAL MODEL Porta-View Light Box
Same design as above, but with 345 square inch viewing surface 115e 23", 170% the viewing area of regular model), two 5000° K fluorescent lamps, CRI rating 91, three movable spring clips. Less dust cover. Overall size 24x16x33/4", weight 15 lbs. Shpg. Wt. 18 lbs. Professional Model
$139.95
Close-up Photography
A lavishly illustrated book covering all aspects of close-up photography — exposure, depth of field, special lenses, composition, lighting and much more with a particular emphasis on nature subjects. Highly recommended for the photographer who is serious about working close to the subject. 8 1/2 x 11", 96 pages, over 190 color and B/W photographs ..
Shpg. Wt. 1 lb.
$8 95
Existing-Light Photography Complete how-to guide on picture-taking by existing light. Includes camera-handling techniques, exposure tables, and tips on using the latest high-speed Kodak films. Also includes taking existing-light pictures in the home, outdoors at night, in public places, of television images and computer screens, etc. Detailed information on exposure, equipment, film, and•kinds of lighting. 96-pages 8 1/2 x 11", over 200 $9 color and B/W photographs ..
95
Shpg. Wt. 1 lb. 35
e Why settle for an "ordinary" winder —choose the multiple feature Pet*
r" AUTOWINDERS
180°
Fits front of your lens, screws in like a filter—creates circular image, covering 180° just like fisheye lenses costing many times as much. Modern Photography reported their amazement at the performance of 'one of the most interesting lenses we've used in many years' when Spiratone first introduced this lens, bringing the excitement of fish-eye photography within the reach of every photographer.
Off S C T
and MINOLTA 'X', 'X
• "Sees" full 180°—everything in front, below, to the side of lens is included. That's 3X the angle of a 35mm WA (on a 35mm camera)! • Creates that sweeping effect unique to fish-eye lenses. • Enormous depth of field—depending on opening, from as close as 1 1/2 ' to infinity.
(XG-1, XG-1, XG-9, XG, X-700, X-570)
series cameras • • • •
Auto (single frame) Advance Continuous (two f.p.s.) Advance Auto Timed Interval Repeat Exposures Remote Release for all functions (cable included)
You'll use Spiratone TR winders for quick sequence shooting of fast moving action at 2 frames per second, always ready for the next exposure, for time sequence series of exposures at selected intervals of 5, 30, 60 seconds or 5 minutes over a period of less than 3 minutes or as long as 3 hours (on a 36 exposure roll) — without your having to touch the camera. If you want to do remote control shooting, you can use the 35" locking
$7••7
CABLE RELEASES
Plotocpliek ap
$4.50 $8.95
(Above 50% off prices apply only if you buy case at same time as a Spiratone Autowinder)
20 FT. REMOTE SHUTTER RELEASE
1
\
Gently acting through airpressure. Vinyl hose, air cylinder and hose connector to fit virtually any camera. Comes on handy reel. Order No. 518344
Heavy duty metal cable, sheat ed it in vinyl (A), reinforced the common weak spot with a 2" cover spring (B), built in a simple yet precise plunger stroke adjustment to 'customize' the cable to your particular camera and way of tripping (C), provided an automatic lock for time exposure (0). Thanks to its adjustability, the gentlest pressure (E) releases the shutter, eliminating any possibility of camera movement from this action. Standard quality Cable Releases w/setscrew: 10" $1.95. 40" $3.95
$5.98
Shpg. Wt. 1 lb.
Ws a PROJECTION SLIDE \ABNERIt lets you EDIT while you view project or tor dayli ght vlev4Ing
than doubles the angle of view of the original lens. Produces a variety of FISHEYE effects— from a 150° true fisheye circular format when used with a 28mm wideangle to full format cov9 erage, with 50mm or larger focal length, with Pouch just moderate curvature. $J $3.50 The CURVATAR requires no change in exposure, Shpg, rt. i 1h. fits most all lenses on 35mm, 2 1/4 cameras in conjunction with a series VII adapter ($5.25 additional—name size needed). It can be used at large openings for pleasantly soft effects and at smaller apertures for sharper results.
95
Remote Electric Releases If you are still using mechanical cable releases on your modern electronic camera, it's time to step up to the world of the electrical release. Spiratone's new electrical releases are supple 12" long cables with a positive action push button at one end and a fitting to plug into your camera's electric release socket (Minolta XD11, X-700; Contax on camera body; others on Motor drive or autowinder where fitted). Route Electric Release for Bronica ETR, Canon, Olympus, most any movie camera, tape recorders. Order No. 521418 $9.95 for Contax RTS II, 139Q, Order No. 521442 9.95 for Pentax K (not for ME II winder) Order No. 521450 9.95 for Nikon, Order No. 521477 9.95 for Minolta, Order No. 521493 9.95 When ordering, name your specific motor drive or Shpg. Wt. autowinder brand and model 1/2 lb. ea.
4.95 ADAPTER B fits Nikon, Order No. 519790 ADAPTER C fits Contax RTS/Yashica FR, Order No. 519812 2.50
ck
For entertainment or business
DOUBLE THE ANGLE OF ALL YOUR SLR-VIDEO-CINE LENSES with the
ADAPTER A fits Canon, Olympus, movie cameras, tape recorders, Order No. 519774 $1.95
FABULOUS PREMIUMS See ba
t8995
10 element Fish-eye including case, one fitting, any standard screw-in nda rd screw-in diameter to 67 mm. Specify size With 72, 77mm screw-in, or 'Bay 50' fitting for Hasselblad $94.95
Make your cable release into an Electric Release
Your orders can 'earn'
lb.; 40", 60" — 1 lb.
• On 35mm SLR, with normal lens, fish-eye image has diameter of almost full format width; with larger format SLR's, circle becomes bigger (30mm on 2 1/4 sq.) With telephotos, covers full format including corners, with less severe curvature. Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
PiktitoKe CURVATAR"
Made of a sturdy, leather-like vinyl, felt-lined, and equipped with loops for use with your own camera carrying strap (not included), Spiratone Special Everready Cases, provide the compactness and fuss-free convenience of a conventional everready case for Canon, Minolta or Nikon camera with Spiratone Autowinder and longer lens attached right to the camera, ready for instant use, Rear hook and loop closable opening allows access to winder's controls. Special pull-strap attached between the sliders gives instant access to the camera and lens while the snoot remains attached to the case. We have designed two special Everready Cases to accommodate your camera, Spiratone Autowinder plus your normal or a telephoto or zoom lens.
$6.95
• Focuses to 1/2" for special effect shots—unbelievably dramatic results can be produced at close range.
A most versatile lens attachment that more
Special EVERREADY CASES "LT 50%
Spiratone ER Case, Model A, Advance your film per secfor lenses up to 3 3/4" long winders and or one framela Reg. similar to interval $13.95 timer and Specify Spiratone ER Case, Model B, cameras; Model N-S for lenses up to 51/2 long Model C-$ for all C ries cameras; Reg. Model M-S for all Minolt and "XG" cam$15.95 eras; Model MD-S for Minolta XD
Shpg. Wts. 10", 20" —
• Adaptable to different focal length lenses and/or different cameras (most fittings are just $5 each).
MORE CONVENIENCE STILL WITH SPIRATONE AUTOWINDER AND OUR
STANDARD AUTOWINDERS for NIKON, CANON and MINOLTA
h $r95 'a.95 60" 20"
• Fits normal SLR lens, requires no extra finder.
remote electric release cable which comes it winder; also available an economical 33 ft. extension for re l$7.95 additional). In other words, the Spiratone TR Aut our camera many more capabilities than just an rndffie apabilities which will enormously increase th fulness o y era outfit and make possible exciting new hori s picture-takA. On Canon, remote op n gte, fame advance are possible only on A-1, AE-1P, no oth 11p the single frame advance feature and the 35" locking ca rcan be used only on "X" series and XG-M, no others, *On Nik n, ote outlet and cable release not available Spiratone Autowinders operate on 4 AA batteries — use regular energizer batteries (4 for $2.25) or, for greater economy, get a complete set of 4 GE rechargeable nickel-cadmium batteries with a double charger for only $19.95 (and you get a $4 rebate from G.E.).
1) ihoton
Cue tomiod 6oz eizaciaal
9
Spiratone Multiple Feature Autowinders $ Model NJ for Nikon, C-TR for Canon or M-TR for Minolta models as indicated. Specify camera model.
'Remote not available on Nikon
With all these features incorporated into a single, compact unit, the Spiratone TR Winders still sell for less than you'd have to pay for most "basic" winders (lacking built-in timer or remote capabilities). The Spiratone Model TR Autowinders are precision-made electronic devices, designed for Nikon, Canon and Minolta cameras, styled and precision fabricated to reflect the fine workmanship that goes into them.
• AX.AR
Fl -EYE LEL
13111PEIEORUMIT
for NIKON* EM, FG, FG-20, CANON 'A' series (A-1, AE-1, AE-1P, AL-1, AV-1, AT-1)
with the EFFECT0
Name your camera, exact model, 'when ordering
Ws a SLIDE PROJECTOR with a wideangle lens
n. SLIDE VIEWER/PROJECTORfromPookle IT'S THE DELUXE DUAL FUNCTION
projection slide And if you want to sort your slides or edit them viewers, our Viewer/Projector lets you instantly for a show, you'll appreciate the instant access to change from rear screen (viewer) to standard the slides in the tray, right at your fingertips. The front (screen) projection. Its open tray, quick standard "European" slide tray is top loading, the lever slide advance system is great for previewing slides are transported and advanced, one at a and editing. time, by means of a lever which also allows for quickly selecting any slide in the tray. The dual function viewer/projector is a cleverly designed table-top rear projection viewer which, The Viewer/Projector is a high efficiency, preciwith its 50mm wideangle lens, projects a brilliant, sion instrument, its optical quality front surface clear image of your slide onto a 6x6" fine grain mirror and large aspheric condensor assuring rear projection screen, for viewing at a comfort- excellent light distribution. The quiet, belt-driven able angle by groups or individuals. fan provides cool operation, even under extended usage. Removing the viewing module (with its built-in Supplied in a sturdy storage carton, the Viewer/ front surface mirror) — it snaps on and off instantly — reveals an efficient projector tc project Projector is not only great for use at home, but is also ideal for taking along on sales calls, for images up to 6 1/2 feet wide on a screen or other suitable surface in a darkened room; under other meetings, or when you go visiting and want to show slides to your friends. conditions, maximum size and brightness depend on amount of other room illumination present. Specifications: Overall dimensions And thanks to the lens' short focal length, you 9 x 13 x 91/2 "H, weight 6 1/2 lbs., don't need much room to project a large picture operates on 110v AC current. Uses 12v 50w halogen lamp, European —at only 4 1/2 feet from the projector, you'll get universal slide tray. a 40" wide image from your 35mm slide. Vastly superior to ordinary
36
DELUXE DUAL FUNCTION VIEWER/PROJECTOR $1 complete with lamp, one 36 cap. tray Shpg. Wt.
1 0 lbs. Order No. 680737
09.95
STANDARD DUAL FUNCTION VIEWER/PROJECTOR Identical to the above model, but without blower cooling; uses 6v 20w lamp. Sharp and brilliant viewing image, even under normal room light conditions. Provides satisfactory projected screen image in fully or partially darkened rooms. With lamp, one 36 cap. tray. Shpg. Wt. 6 1/2 lbs. Order No. 680702 EXTRA 50 CAP. TRAYS 6 for $12.95 Shpg. Wt. per 6 trays 4 lbs. ■
.95
THE
SPimtm
n Tow U-1190°5)
The AUTOMATED PROCESSOR for
Kodak II RC Paper Developing and Stabilirlion Pror nn iog
20 lb
In
1°15 nods
Processing means: • consistently high quality black and white print processing • time saving — 10 seconds total processing time per 8x10" print for stabilization paper, 10 seconds total developing time for II RC paper
• labor saving — no skill required for developing • processor takes up less space than 3 8x10" trays • no installation, no plumbing connection needed for complete stabilization process
econonirpriced processor only Tile of its type, used in tens of thousands of advanced amateur, profesional, industrial, newspaper dasrkrooms. It has proven itself
For Overseas 220 Volt Model
$225°°
well over two decades.
PRICE LIST OF STABILIZATION and II RC MATERIALS The Spiratone Print-all Processor accepts all continuous tone stabilization papers and stabilization chemistry, and also Kodak II RC papers, except Panalure. Spiratone UNIVERSAL ACTIVATOR and STABILIZER chemistry are suited for and compatible with Kodak and all other brands of continuous tone stabilization papers, and with KODAK II RC papers. They are specially compounded for clean working and long life, with a capacity of about 200 8x10's per quart.
STABILIZATION CHEMICALS SPIRATONE Universal Activator Universal Stabilizer
LROM DARKROOM TO DAYLIGHT IN 10 SECONDS An economically priced processor for the amateur, professional and industrial user, providing the option to use stabilization paper (for a finished, damp-dry stabilized . print within 10-15 seconds) or to use Kodak II RC papers, with fully automatic developing (10-15 seconds) and subsequent fixing and washing (6 min.), and quick drying. With the Spiratone PRINT-ALL Processor, you can have the best of both — complete stabilization processing in just seconds, or automation and speeding up the developing portion of RC paper processing. Either way, you save a tremendous amount of time, assure far greater uniformity than you could obtain with manual developing, and eliminate completely the need for experienced help in processing.
.For archival permanence, standard fix and wash procedure may be applied afterwards.
How can the PRINT-ALL Processor work so fast?
Both Stabilization Paper and Kodak Kodabrome II RC and Polycontrast Rapid II RC have the developing agent incorporated right into the emulsion, so that, after exposure, they can be "activated" (which takes only a few seconds) instead of being tray developed. Stabilization paper, after being "activated", is "stabilized" and requires no fixing or washing— that's why you can turn on the lights and view, handle, work with the damp-dry print immediately as it emerges from the PRINT-ALL (an 8x10", in just 10 seconds after you fed the exposed print into the machine). Utilizing the same two chemicals, the Kodak II RC papers are also automatically developed fully after a few seconds (in just 10 seconds for an 8x10" — as compared to a minute or longer in tray developing), then quickly fixed (2 min.), washed (4 min.) and dried (air dried or machine dried) in a conventional manner. The glossy surface requires no ferrotyping for high gloss. And fixing is done in room light so if you have to remake a print, you can be back at the enlarger in 30 seconds rather than waste 3 or 4 minutes as in conventional processing. All this means that if you feed the PRINT-ALL continuously, you (or any layman) can perfectly and effortlessly process over 150 8x10's an hour — a mind-staggering figure, since you know you can carefully tray-develop only a few dozen 8x10's an hour at the best — and this only with constant supervision by yourself or someone skilled in processing.
What else you should know about the PRINT-ALL
It uses the same components (including the exclusive stainless steel print guide) as do the tens of thousands of Spiratone Stabilization Processors which have been made during the past twenty years and which are in use not only by professional and amateurs, but by newspapers, universities, libraries, police departments, industrial labs and studios all over the world. The PRINT-ALL is made in the U.S.A. by Spiratone, in two models: the 110-120V, 60Hz model and a 220-240V, 50Hz export model at $225. with parts and service readily available. The Print-All is not just a time saver, but produces better quality, more uniform results. That's why many leading pho-
tographers use it for all their printing, including that of exhibition prints. It takes less space than three trays—and or stabilization processing, you need nothing else: no plumbing, no drying. You don't have to watch temperatures-65° to 80° is O.K., so you can almost always work at room temperatures. It accepts any print size from 3 1/2 )45" to 11x14", any of the many brands of stabilization papers and Kodak II RC papers, except Panalure. A choice of surfaces and grades (including Polycontrast) is also available. The chemicals last and last activator does not oxidize like developer. And the automatic replenishment system keeps the solutions in the trays at the proper levels. What's more; the same chemicals are used for all papers! Whether you're an occasional or a full time printer, if you run a one man business and need quick turnaround or work under tight deadlines — if you are concerned with quality, simplicity of use and economy, if you appreciate the benefits of space saving and automation, you'll find the Spiratone PRINT-ALL the wisest investment in darkroom equipment you ever made.
HERE'S WHAT ACTUAL USERS OF THE SPIRATONE STABILIZATION PROCESSOR SAY "My new Stabilization unit works beautifully. I used to hate the darkroom, now it is fun." —P.T.K., Jr., Mass. "This remarkable machine has saved me countless time and obviated the expense of a darkroom, which I really didn't feel like investing in at this time." —RIR., Jr., Colo. "I recently bought one of your Stabilization Processors and am delighted with it. I do freelance photography in this area plus all the photography for the local paper and the processor has cut my darkroom time from 6 to 10 hours at a time down to one half to 2 hours a night when I have to print. It is the best investment that I made since I bought a camera." —D.H.L., Ohio "As a graduate of Rochester Institute of Technology — I am no stranger to high quality photographic equipment. I recently purchased your Print-All Processor - • - It is everything you claim! Quality is outstanding, and the unit is easy to maintain." —H.F.G., Chicago, IL
Approx. Shpg. Wts.: 25 sheets 8x10 sw 2 lbs.; 100 sheets 8x10 sw 4 lbs.; 100 sheets 8x10 dw 5 lbs.; 50 sheets 11x14 4 lbs.; 1 qt. chemicals, ea. 3 lbs.; 1 gal. chemicals, ea. 12 lbs.; 2 1 gal, chemicals, ea. 32 lbs.
Kodak Ektamatic Processor
KODAK
A10 Activator S30 Stabilizer
Quart, Each $2.29 3.27
Gallon, Quart, Ea. 12 or More Each 6 to 11 Quart, Ea. $6.66 $1.99 $1.86 9.97 3.07 2.67
Quart $3.95 5.90
21/2 Gallon Cubitainer $29.75 39.95
KODAK STABILIZATION PAPERS
KODAK EKTAMATIC SC VARIABLE CONTRAST STABILIZATION PAPER Size 8x10 8x10 8x10
Weight Surface S .W. F-Glossy S .W. F-Glossy or N-Lustre D.W. F-Glossy
Quantity 25 $10.50 100 36.95 100 48.95
KODAK POLYCONTRAST RAPID II RC medium weight in F (glossy) or N (lustre) surface (if not specified, F (glossy) will be supplied). Size Qty. Weight 8x10 25 Med. 8x10 100 Med. 11x14 50 Med.
Surface F-Glossy or N-Lustre F-Glossy or N-Lustre F-Glossy or N-Lustre
Price $11.25
38.90 37.25
SAVE ON INITIAL ORDER
for Stabilization Chemicals, Stabilization Paper, Kodak II RC Paper Order as much of the chemicals, paper listed on this page at the same time as the PRINT-ALL processor and take a Discount off Discount off the price the prices of of all Kodak Spiratone materials chemicals
10070
10 11/0
Take advantage of this one time offer — order as much as you expect to use over the next few months. All materials are fresh stock.
Model 214-K
If your black and white printing requirements are for a "24 hour" a day processor, then your choice will be the Ektamatic Model 214-K stabilization processor. The Model 214-K will process Ektamatic SC papers up to 14" wide and up to 3 ft. long at a rate of 5.9 feet per minute, and it will do this hour after hour, day after day. Only two solutions are required: Ektamatic A10 Activator, and Ektamatic S-30 Stabilizer (for economy, the equivalent Spiratone chemicals may be used without any compromise in quality). Solutions are used at room temperature (65° to 85°F) and require no diluting or mixing. Special feeder assemblies maintain proper solution levels in the processor. 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz. $1195 Kodak Ektamatic (Stabilization) Processor Model 214-K Order No. 130745 Shpg. Wt. 60 lbs. Shipped by motor freight, see page 24.
37
narkroom - Programmer, Timer, Easels The Spiratone Darkroom Director is not just a 'timer', but a complete darkroom timing control center which enables you to time your enlargements while simultaneously keeping track of your programmed processing times. It performs its multi-faceted tasks with a microcomputer, programmed and operated by a keyboard which you will master in a matter of minutes. It permits you to program into its memory bank an almost infinite number of sophisticated timing procedures according to your own personal procedure requirements, providing the ultimate control in making enlargements, and processing both prints and films. You are not restricted to pre-set audio alarms which may not match your processing techniques. The Spiratone Darkroom Director is by far the most advanced instrument of its kind, taking full advantage of the latest state-of-the-art microcomputer technology.
DIRECTOR
The Darkroom Director's capabilities and specifications: PROCESSING MODE SPECIFICATIONS
ENLARGING MODE . SPECIFICATIONS
• Ten programmable steps — up to 100 minutes each, in 1 second increments • Three independent audio signals — user-programmable. Use to signal drain times, end of each step • 30-second signal for film agitation, user-selectable • Automatic display and hold of next program step when countdown reaches zero • Easy programming and review, sequentially via the ADVANCE key or random access to any step via the PROGRAM key and numeral keys
• Range: from .1 second to 10 minutes in .1 second increments • Three independent audio signals — user-programmable. Use to signal dodging, burning-in times, etc. • 1-second metronome, user-selectable audio option • Pushbutton Focus/Time control • Outlets for enlarger, safelight, 400W capacity each • Safelight automatically shuts off whenever enlarger is on • Auto reset after exposure
GENERAL SPE CIFICATIONS • Large count-down digital display, four high visibility characters (safelight red) • Glow-in-dark keyboard and legends for easy operation in the dark • START. STOP timer control. • RESET key, • LED mode indicators for Enlarging and Processing. • MODE key for selecting Enlarging or Processing functions. Alternate timing function is available during timing sequence of other function, enlarging or processing. You can expose a print while in the middle of a Processing step! Or start processing while a print is being exposed.
• Timing accuracy if- 0.005%. That means that if you set a time of 60 seconds, the maximum error will be 3 thousandths of a second! Even at the longest time setting of 99 min., 99 sec. (processing mode), the maximum error is less than 1/3 sec.!!! • Memory-Save function — all programmed times are retained in memory as long as Director is not unplugged. • 105-125 VAC 60 Hz 5W, 2W Standby; easily convertible to 50 Hz operation. 6' grounded AC cord. • Three outlets — for enlarger, safelight and footswitch. • Provision for optional mounting bracket
. . . "The Spiratone timer is more than just a super-accurate digital version of your everyday timer. It's been designed with an eye to the future and a rsal awareness of how we work in the darkroom." says DARKROOM MAGAZINE in its enthusiastic two page report. ii•• Even if you own — or purchased — the most 'sophisticated' enlarging and program timers available till now, you do not have instruments which can provide (even in two separate units) the vast array of benefits provided by this single, compact, simple-to-use and inexpensive Spiratone Darkroom Director.
Footswitch, Order No. 135429 Bracket, Order No. 135445
$15.95 $ 5.95
Shpg. Wt. 1 lb. each
SAVE
r obo m s wei toc sh caonrdn. oOtr doeormfoo ot rin a c t aonnd pay for
50 0/0 BOTH, on ly
s i o 95
In POPULAR PHOTOGRAPHY, Elinor Stecker reviewed the Darkroom Director in glowing terms, explaining the simplicity of its use and the sophistication of its applications. "Now that I've become accustomed to using this computerized wonder, I don't want to work without it."
ELECTRONIC • CONTROLS your exposures with split second accuracy throughout the two clickstopped ranges from .1 to 9.9 seconds in .1 second increments and from 1 to 99 seconds in 1 second increments. Luminescent markings for darkroom visibility. • REPEAT exposures by just tapping START button, no need to reset time. • OUTLET FOR OPTIONAL ACCESSORY FOOTSWITCH for hands-free starting of exposure, facilitating dodging and burning in. • RESET BUTTON aborts exposure and resets to the full set exposure time. • SAFELIGHT automatically turns off during exposure or focusing. • 400W capacity for enlarger or safelight. • LED 1 second visible "metronome" aids dodging, etc. • SOLID STATE — unaffected by normal variations in line voltage (105-125 VAC, 60 Hz) and temperature. Spiratone's Timer measures 8x3 14x4 1/2 " and can be used on table, shelf or wall mounted via an optional mounting bracket. Made in the U.S.A.
of the strip under the individual scratch-proof, holddown tabs. Accepts single or double weight WO" paper. Hinged,
heavy optical plate glass with metal edge is locked under pressure to assure total contact between the negative strips and the paper on the foam padded base. Shpg. Wt. 6 lbs. See also the Proofile Printer on page 35
38
ONE OF THE MOST EFFICIENT, EASIEST AND FASTEST TO USE The All Metal
MULTI-SIZE EASEL
for making both same size prints in quick succession and for making multiple 5x7", 4x5", 3 1/2)(5" or 21/2/(31/2" bordered prints on standard 8x10" paper. With our substantially constructed (wt. 8 lbs.), allmetal,durably finished easel, you can make multiple prints moving the easel; this gives you the —up to 6 2 1/2x3 1/2"—without supreme advantage over other easels .which require repositioning and recomposing after each exposure. With the Multi-Size Easel all your prints will be identically cropped. Only the paper carrier, with its positive pin registration for each print position, moves! Paper is simply slid into paper card,, by means of funnel-shaped guides, shifted within easel for multiple exposures, removed with paper ejector (without emulsion ieing touched) after the final exposure or to dark-store the paper when changing originals, refocusing, or recomposing the image. Complete with steel masks for making 2 —5x7s, 4 — 4x5s, 4 — 3 1/nr5s, 6 — 2V2 x3 1/2 s ....
$64.95
Shpg. Wt. 9 lbs.
Spbotb e PRINT-ALL ENL. EASEL g
®
• BORDERLESS • MULTI PRINT • TESTSTRIPPER • MULTI SIZE 5x7, 3Y2 x5, 2 1/2x3% The only truly innovative design breakthrough in multiple print easels in a decade! The Print-All easel allows you to efficiently utilize an 8x10 sheet of enlarging paper to print in any desired combination, one 8x10, 2-5x7's, 4-3 1/2x5's or 8-21/20 1/2 (wallets) images of the same or different originals. Just imagine the savings in time and materials! Plus — you get the extra image area that the borderless formatting provides Focusing and composing is done on the cover plates and focus is automatically maintained by a clever lift mechanism that brings the paper up to the proper height for exposure. To top it all off, the Print-All comes complete with a teststrip printing attachment that gives you 5 different exposures on a 3 1/2x5 print (that's 20 different xposures per 8x10). All this convenience, all this $2495 savings in time and materials for only Shpg. Wt. 4 lbs. Order No. 113506
4
ENLARGING EASEL
1 1 1 For rapid working wits fixed sizes, the 4 in 1 is it! 2 1/2 01/2", 3 1/2)(5", 50 on one side, 8x10 on the other. Sturdy all metal construction with rubber feet; platens hold te On paper in place for foolproof inserting. Order No. 113352 4U.UU
SOLID STATE CIRCUITRY PROVIDES THESE FUNCTIONS:
Your very first print will be proof positive of the convenience in using the PRINTER-PROOFER. No misaligned, unmanageable strips, no awkward handling to insert negatives into grooves or under, sticky masks. The 35 PRINTER-PROOFER aligns each strip of 6 negatives automatically, holding the strip at both ends — you simply slide the end
Choose the easel or easels to meet your printing requirements
Spiratone Darkroom Director Order No. 135364
Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs.
high accuracy and quality construction at low cost
35:PRINTER-PROOFERIN
THERE'S A SPIRATONE EASEL FOR EVERY PURPOSE
Quality construction, reliability and a wealth of features for only $ Order No. 135410
n
$u
95
$67.95
ADJUSTABLE ENLARGING EASELS 8x10"
worker
Shpg. 1f t. 5 lbs.
Special Footswitch $15.95 Wall and under-shelf mounting bracket 5.95 on 3 piece Outfit: Timer, FootAVE switch, Bracket — Order No. 135488, all for o nly Shpg. Wt., Timer 3 lbs , Out/it 5 lbs.
S
for thetast
11x14"
Spiratone's adjustable all metal easels feature steel masking bands, full adjustability, variable margin widths, positive margin stops, plus automatic paper-grabbing and holding device for slip-proof, rapid working. Large legible calibrations, fine sturdy construction. 8x10" Model sb. Wt. Order No. 113581 5 lbs. 11x14" Model, same as above for prints up to 11x,:". Oilier No. 113654 Shpg. Wt. 8 lbs.
$17.98
$24.98
SPEED-EZ-EL
Far speediest work with fixed size enlargements,
Extremely compact, each easel is tailored to make a specific size print and is no larger than the paper itself. Paper is inserted from either end, eliminating cumbersome border clamps. Yields Vo" margins. 2 1/2 531/2 3 1/255 455 591 8x10 11x14 16x20 20524
$5.45 $6.45 $6.95 $8.95 $10.45 $12.95 $33.95 $49.95
Shipping Weights, each sizes to 5x7, 1 lb., 8x10 2 lbs., 11x14 4 lbs., 16320 7 lbs., 20x24 10 lbs.
NOW YOU CAN MAKE PROFESSIONALLOOKING, BOROERLESS PRINTS WITH THE ,Cpbtotexe
11x14"
BORDERLESS EASEL
Model J
Provides the elegance, convenience and economy of full size "bleed" prints without having to trim off borders, wasting time and paper. For making color or b&w prints 2 1/2 x2 1/2" to 11x14" Durable all metal construction with non-skid base. Single magnetic bar provides fast, easy size adjustment. Operates on the "cone of light" principle, enabling you to hold the paper flat on the egsel, while still allowing the beam of light from your enlarging lens to expose the paper right up to the very edges, without any margins. Doubles as copyboard to hold originals for copying. Order No. 112658 Shpg. Wt. 4 lbs. $13.95
Spiratone Proudly Presents . . . a Precision
Color Enlarger DICHROIC HEAD, SIX FORMAT
at the most affordable price of
Model 67 0 LPL
e
including al urdgiinngg quartz
95
Carriers, lenses extra - see below
Air dry your color or b&w prints with the archival, fiberglass screen
piiltatoge STACKRACKTM DRYER
FNEs-r1) 6tftge STAINLESS STEEL
AND ACCESSORIES
REELSandTANKS COST SO LITTLE! 110 (16:)-35:120
STAINLESS S EEL*4)::411EEL
Spiratone Stainl ss St el REEL are precision made and compatible with most any bra d stainles steel tanks. Skeleton spiral design allows easy loa ing, maximum circulation of chemicals. Used by
housands of am tears and pro essionals, by studios and laboratories. • S hpg. Wt.: 1 or 2 reel, s tie lb., 4reela, .1 , lbs. Ptgatst STAINLESS STEEL °r
At last, an affordable, compact, efficient system for air drying all your prints - fibre base, resin coated, color
or black and white, up to 20x24". Lightweight, yet sturdy, the STACK-RACK dryer is constructed of washable, non-absorbing, inert fibreglass screening stretched on well constructed aluminum frames. The three drying screens, each 2 Ax20 /4 , accommo3 16x20's or even 3 date 18 8x10's (or 6 11x14's" of table space. The 20024's) in less than 4 s be stored flat in a unit sets up in "a min 2302701 /2 " packag acking 2 or 3 Double or triple e,..4,able space. units for up to 3 Open on all four hem natural air flow; yet, for faster F Puse of a hair dryer or auxiliary blower a -ffective. Spiratone STACK-RACK 5 lbs each . Order No. 112402 Order No. 112429 2 far $55.95
Order No.114073
Unlike enlargers 'made to sell at a price', the 67D LPL is a featureladen, precision dichroic enlarger, utilizing a sturdy chassis, an extruded aluminum inclined girder and a carriage which smoothly rides on nylon bearings. It is capable of producing color and b&w prints rivaling in quality those obtainable with enlargers costing many times as much. The 67D LPL, by means of custom carriers for each format, accepts all negatives and slides from 110 and 35mm through 6x7cm (most inexpensive 'color' enlargers are for 35mm only).
$29.95
RAPID
PRINT WASHER
Takes prints up to 11x14" - provides quick, thorough washing - adj. faucet eler:, attachment. Shpg. 5 lbs. 41./../ 16x20" model, accommodates larger $1895 quantities of smaller prints, as well as Prints up to 16x20".
t o 05
In.
TANK and REEL COMBINATIONS $9.90 1 lb. 2" Tank with 1 35mm reel 12.90 1 lb. with 2 110 reels 11.90 2 lbs. 3 /2 " Tank with 1 120 reel 14.50 2 lbs. with 2 35mm reels 20.50 4 lbs. 7" Tank with 2 120 reels includes LIFT RID with 4 35mm reels 26.50 5 lbs. QUANTITY Buy $16 or more, take a 10% Discount off prices DISCOUNTS ON above (even off Buy $30 or more, take a 15% the S.S. REELS combi and Buy $50 or more, fake a 20% quantity prices) AND TANKS To qualify, you must specify 'S.S. Volume Discount' when ordering
f. 7 lbs.
pinitelge DEVELOPING TRAYS Rigid, acid resistant plastic trays ample size for prints up to:
8X10" 3 for $4.50 The diffusion illumination system features a line-voltage, diode controlled lamp circuit for long lamp life and trouble-free operation. The multi-mirrored quartz-halogen lamp feeds a mixing chamber which totally integrates the filtered light and, with the efficient diffusion plate, effectively suppresses negative scratches and minor dust specks.
OTHER PROFESSIONAL FEATURES OF THE 610 LPL INCLUDE: • White Light Focusing control which instantly retracts the filters from the light path without disturbing their setting while allowing maximum brightness for critical focusing; a push of a knob restores pre-selected filtration. • Single control carriage lock and counter-balanced elevation system lets you scale and compose with a twist of the hand. • All filtration controls are color coded and illuminated.
But there is much more still to the 67D LPL: • MAKE MURALS. Reverse girder for floor projection or swing head 90° and project onto the wall USE AS for virtually any magnification or print size desired.
• USE AS COPYSTAND. Detach projection assembly by loosening just one knob and you have an efficient copystand for cameras up to 4X5" format.
COPY-
STAND
r
MAKE DUPLICATES
tach illumination module, place it on baseboard upside down and you have not only a professional source of illumination, with complete filtration control in duplicating, but the copying stand for the camera as well.
6 for $8.10
Order No. 136352
11X14" 3 for
Shpg
$8,00
N „--
-..--------
Shpg.
6 for $14.40
7th,. Shpg. Ir/t. 10 lb,
PRO 16X20" TRAY
Order No. 136492
DRAIN
With Unbreakable Styrene with built-in drain for easy emptying. Use also as a wash tray 3
Shpg
$12 .95 ea.
Wt. 4 lbs
for $35.95
Shpg. Wt, 10 lbs.
WRWASHER BASE for ALL your washing needs Its swirling, aerated water action washes film in as little as 5, RC prints in 2 minutes. Connects to any 4 /]6 " outside diameter tube color processing drum with removable caps - Spiratone, Ciba, Devtec, etc. Includes ba, 30" hose, std. faucet fitang. Order No. 136778 Sh.W1. 1 lb. t
3
se
$10.9.5
Complete
Auto Agitating
OTHER SPECIFICATIONS: • Maximum magnification on • Standard Leica-thread lens 17 /4 " x 17 /4 " baseboard, with board, accepts Spiratone Reso50mm lens from 35mm, 11x14"; max, all other Spiratone and with 75mm lens from 6x6cm, other brand Leica-thread enlarg14x17". ing lenses. • Electrical input 120 volt, 50• Double rail focusing mechan60 Hz. ism assures continued accurate alignment. ACCESSORIES FOR THE 67D LPL: Hinged, glassless custom carriers for individual sizes; specify 35mm, 2x2" slide, 110, 126, 6x6cm, 6x4.5cm, 6x7cm each $19.95, any two for $37.95 Extra 85W 82V enlarging lamps each $16.95, two for $30.95 Print-All easel (see page 38) $24.95 Focusing Rail, Basic Quadrail A [for precise camera movements in copying], (see page 26) $43.95 $ 5.95 Dust Cover
1
Shpg, W's 4 lb,
C ---- -'
CENTER TUBES, TO FIT BASE Model 81 for prints up to 8x10 or up to 6 35mm reels -----itk„.r.,00-° or equiv. Order No. 136786 Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs. $4.95 Model 161, for prints up to 11x14 or up to 12 35mm reels or equiv. Order No. 136794 Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. $6.95
• MAKE DUPLICATES WITH DICHROIC LIGHT- SOURCE. Remove projection assembly, de-
1
Loading 35mm or 120 Stainless Steel Reels is a pleasure with this handy
DUAL SIZE
REEL LOADER
Snap either size reel into the spring loaded crank. Shaped film guides cup the film for foolproof loading. Order No. 128309
$1195 Nh7 f. 11. WHEN ORDERED WITH $25 OR MORE $995 OFSRELANDTKPYOL
3 lbs.
STAINLESS
STEEL THERMOMETERS FOR TANK AND TRAY USE
1
'Stem' model, 6" long stem, 1 /2 " dia. dial, calibr. from 30-120°F. Accurate within 1° $6.48 Shpg. 1/2 lb. ea. 'Ultra precise' Dial model, 8" long stem, 21/2" dia. luminescent dial, calibr. from 60-160°F in 1° graduations; provision for easy recalibrating $9.95 Clean negatives, transparencies, film, film holders, enlargers, optics by ridding them of 'static' and dust at the same time
Staticmaster Brushes illr4w--
Strip of polonium neutralizes static charge on the surface. Neutralized surfaces remain free of dust and lint until recharged by rubbing or handling. Staticmaster is a tool for removing static electricity . the camel's- hair bristles are used only for removing neutralized dust particles. 1" Staticmaster Model 4IC200 Order No. 130311 $9.95 3" Staticmaster, professional size, stainless steel polonium housing; shaped to fit the hand. Order No. 130451 19.95 1" Polonium Cartridge Replacement. Order No. 130389 5.95 3" Polonium Cartridge Replacement. Order No. 130478 12.95 Shpg. Irts. Brush 1/4 lb.; Cartridge 1/4 lb.
COMPLETE INDEX ON PAGE 25
MOTORIZED
DUAL 8X1 0
scio5
DRUM) 1 ixi4Tug
3
Spiratone Color Analyzer/Meter-Timer (see page 43 for details), reg. $250.00, when purchased at same time as enlarger $200.00
Spiratone Resomax 50mm f/2.8 6 element enlarging lens (for description of Resomax, other enlarging lenses, see page 42) $ 59.95
SAVE! Buy any of the above accessories including enlarging lenses (except Color Analyzer), at the same time and take a
Shipping W
3
of heavy gauge laboratory steel,
easy handling plastic cap/cover for quick pouring of chemicals in daylight through lightproof baffle. WOO 2" Mode , (holds 1 35mm, 2 110 reels) $7.50 1 lb. 31/2" Mo el, (holds 2 35mm, 1 120 reel) 9.50 1 lb. 7" Mode ,* (holds 4 35mm, 2 120 reels) 15.50 3 lbs. 12" Mod I,* (holds 8 35mm, 4 120 reels) 23,50 4 lbs. IIII 17" Model,* (holds 11 35mm, 6 120 reels) 30.50 5 lbs.
1
It offers continuously variable, stepless, dichroic filtration from 0-170, in Cyan, Magenta and Yellow - no need trying to figure out which filters to combine and place in the filter drawer (and even then not getting the exactly needed values).
as the 67D LPL
so TANKS
3
Shpg. Wt. 20 and 10 ibs. (shipped in 2 boxes)
19 N P.
LOTS 5 OR MORE T
& 1-4 $3.18 ea.
off the
10% DISCOUNT accessory prices.
WITH WATER JACKET TEMPERATURE MAINTENANCE Every professional system depends on motorized agitation and temperature maintenance for consistent, repeatable, predictable color quality - the Spiratone motorized drum system provides both at un believably low cost without the need for a costly thermostat/heater. And it's compatible with every current and anticipated color system. It includes a cleverly designed water jacket suspension tray which helps maintain Order No. 105007 temperatures of drum and solutions for the duration of tha process within the temperatare working range. A 110 v. AC motorized drum agitator, an 8x10" drum, instantly Shpg. 0"i. 12 1b,. convertible to process one 11x14" or two 8x10"'s, and 5 six ounce containers with permanen ly attached caps (no more loss or mixing up of caps!), securely cradled in a handy rack within the- temperature maintaining suspension tray. All of the above - the convertible 8x10/11x14 drum, motorized agitator, and temperature maintaining water jacket are priced at the remarkably low price of $54.95.
Motorized BIG PRINT Processing System
fanrd CE=1 R Now you can process those really large 16x20's and 20x24's, color or black & white prints, in only 16x24" of countertop area. The Spiratone Big Print Processing System is similar in construction and use to the above Color Print Processing System but everything is scaled up to handle 16x20" and 20x24" prints in the single tube. Motorized BIG PRINT Processor Order No. 111007 Shpg. 1r/. 1 a lb'.
$109.95
39
Darkroom—Sinks, Fans, Vents patAla U11,:witiss DARKR
oom SINKS
Every darkroom worker needs an electrostatic air cleaner —
Spiratone offers a choice of sink styles and sizes to meet most any darkroom requirement. All are thermoformed, heavy gauge one piece ABS plastic; sturdy, acid resistant, with ribbed bottom and drain hole. All include drain assemblies complete with grill covers; fit standard drainpipe plumbing and accept optional stand-pipe drain to convert into an efficient washer. „STANDARD MODEL R
pikotose State of
the Art
ELECTRONIC
48x24x5"
Inside dimensions 45x21x4 3/4 ", accommodates 3 11x14", 6 8x10", or 2 16020" trays.
AIR CLEANER v'itsit'a
(UPS Shpg. cost based on 25 lbs.)
AO • MODEL XL 60x28x5" Built-in mounting.
dimensions osn se 57x25x 434". shelf for faucet
Net Wt. 20 lbs. Most be shipped by motor freight. See pg. 24. 5159 PROFESSIONAL MODEL
72x271/4"
175
(outside dimension), including well which measures 18024x10Va" deep on inside, 1/2" gradient from far end to well for drainage.
Must be shipped by motor freight. See pg.2
SUPER PROFESSIONAL MODEL 96x28x5" for the large studio or processing lab Extra heavy 1/2" ABS plastic for strength and rigidity. Center drainage and shelf for faucet mounting
ticmhearcaosal/Acirhe Tliecaanl e fir Rae and SAVE! get 2 for only $9.95 Shpg. Wt. 1 1/ lbs.
ELIMINATE DUST
$279
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES for above sinks
Here's a powerful air compressor for all your photographic cleaning needs. A one time investment that will quickly pay for itself in eliminating the need for expensive liquid propellant supplies. The compressor is an AC powered piston-type compressor with a permanently lubricated 1/8 HP motor. A pressure valve activates the compressor when needed, shuts it off when the nozzle's trigger is released. Since it uses no Freon, it is environmentally sound and its filtered intake makes it totally safe for cleaning delicate optics, even camera mirrors! without the danger of having freezing liquid sprayed on them. IOW, AIR COMPRESSOR $ 11599 Order No. 111201 ,..:^.r-:it.
Shpg. Wts.: 33 lbs., 40 lbs., 45 lbs., 45 lbs.
Shpg. Wt. 9 lbs.
m e time snesidnckoasnt.d isittra d$;t5sfrom SAVE $25! DEDUCT 9!
Here is a compact, budget-priced film dryer with a big enough capacity to satisfy the large studio's and commercial and industrial photographer's requirements, yet compact enough to fit into most darkrooms or small workrooms. Measuring only 14 1/4 "D x 23 1/2 "W, it supplies over . 22 feet of film hanging rack capacity — at 2" per 35mm film, its capacity is over 125 rolls of 35mm film (up to 36 exposure lengths) which may be hung full length. Thermostatically controlled (factory-preset), hee ad, filtered, forced air drying takes place in a 75" loog, vinyl enclosure which is zippered for easy access. The built-in timer can be used to preset drying time for up to one hour of cool drying or two hours of thermostatically controlled (factory pre-set) heated drying so you can leave your darkroom or workroom without worrying about overdrying. You can mount the dryer by means ;Ina °U rn' GiarTE, of only four screws on any wall LIGHT FILTER surface; it requires 8 " in height lus 2" for (80" for the cabin air intake clear en not in use, it folds the wall. rofes No doubt, the sional tm Drying 'Ca ' is a ugh top .price for th 0 may ti le kiore ull ge owelor the capaciV,An activeOprofessional kV0-120 VAC temperature — 8 IttA%,..d 110.120°F7Qp Order No. 1013
Shpg. Wt. 20 lbs.
Order No. 112321 2 Stainless Steel Film Clips
or 2.75
Shpg. Wts. 3/.., lb.; 1 16.12 for $6.95 Shpg. Wts. Stainless Steel Weighted Film Clips 4 for $3.50 12 for $9.95 Vs lb.; l% lbs. 40
WITH OUR
S CONOMICAL
AIR COMPRESSOR
FAUCET SE washerless, noncorrodable, easy to install $24.95 STANDPIPE DRAIN—plugs into drain, converts sink into $9.95 efficient washer CUSTOM SINK STANDS—Heavy duty, metal braced stands custom cradle the sink for a totally stable unit. for Standard Model R ..$109.95 for Professional Model .$129.95
PPROFESSIONAL 6trise FILM DOYI NO"CABINET
ing action
SPECIAL at saemxtera
Net Wt. 30 lbs. Must be shipped by motor might. See pg. 24.
NEWS
gee fficclieeannt
The Electronic Air Cleaner's 60 CFM centrifugal air blower will recirculate the air in the average darkroom (6'07'08') over ten times per hour! In fact, in a room as large as 21'021'08', it will clean the air once an hour! As the air moves through the cleaner, it is first mechanically filtered of dust, pollen, soot, mold spores and lint by a permanent, washable filter. This is about as much as most of the socalled 'air cleaners' will clean. But the Spiratone Electronic Air Cleaner doesn't stop there; the electrostatic precipitator (also washable) will then electronically remove smaller pollutants, such as bacteria, smoke, insecticide dust, even some viruses. The third filtering step is accomplished by a charcoal/chemical filter (effective for up to six months) to trap and destroy gases and noxious odors. And the entire filtering system is contained in a drawer which slides out for easy access when cleaning is required. Our Air Cleaner is particularly effective in neutralizing formaldehyde and acetic acid odors, a capability which will be especially appreciated by the darkroom worker. Its 3-speed blower enables you to quickly 'scrub' the air (on high) and then continue the cleaning action on a quiet low setting. Thanks to its energy-conscious design, it uses only 40 watts at 120v, 60 Hz. Modern design complements any decor, light weight for shelf or table; upward clean air discharge allows for unit's placement against wall or cabinet. Quiet 3 speed AC Fan, 4 position selector switch, modern functional styling in a 15 3/4"x9"x4 1/8" cabinet Order No. 101753 Shpg. Wt. 10 lbs. $129.95
909 mwt STANDARD
AIR POWER deans– -Negatives, Slides, Eq uipment
And if retouching is your bag, the $14.95 airbrush accessory puts you in business. Airbrush attachment for Compressor ti4 95 Order No. 111244 %pi
Shpg.Wt.11/2 lbs.
11p ..
‘..:
Vin ,,, ,-;,-...- '''
FREE '800'ee ORDER PHONE
_ All the power of a commercial compressor without the noise, expense. 12 oz replaceable can gives hundreds of bursts. Permanent precision trigger nozzle puts air where it is needed. Shpg. In. 2 lby. Oust-Off Set, Order No. 140198 $18 95 Replacement 12 oz. can, Order No. 140252 $3.95 24" extension nozzle for hard-to-get-at 'interior' cleaning, Order No. 140368 $3.95
PRO DUST-OFF SYSTEM
The darkroom/studio dusting system complete with 32 oz. can, 8 foot extension \ hose, special nozzle and trigger mechanism, as well as bracket which firmly holds the can in place on a counter- cA I GC top or wall. Order No. 148171 ,pw..-iya 32 oz. Replacement can $9.95 Order No. 140244 Shipping 4 lbs., 3 lb:. Note: 32 oz. can CANNOT be used with standard Dust-Off valve assembly.
POCKET SIZE DUST-OFF — the handy 3 oz. size with all the power of the big can. Keep one in your gadget bag at all times. $1.98 — 2 for $3.75 Pocket Dust-Off, Order No. 140341
The5katle
Super ComforterTM
DARKROOM VENTILATOR
T BEIT Whether your darkroom is larger than average, or you use ., chemicals that are particularly' ••• odoriferous, you'll readily I. change the air with the Spiratone Super Comforter dark . . room ventilator. This light tight unit will exhaust up to 300 cubic feet per minute and is made of corrosion proof stainless steel, finished in black to reduce reflections. Its 5 bladed 8" diameter fan is fully l enclosed for safety and is pow- Super Comforter ered by a heavy duty, self Order No.101818 lubricating motor. The 13%x Shpg. Wt. 10 lbs. 133/8 05 1/4 " (overall) housing fits into a 12" square wall opening and is provided with an AC pigtail connection. 110v 60 Hz. For maximum exhaust efficiency, we recommend you install an appropriate air intake. The Spiratone Super Breather (see below) is the ideal 'companion' for this task.
95
SPIRATONE COMFORTER
1t /4bs;:: T our standard DARKROOM VENTILATOR made to our specifications by a major domestic manufacturer of exhaust fantures a super ,,. quiet fan, powered by uty, virtually maintenance-free mo The Spiratone e_exhausts 50 CFM, mor he , fume i lad pdgrkroom and 1i1i maintains h air. Suit- 110v 60Hz Order No. able for mo ng on a shelf, with only a three 111139 inch diameter hol the ventilator includes decorative 91/2 81/2" grill, matte black housing and elbow, quiet plastic impeller, and bared wire leads for power' supply. A small investment for a lifetime of comfort at only
24"
S
The
gpikofroe ENLARGING \ FOCUSER 57.98 FOR SHARPEST ENLARGEMENTS Utilizes aerial image system by focusing on grain — perfect focus can be determined even from unsharp negatives and at the biggest magnifications. Order No.122823 Sh. Wt. 1/2 lb.
Recommended Reading
sqp(koto . ge
Test strips with one single exposure KODAK PROJECTION PRINT SCALE
$5.25
c
65
A negative divided Into 10 sec. tors of varying density, each Indicating a different printing time. Produces accurate test strip with single exposure. Order No. 123595
KODAK COMPLETE
Darkroom Dataguide
A combination of the earlier Color and Black & White Dataguides, providing a wealth of the latest information on everything you need to know or figure out about processing. In addition to detailed instructions on how to use color and b&w materials, the Dataguide includes 12 sample prints (color and b&w), calculators for enlarging and developing time, color balance posters for printing color negatives and color i transparencies.
s n or
SUPER BREATHER
Perfect companion to the Super Comforter, usable in conjunction with the Darkroom Comforter, or even by itself, the Super Breather is a lightproof 9 1/2 091/201 //2 " overall metal louver (fits 7 1/2 0.7 1/2 " opening), especially designed to aid in darkroom ventilation. Super Breather Set of 2, Order Order No. 101567$14.95 No.101575
Shpg. Wt. 3 1 lbs. each
27.95
Economy Darkroom Breather
4 inch diameter lightproof, all metal louver installs in a simple 4 inch hole in door or wall—use — -4 one or. better still, several to create airflow.
Ea. $4.95, 2 for $9.25
AIR FLOW
Shpg.
lb. each
INSTANT PRINTS
from your TV, VIDEO CAMERA, VCR for under 20 each. Full information on page 19
Darkroom-Cutters, Safelights, Bulk Film, Loader USIFUL ACCESSORIES YOUR DARKRC AA 1
,
STAINLESS STEEL FILM CLIPS, 4 for $2.75 /4 lb. regular 12 for $6.95 1 lb. STAINLESS STEEL WEIGHTED CLIPS, hold films straight while drying. 4 for $3.50 1/2 lb. 12 for $9.95 1 /2 lbs. FILM SQUEEGEE, with cellulose sponge. 2.25 /2 lb. 1061Watie 10" PRINT TONGS, pair $ . 00 2/2 lb.
1
S
1
PHOTO SPONGE, a special high absorbency sponge for wiping negatives, slides, prints; also for general cleaning up in darkroom. 4 for $5.00 1/2 lb. MINI GRADS - set of 10 polyethylene graduates ranging in capacity from 20 oz. to 1 oz.; also calibrated in ml. 10 pc. set $5.50
1
/2 lb. GRADUATES, LABORATORY GRADE - Sturdy, rigid polyethelene, with handle, large pouring lip. Calibrated in ounces and molded cc scale. 2 liter (68 oz.) $ 7.75 1/2 liter (17 oz.) $3.75 1 liter (34 oz.) 4.50 5 liter (170 oz.) 18.50 Shpg. Int.: /2, /2, 1 and 2 lbs. PLASTIC POLYETHYLENE Each, 3 or more CHEMICAL BOTTLES Each may be assorted 1 gal. size $2.00 $1.75 (ea.) 2 lbs. /2 gal. size 1.35 1.20 (ea.) 2 lbs. 32 oz. size 1.00 90 (ea.) 11b. 16 oz. size .85 .75 (ea.) 1 lb. AIR-EVAC COLLAPSIBLE BOTTLES 1 gal. size 4.95 . . 4.50 (ea.) 2 lbs. 1/2 gal. size 3.95 3 70 (ea.11/2.1bs.) 32 oz. size 3 50 3.30 (ea.) 1 lb.
1 1
1
CHEMICAL CONTAINER/DISPENSER-store and dispense chemicals easily. Gallon capa0 city, reusable, non-osmotic double walled MO. OSMOTIC plastic bag in sturdy cardboard case. Convenient dispensing valve. (Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.) $2.29 FILTER FUNNEL - 16 oz. capacity, poly_ ethylene construction with fine mesh stainless steel filter (Shpg. Wt. /2 lb.) . . $2.65 ADJUSTABLE VIGNETTER, eliminates background around V principal subject, usually portrait. r..\_ Size and shape of opening variable to produce different effects. (Shpg. Wt. 1/2 lb.) 11;:V;, $3.95 DODGING KIT, contains various sizes and shapes of opaque material to selectively lighten portions of picture being enlarged. 1/4 lb.) $2.50 (Shpg.
THE AMATEUR'S "PROFESSIONAL"
eAFELIGHT
ANTI-INFLATION MACHINE CUTS YOUR FILM COSTS and
u
16.9
SAFELIGHT FILTERS
OA - YELLOW-GREEN for regular enlarging papers • OC - AMBER for variable contrast papers • RED for ortho films and special papers • #10 - DARK AMBER - for most color materials and Panalure paper • =13 - Special AMBER - brighter, safe illumina. tion for Ektacolor 74 RC, 78 Papers • ORANGE for contact papers SPIRATONE glass sandwich 5x7 filters available in Yellow-green, Orange, Red, Amber, Dark Amber, (#10 equivalent), 5x7 $ .00 Special Amber (#13 equivalent).
8 $8.00
SAVE ON MULTI FILTER OUTFITS
SAFELIGHT
and
SPiratone
Ill ar21 y and two other Spiratone filters INCL. 'OC' (total 31, please specify
$22.95 Shpg
9c Or $ 26. 95
7 lb'.
State of- SODIUM VAPOR the-art
SAFELIGHT
for the brightest, yet totally sate, darkroom illumination 7" diameter faceplate swivels 90' to direct illumination where needed. Calibrated variable intensity control can be set to match the sensitivity of any b&w enlarging paper as well as of all negative type color papers. Whether you stand it on a shelf, mount it on a wall, or hang it from a ceiling, you II have the most practical, Shpg. 5 lbs. the most useful, the safest safelight the professional darkroom worker could ever dream of. 120V, 60 Hz, 35W, 5' grounded power cord,
$149.95 95
o
1
/
DARKROOM BLACKOUT MATERIAL,
opaque, heavy black vinyl, 4'x16'. Shpg. Wt. 2
lbs.$11.95
LARGE
SAFELIGHT
Swivel bracket mounting allows use on wall or shelf; may also be hung from ceiling. Complete safelight outfit includes "OC" type filter (for b&w enlarging papers), 6 ft. cord with Order No. 124257 9c on/off switch and 25 watt bulb, Shpg. wt. 9 lbs. including chain for hanging Kodak 10x12" satelight filters. avail. in most colors, ea. $42.95
$43
KODAK POLYCONTRAST5 x5" sset of 4 filters (1 2 , 3. 4 ) , cut cu fit most filter drawers.
PRINTING FILTERS $22.95 siV
Ca ANGING BAG
"The Portable Darkroom" Double zippered inner and outer bag with elastic sleeves100% lightproof. Use in emergency, for reloading cut film holders, for developing film when no darkroom is available.
STANDARD MODEL 17x16" working space Order No. 101966 Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
$7 50
PRO MODEL 26x29" working space Order No.102032 Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs.
$11.50
SUPPLILS FOR PRINT NEGATIVE SPOTONE. For retouching (darkening parts of) negatives and spotting all paper surfaces incl. glossy. Set of 3 1/2 oz. bottles (ass't shades). $3.95 SPOT-OFF. Controllable two 1 oz. solution bleaching kit for removing dark spots and lightening areas on all paper surfaces, including glossy. $3.25 DYENE. Negative retouching fluid, for 'holding back' areas of negative, to print lighter. Set of three I/2 oz. bottles. $3.95 PERFECT LIQUID OPAQUE. For negatives and slides. For blocking out whole areas such as a background; for adding thin line highlights. Shpg. Wt. % lb. ea. 1 oz. bottle $2.25
RETOUCHING
(4TZME-IgEKIT $12,95 W-,
SAVE 1 lbs. s Includes all 4 of the above for any B&W retouching problem 0 0,
0,
,c00,nnOgd, N Ga r erK h igr a fnpiden en c, rtil outfrtoei ,nr grse pdnoestal iabn:giev ebasr:dsshIceod%r rse# teciluoTcuhc iF lfor
KODAK COLOR For use in evaluating color balance of prints made from color negatives or color slides. Kit includes 6 PRINT VIEWING cards with 3 filters each of 10, 20, and 40 density of one of the six colors - Magenta, Red, Yellow, FILTE R KIT Green, Cyan and Blue; filter cards and instructions for Order No. 105413 use are packaged in 5x9 inch vinyl wallet. $8.00 Shpg. Wt, 116.
COLOR
PRINTING FILTERS 22 Pc. SET
,
Set of 22 3 1/2 03 1/2 " acetate filters for use in enlarger's filter drawer, includes all types of color the filtersrequiredfor e n p r i g-s l v al ues Ye l low , di Magenta, Cyan plus a UV absorbing f i !ter. For color head drawers 3 1/2 03 1/2 " and smaller. Shpg. Wt. 1 th. $19.95 Order No. 105406
WI TH
GpRHAOpTHOicpr
DER PUTTrRS
Essential for every active darkroom, for cutting larger paper for small size prints, for trimming finished prints.
DELUXE LOADER
and you'll have an additional 17 rolls of 20 Exp. film FREE! That's the ECONOMICS of Spiratone's bulkfilm offer. And it's all so simple: after placing bulk roll into Loader, all operations are in ordinary roomlight and you can load any length of film you choose, even short ones. 100' makes about 19 36 or 32 20 exp. rolls! Spiratone's Deluxe Loader is an American-made, high quality instrument for truly scratch-proof loading through an "open" gate light trap. The automatic frame counter counts individual frames, the gate lock is virtually fool-proof. Spiratone 35mm Deluxe Bulkfilm Loader
$13.95
FRESH FACTORY-PACKED 35m KODAK BULKFILM PLUS X or 1 50' ea. $10.95 PANATOMIC Xf 100' ea. $21.25 TRI X 50' ea. $12.00, 100' ea. $23.50 KODALITH 100', for titles, special effects ea. $21.95
ri
EPN 404 ASA 100, Ektachrome Prof. Daylight (E-6) 100' ea. $60.50 EPY 404, ASA 50, Ektachrome Prof. Tungsten (E6) 100' ea. $58.50 EPD 404, ASA 200, Ektachrome Prof. Daylight 1E-61 100' ea. $63.50 EPT 404, ASA 160, Ektachrome Prof. Tungsten (E-6) 100' ea. $63.50 VPS 494, ASA 160, Color Negative (C-411 100' ea. $48.50 VERICOLOR 5072 for slides FROM color pegs. IC-411 100' ea. $54.50 CARTRIDGES (metal, reusable) See below Shpg. Wt.: Loader 2 lbs., Film 50' 3 lbs., 109' 4 lbs., Loader w. film 5 lbs.
wtitohn ey otun r r rase FREE ITEMS a t LOADER & BULKFILM g and 1 WITH LOADER 10 reu sable cartrides AND 50' B&W • FREE Proofiles (cap. 245 negs.)-reg. $4.81 15 reusable cartridges and 14 WITH LOADER AND 100' B&W •.FREE Proofiles (cap. 490 negs.)-reg. $1.86 WITH LOADER 15 reusable cartridges + 10 Heavy Vinyl AND 100' COLOR: FREE Slide File pages (cap. 200 slideslreg. $8.12
CUSTOM ROTARY TRIMMERS
THE ULTIMATE IN PRECISION AND CONVENIENCE Whether you use the trimmer in the darkroom to cut large paper to smaller sizes, or to obtain a neat bordered or borderless finished print, you're bound to appreciate the elegance and accuracy with which the Spiratone Custom Rotary immer performs the task. Its base is of heavy stee♦, 1Yuled in squares. Along the upper side is a large, vas sad scale, gated both in inches and s alignment It-"the material to be cut. millimeters, for e y held in pie,Ott• cutting, by slight finger The material pressure on th ernovable trVttp essure bar adjacent to the s due to paper shifting while cutting edge: n re crook the cut was bein ag e. A ip erful Spiratone Custom magnetic plate serythe ddoublepurRotary Trimmer pose of aligning or ing down the 12" length of cut paper on the other en Order No. QA7 The Spiratone Custom Rotary Trimmer 112100 40 -1. can cut paper down to fine slivers and Shpg. Wt. 9 lbs. is substantially more accurate than 17" length of cut guillotine-type cutters. Its self-sharpenOrder No. ing rotary blade cutting wheel assures 112135 a lifetime of cutting accuracy, is perfectly safe in use. Shpg. Wt. 13 /hr.
95
$62 95
GUILLOTINE TYPE These heavy duty square based cutting boards have replaceable self-sharpening hardened tool steel blades. Sliding top guide for uniform trimming (even in dark), metal rule calibrated in 1/2," graduations, 1/2 " black scored work surface, plus safety guard rail and safety spring loaded blade assembly.
STRAIGHT KNIFE
12" $25.95 15" $37.95 Shpg. Weights: 18" $52.95 24" $78.95 8,10, 20' 28 16s,
F
THE MOST VERSATILE for TITLING, MASKING, POSTERIZATION, SPECIAL AV EFFECTS - simple to use in camera or darkroom
KODALITH
The uses of litho film are endless: creating ultra high contrast images and for Posterization effects or reducing ordinary images to exciting line representations of the original subject. Sandwich a Spiratone Colorgel with your lithp title slides to add color. Litho' film may be developed by inspection under a bright red safelight. Kodalith Ortho 35mm x 100' $21.95 Order No. 603457 Shpg. Wt. 11/4 lbs. Kodak HCS 135 36 Exp. rolls 10.00 3 for Order No. 603449 Shpg. Wt. % lbs. 4x5" Kodalith Ortho Film - box of 50 Order No. 603465 Shpg. Wt. 1 lb Kodalith Developer to make 2 gal. Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs. Order No. Get THE book on using litho film
14.50 8.50
138770
-0(41-TxAST -11GH-L.; IMAGES
puttee
SAVES OVER 60%
YOU'LL SAVE ENOUGH ON YOUR FIRST 100' ROLL OF FILM TO PAY FOR THIS
The smallest (5 ,/4x7 1/4x41/2"), most convenient safelight accepting standard 5x7" interchangeable filters. Swivel bracket mounting for wall or shelf, locks at any required angle. . Complete with "OC" type filter (for black and white enlarging enlarging and contact papers), 6 ft. cord with switch and 15 watt lamp. Shpg. Wt. 5 lbs.
How to Create and Use HIGH-CONTRAST IMAGES
by Elinor Stecker The all-inclusive "bible" of techniques and applications of litho film in creative photography. Ten detailed chapters cover the basics, as well as posterization, line effects, masking, photograms and color slides. Profusely illustrated in color and b&w, 160 pages 81/2x11". Softbound. QC Shpg. Wt. $9•UJ 1% lbs. I . Order No. 704482 FILMS for DUPLICATING - see page 28
REUSABLE 35mm CARTRIDGES LESS THAN Metal outer shell, plastic core, fine quality deep pile lip, perfectly fitting metal caps.
10 FOR 25 FOR 100 FOR 500 FOR 11000 FOR
7
$3.75 $1.15 $2.95 $125.001 $225.00 Shipping Weights per 100 aggro,. 4 lbs.
EACH in quantities of 10001
ECONOMY ROTARY TRIMMERS al "Economy" in price only-a high quality 111.1../ hardened steel, self sharpening rotary trimmer. Sturdily constructed, smooth operating, with special wide holddown plastic strip which automatically clamps the paper at the cutting edge as the wheel moves. No creep of even the thinnest paper, always a straight, even cut. Baked finish steel baseboard calibrated in inches. 12" MODEL - baseboard measures 6x161/2", maximum Cut 12 1/2 ". Shpg. Wt. 31/2 lbs. Order No. 111600 18" MODEL-baseboard measures 602", maximum cut 18". Shpg. W. 5 lbs. Order No. 111635 $49.95
$29.95 41
WHEN YOU NEED AN
Whether you make b&w or color prints,
perfect exposure is a must.
lAwLIwu4wIlww
And with our new, batterypowered, modern design
UNICOLOR DARKROOM EXPOSURE METER
L WW THE CHOICE IS CLEAR...
It's got to be TOPS to maintain the crisp detail, the snap and contrast, the true color of your original negatives or slides, particularly when you make big blow-ups.
When you choose a Spiratone enlarging lens that's exactly what you are getting - TOP QUALITY.
you'll be able to determine printing times (for b&w, color negative and reversal) and proper paper grade (or variable contrast filter) for b&w. No more wasted paper due to incorrect exposure or wrong contrast grade. Works like a conventional hand-held camera exposure meter, but is calibrated by you to your specific equipment, paper etc. Uses CdS cell, provides twin LED (balanced brightness) readout. Choose spot or integrated readings depending on your negative or slide. Usable range from .0001 to 10 foot candles; amply sensitive for even making mural size prints from most 35mm films. Weighs only 7 oz. (with battery), uses standard 9 volts alkaline battery such as Mallory MN 1604 (not included available at 2 for $3.40 from Spiratone). Comes complete with integrator diffusion paddle and easy-to-follow instructions. Don't wait-with today's cost of paper and chemicals this meter will quickly pay for itself.
ar
(less Only t 1 7 •PT • Uw1 battery)
Order No.122718 Shpg. Wt. 1% lbs.
Spiratone enlarging lenses are designed and manufactured to assure flatness of field, excellent contrast and color correction. Coated optics, click stops and standard Leica threaded mount make a Spiratone enlarging lens suitable for most any enlarger.* Only through Spiratone's direct import-to-you selling policy can such top quality be offered at prices half or less than you'd expect to pay. Spiratone lenses have been tested and compare favorably with the top brands. DON'T LET THE LOW PRICES FOOL YOU. Select the focal length required for your film format: l%" (35mm) for single frame (half size) and for greater magnification of portions of larger formats, 2" (50mm) for 35mm, 126; 3" (75mm) for 2 1/4 x2 1/4 " (6x6cm); 6" (150mnn for 4x5"
14" (35mm) f13.5 $11.75 2" (50mm) ff3.5 19.95 3" (75mm) fi3.5 20.95 3'/2" (90mm) f14.5 36.95 6" (150mm) fI4.5 39.95
Shipping Weight, per len,. 1 lb.
SPIKE and SURGE SUPPRESSING MULTIPLE
1,,Ibtoinge,
which reacts in a fraction of a microsecond to safely bypass voltage spikes and surges of up to 2,500 volts, away from your expensive equipment.
VIDEO GAMES
0.E. RECHARGEABLE
NICKEL CADMIUM BATTERIES
Convert your flash - most all your battery operated equipment - to a safe, economical and ecologically beneficial alternative to the uncertainty and expense of replacement 'throw-away' batteries.
G.E. DOUBLE CHARGER
GET BIG REBATES FROM G.E.
• every 2 G.E. batteries • BC2 or BC4 Charger
.LEICA threaded FLANGE to attach to non-Leica threaded lensboard of old enlargers $1.95
pikottot RESOMAr5OnnIfi2.8 I VITION ENLARGING LENS RES O
For the ultra critical printer, we've selected a fast, superbly corrected, six element lens which provides excellent contrast, an exceptionally flat field and outstanding correction for lateral and longitudinal color, flare and distortion. In both practical and bench tests, our lens equalled or outperformed most other 'top brand' over $100 lenses and we confidently recommend it for the most demanding b&w or color darkroom worker. Spiratone 50mm f/2.8 Resomax Enlarging tra ar Lens, Leica-mount Shpg. Wt. % lb. 41.M.U4
Model
The GE Double Charger is a compact, UL listed BC2 battery charger which plugs directly into any $ standard 110-120V grounded wall outlet. It accommodates any two snap-on battery modules at the same time so you can charge up to 8 "AAA" or "AA" (penlight), 4 "C" or "D" size, or 2 9 volt GE rechargeable batteries in any mix of battery size or voltage! And the Double Charger not only charges any two modules simultaneously - it does it FASTER. Batteries are ready to use in 3 to 5 hrs., fully charged in 8 to 12 hrs. Shpg. Wt. 1/2 lb.
with purchase from Spiratone of
Protect your investment in home computers, video games, VCR's, other microprocessor-controlled appliances with the solid state
YOU'LL NEVER AGAIN GET CAUGHT WITH DEAD OR WEAK BATTERIES, WHEN YOU SWITCH TO
• BC-8 Charger
$i
A
Battery Size
2 Batteries with Module
AAA $7.59 AA 7.59 8.59 C
$2 D $5 Shpg. Wt.
Be sure to ask for G.E. Rebate Offer when ordering, to receive Rebate Coupons with your purchase.
2 Batteries w/o Module
% lb.
8.59
$6.59 6.59 7.59 7.59
1 Battery with Module
1 Battery w/o Module
girollrina I 8.59
7.59
You only have to buy 1 Charger & the Battery Modules required-with these, you can charge as many GE Rechargeable Batteries as needed. Moci, G.E. CHARGE 4 TM
BC4
Universal charging console for G.E. rechargeable batteries
s'
*;4'1. '-
charges up to four AA, C Or D batteries (in pairs or up to two 9 volt size rechargeables. AA batgl t• teries are charged in just 8 hours, others in 14 to 16 hours. L.E.D. indicators show that batteries $ are charging. For desk-top or wall-mounting. Shpg. Does not require modules; batteries fit directly Wt. 2 lb.r.
I 95
G.E. CHARGE 8 TM Model BC8 All the features of the For little more than you'd pay for a conventional multiple outlet, you can now also protect microprocessor controlled instruments and appliances fro% the harmful effects of voltage surges and spikes. Then Srratone Spike Suppressing Controller provides you with six grounded convenience outlets with solid state overvoltage protection. A 15 Amp circuit breaker, lighted power switch, Wrounded, heavy duty cord as well as provision for cab; or wall mounting add up to a lot of convenience.nW %ace of mind in knowing that your expensive equiEFORt is well protected. You can't n't afford NO T tge kt pric e of $29.95 ma. at o w your Shpg. Wt. 3 lbs. each Set of two $W.95.
gbber/sp, LITE TITE BOXTM
8x10" 11x14"
Finally, a simple, effective 'paper safe'-plus a secure place to store up to 100 sheets enlarging paper, treasured prints, sheet film or any , other light sensitive materials. The stackable safe-box has a swivel lock and a full width hinge that automatically closes the top when you release it, avoiding 'accidents'. Of sturdy plastic construction. the Lite Tite Boxes have many uses - as a paper safe, for storing and transporting paper and sheet film, even to store your finished prints, offering protection from dust and light Specially designed for stacking. -
8x10"°12192 ea.$7.00 3 for $18 '1121927. 11x14"%:3. ea.$9.95 3 for $27°123986. Shpg. Wt,.: 8x10" 1,2 lbs. 3,5 lbs.:
1,3 lbf.. 3,8 lb.,.
sAFE
COPY SLIDES WITH YOUR ENLARGER! with
$39.95 $46.95
KEEP (--;) YOUR.,!"
Pixtfoit INGENIOUS
with Spiratone's Factory-Fresh or Eveready Photo Batteries"
This ingenious accessory enables you to utilize your enlarger and take advantage of many of its capabilities - for a variety of slide duplicating tasks, in conjunction with your SLR body. The Darkroom Slide Copier consists of a base assembly/camera platform with slide-on precision front surface mirror which is placed on your enlarger baseboard - your enlarger projects the image to be copied and provides the illumination, just as in conventional enlarging. These are some of the benefits of the combination enlarger•slide copier system: • Your enlarging lens, which is specifically corrected for work at close distances, projects the image onto the copier's front surface mirror and the image is then reflected directly onto the film plane. • With your color printing filters or dichroic head, you can obtain virtually unlimited control over the color balance of your duplicates. • Depending on format sizes accommodated by your enlarger, bellows extension, and focal length of lens you can use originals up to 4x5" and possibly reduce these to the 35mm format or you can copy just a portion of a large original. What's more, you can crop almost at will, can even enlarge movie film frames to the 35mm size. It all depends on what your enlarger is capable of doing. • You can double expose, create a montage, title and incorporate any number of creative enlarging techniques in your duplicating. • You focus and compose and even use the internal metering system of your camera (depending on the speed of film being used). The Darkroom Slide Copier is most useful for creative duplicating by enlarging portions of your slide. For 1:1 duplication the use of a 75mm (or longer F.L.) lens is elm Spiratone usually required. Darkroom Slide Copier For other slide (for 35mm SLR duplicators, see cameras) pages 27, 28, 29
PAPER End fumbling rewrapping paper, -store in a nd use wasting pape r from a foolproof, lightproof A most valuable paper organizer and time saving convenience for the darkroom. No more wrapping and unwrapping for every individual sheet, no more accidents' of 'open' paper when the lights are turned on! Sturdy, metal reinforced construction. Spring loaded door opens fully with fingertip pressure, closes automatically when released. Three shelves with adjustable dividers store your most used sizes. For papers For papers Order No. up to 11x14" up to 8x10" 517925 Order No. 124230 Order No. 124095 "100" Model Shpg. Shpg. Wt. 12 lbr. Shpg. Wt. 17 lbs. Irt, 2 lbs.
Charge 4 but with double the battery capacity (8 AA, C, or D, or 2 9 volt batteries).
$18.95
11 ' Mallory, Varta
Each 2 for PX 13 $1.70 $3.10 3.10 1.70 PX 625 Don't wait 'till your bat3.10 PX 675 1.70 teries give out in the 3.25 1.80 PX 640 middle of a roll, Our 3.25 6.00 MS 76 tremendous turnover as3.90 6.95 tDL 1/3N sures you of fresh 5.50 9.95 PX 28L batteries - those you PX 32 3.90 7.00 find in stores with low PX 14 5.60 3.10 turnover may actually RM 400R 3.10 1.70 be older than the one ‘iEi Far your strobe, motor drive, you took out of your autowinder, other accessories, camera! Spiratone has factory-fresh And -for consistently good reAlkaline Batteries sults, be sure to change the AAA-MN-2400 4 for $2.25 battery in your camera as AA -MN-1500 4 for 2.25 your camera instruction manual C -MN-1400 2 for 1.75 recommends. D -MN-1300 2 for 2.00 tReplaces 2 MS76 Stacked cells 9v -MN-1604 2 for 3.40 6v P028, 544 equivalent 2 for $5.75 *depending on availability-sorry we cannot offer choice Shpg. Add'l For everready case convenience with your camera, winder and lenses up to 10"long it's the economical Spiratone
35
SLR
Beautifully made of a supple, leather-like material; quick opening top with hook & loop closure plus button snap lock, plus a 3 1/2 x6 1/2 x1" zippered top pouch for film, filters even small flash. Two sets of "D" rings for over-the-shoulder or around the waist carrying, with 36" adjustable sjiM. Model "6510r camera wft inderand, lenses up tcr 61/2 Model "75" for camiSh, itrchz0hd lenses up to 71/2"" Ion .._ ' C'C's cam an wwinder with lenses up to 10" lonitiSs\-gittpg. Wt. 2 lbs. each
ionv a... „,-..... i 5.95 $
for
17.95 24.95
1Inip Fwm ARern
From Spiratone, for the truly demanding darkroom worker, DICHROIC HEAD 35mm, 6x6cm, 6x7cm
Models G-70 and ;-70 Computer by ujimoto G-70 and G-70 C LIGHT PATH SCHEMATIC
If you've shopped around for top quality color enlargers, you'll readily agree that our Fujimoto G70 and G70 Computer models really have no competition. Even if you were prepared to spend much more money for your enlarger, you couldn't find one that combines the precision workmanship of Japan's most experienced manufacturer in the field, with the capabilities and unique features the G70 line offers. • They are both condenser and diffusion enlargers, but, even more significantly, are instantly convertible from one type to the other so you can always use the most advantageous printing system for your particular negative or transparency. Whether you need the crisp detail rendering of the efficient condenser system, or the softer rendition of the diffusion system to reduce blemishes, scratches, and dust spots — or for pictorial effects — the right system is always at your fingertips! • The continuously variable dichroic color head uses an efficient quartz-halogen light source (12v 100w power supply is included, EFP lamp NOT included) for unvarying color output, is equipped with a "white light" lever for ease in focusing and composing without disturbing the filter settings, a 1/3 illumination switch for longer exposures without color change such as is needed for print manipulation, and a built-in UV filter. The clearly marked filter setting dials are transilluminated for ease of setting in the dark and provide filter settings from 0 to 200CC units in yellow, magenta, and cyan. • The Leica-threaded, bayonet removable lensboard makes possible instant interchangeability of different focal length lenses. The entire lens stage tilts 17 degrees allowing you to preserve focus when doing distortion correction by tilting the easel. • Concentric drives for the rack and pinion focusing allow for both quick rough focusing and extremely precise micro focusing adjustment.
equipped with metal reinforcing beams for the utmost in stability. The G-70 Computer model, housing the Color Analyzer/Meter-Timer II underneath its baseboard, is reinforced with thick hardwood panels. • The extra tall (44 3/4") calibrated vertical column makes possible 16X enlargements (that's 15 x 22") from 35mm with a 50mm lens, 10X from 21/2" square with a 75mm lens. The column is recessed at the baseboard to allow for easel clearance, particularly useful at large magnifications. The vertical orientation of the column allows for magnification changes without the lateral image shift so common to inclined pole enlargers. • The feather-touch elevation control with perfect counterbalancing provides effortless magnification and cropping control. • The enlargers swivel 90° for mural projection and the column swivels for floor projection, thus providing for virtually unlimited magnifications, when needed.
'ntake Window for Diffused Light
The enlargers are compatible with all color and b&w processors (the dichroic head may be used to provide variable contrast filtration for Polycontrast and other VC papers) and is especially well suited for printing both negative and positive processes.
• The massive oversize (23 1/2 "x 19") baseboard is
The G70 Computer,
in addition to offering all of the above features, includes the Color Analyzer/Meter–Timer II integrated into the baseboard, with the color sensors and balance indicators built into the lensboard/bellows assembly for the utmost ease of use (lens stays in place while color analyzing and balancing.) Analyzer indicators are mounted at eye level for easy reference. See below for full description of Analyzer II functions.
Light Box Dichroic Filters
turn*
Q-70 Cold Mirror Halogen Lamp Condenser/ Diffuser Light System Model G-70 Enlarger complete with combination 35mm film/2x2" mounted slide carrier
• The G70's modular construction makes for great ease of assembly, disassembly and servicing. • The projection head is removable to allow base/column use as a copystand and the diffusion dichroic light source becomes the perfect slide duplicating illuminator.
Diffuser Light System
Condenser Negative
Light box is rotatable 180° for diffusion enlarging
161 10
Shpg. Wt. 40 lbs. Order No. 113808
Model G-70 Computer same as above but with Color Analyzer / MeterTimer built in
$5
Shpg. Wt. 50 lbs. Order No. 115002
ACCESSORIES FOR G-70 AND G-70C COLOR ENLARGERS Focusing Extension makes it a snap to adjust focus or large magnifications particularly when using grain magnifiers (enlarging focusers) $29.95 Spiratone Quadrail camera positioner for mounting camera in proper relationship to baseboard when using G70 as a copystand, (see page 30) reg. $69.95; when bought at same time as G70, G70 Computer, only $54.95 each $22.95, two for $41.95 Low voltage Quartz Halogen lamp (12V 100W)
Detail showing the Color Analyzer/ Meter Timer built into the baseboard of the G-70 computer model.
Extra glassless carriers, specify 110, 4.5x6cm, 6x6cm, 6x7cm
each $22.95 Special glass carrier, with masks for 1/2 35mm, 35mm, 6x6cm 6x7cm; and with coupled rangefinder focusing $44.95 Extra bayonet lensboards (threaded to fit Leica mount lenses)
each $9.50 See the Spiratone 6 element 50mm Resomax and other enlarging lenses on page 41.
Spiratone's Fujimoto Combination
',OLOR ANALYZER / METER-TIMER II for any*
enlarger, any color process
If you've tried to use other color analyzers, you may have concluded that for the effort and time required to get a proper reading, you might almost do without one. The Spiratone Color Analyzer/Meter Timer II makes determining the perfect exposure and getting perfect color balance so quick, so foolproof, so convenient, you'll not only work faster, you'll be amazed at how easy it has become to obtain perfect color prints, whether you're printing from negatives or transparencies, Thanks to its unique multiple sensor analyzer head, all three color channels are analyzed simultaneously — there's no need to switch from channel to channel a dozen or more times (as required with other analyzers) — and because of its ability to take readings at the lensboard, it's even suitable for the biggest magnifications, at which point most other analyzers no longer function. And, as an added bonus, color analysis can be done with the room lights on! No longer need you fumble in the dark or adjust the wrong knob, throwing your readings off. The sensor head attaches to any Leica threaded
lensboard and is instantly removable via its bayonet coupling and bayonet lensboard adapter* (it mounts directly to the bayonet lensboard of the G70 enlarger). A bayonet enlarging lens plate is also provided.
The easiest to program and use, the most precise, most versatile available at any price
On easel spot readings for exposure determination simultaneously set in the built-in timer (.1-111 sec.) to give the correct exposure. The timer can also be used by directly dialing in the required time on the three time setting dials, and for making multiple prints the exposure time is repeatable with 1%! Focus switch turns on and off the enlarger and safelight as needed for focusing and color analysis. Analyzer indicator lights automatically shut off (when not performing color analysis) to prevent any inadvertent fogging of light sensitive materials. The Analyzer/Meter Timer II comes complete with sensor head, bayonet lens plate and adapter and is ready to plug into any 115v 50/60 Hz power outlet.
Order No. 100005
Shpg. Wt. 5 lbs.
Order No.
$ 200
100021
Analyzer/Meteree MGe7t0e Timer uy CI7 laot resame 67D LPL (p. 39) and pay only .Note: adapter requires clearance (at lensboard) of 2 3A" diameter (concentric with lens axis) and %" below lensboard's lens seating plane. When ordering, please name your enlarger make, model.
SAVE $50
43
.tea n 3p ttlai e 211e citY olitiLlt Attttattlit YOUR GUIDE TO SPIRATONE'S CUSTOM SCREW-IN
hit
CHECK YOUR FIL TER SIZE IN THIS COLUMN - THEN RUN YOUR FINGEI 1 ACROSS LINE AND DISCO VER THE WIDE VARIETY OF LENS ATTACHMENTS AVAI ABLE TO FIT YOUR LENSES
SAVE /
20%
BUY ANY 3
or more items from this listing and deduct 20% or 30% from prices shown
SAVE
30%
CLOSE-UP LENSES & FILTERS Skylight, Red, CC FluoresGreen, Orange, cent Light Yellow, Filters ND2X, 4X, Type B (for Plus 1 80A, 808, indoor color (40-20") 81A, 81B, 82A,film)or Plus 2 Type D (for (20-13") 85, 85B, outdoor 80C, Plus 4 color film) UV-Haze (10-8") each each each
ikk
,A. s. 'i' tg3 cc
•
‘ Z.
8.44
20.82
29.32
10.00
17.77
21.44
27.95
20.82
29.32
11.00
18.77
29.95
52mm
26.00
9.95
19.82
28.32
11.00
18.77
29.95
55mm
12.54 18.94
-
7.00
10.95
9.44 11.44
22.44 22.44
35.52
50.32
12.00
21.77
14.54 21.94 16.54 25.94
46.00
8.00
12.95
13.44"
35.52
13.00
26.77
25.44 30.44
9.00
14.95
16.44"
15.00
31.77
35.44
18.54 29.94
56.00
10.00
17.95
20.44"
34.52 -
50.32 49.32 -
18.00
-
11.00
24.95
24.44*
-
37.77 43.77
41.44 47.44
6.75
11,54
11.54 16.94
24.00
6.98
6.75
11.54
11.54 16.94
58irrifi•
7.98
8.75
12.54
62mm
8.98
10.15
14.54
67mm
9.98
13.15
16.54
72mm
-
17.75
18.54 24.54
24.54
-
Spiratone 'invented' Customizer0 (that's the trademark for this useful item) to help photographers avoid the expense of duplicating the same accessories in many different sizes to fit the different sized lenses they own.
Ss
FOR USE WITH THIS SIZE ACCESSORY (in mm)
46 48 4
46 52 49 55
One of the Most Useful Accessories Ever Available for Candid Photography...the
62 67
46 ' 48
49
that a single filter size will fit all your lenses
Spiratone CUSTOMIZERS are thin precision rings which screw into a lens of one size"customizing" the lens to accept accessories of a different size.
Since these rings (unlike series size "stepup" or "step-down" rings) virtually become part of the lens, they will usually not \\ 67 cause vignetted corners. "Stepping-up" Cus72 tomizers (from smaller lens diameter to 46 larger accessory) are preferable, but with r 48 all except wideangle lenses, moderate 49 "stepping-down" Customizers work well, too. 55 52 Yet at times, you may even step down 58 when you know you'll get some vignetting, to save the cost of a whole set of larger accessories for just an occasional need. 72 Customizers cost about the same as adapter 46 rings, yet are infinitely more versatile, deli48 cately and precisely machined to do their 49 job properly.
52
1,1,67
4
58
62
52 55 , 82 67 52
**•.,
Allows you to photograph the unsuspecting subject while seemingly aiming at right angles to actual direction of shooting! You get natural exp ression, avoid self-conscious reaction of subject. Designed to look like part of lens for 'discreet' right angle shots, the Circa Mirrotach is primarily intended for 100mm and longer telephotos,* mounts onto your lens by means of Series VII adapter ring. Precision, optically flat, front surface mirror assures perfect definition with b&w and color film. $ Reverses image, corrected in printing or projection. Shpg. Wt.
24 95
Customizers can be used with screw-in filters, square filter systems, shades - anything at all that fits into the front of your lens.
62 72
72
67 77
77
67 72
77
49
Ser.VII irt 55 5
Any 3 (may be assorted) $13.50 14 1h, Shpg. lr'r. Order models as shown
Example: 52-■ 55
(For 52mm threaded lens to accept 55mm threaded accessories) Generally, you can't intermix Series and screw-in accessories, but Soiratone lets you do this, too. If you have Ser. VII Adapters (any size) and 49, 52 or 55mm filters, you can now use these together with the Series VII to 49 (or 52 or 55mm) Customizers. Same price as above.
HASSELBLAD 'Bay 50' and 'Bay 60' CF Lenses can now be fitted with 49, 52, 55, 67mm and Ser. 8 accessories. See Hasselblad special listing on page 7.
13,i)tutoge Random DIFFUSER
A medium strength diffusion filter, utilizes random principle; the amount of diffusion does not vary with lens opening. Preferred by leading photographers for their salon shots. Wonderful for portraits, landscapes, particularly effective for back-lighted shots. Equally suited for color and b&w films. For selected diffusion control see page 45.
58mm 62mm
_
72mm
67mm
77mm
Price list for standard 49-77mm sizes shown above. For all other sizes write for information, giving complete details about your camera, lens, focal length, speed, screw-in or slip-on diameter (if known). Step-up Step-down Specify mm Screw-in Adapter Retaining Ring Ring Ring Size Needed with Insert Ring 7-6 6-7 Ser. 7 5.25 4.00 3.00 3.00
Ser. 8
7.25
4.50
Ser. 9
14.95
7.50
7-8 4.50 8-9 6.50
Ser. VII Adapter Ring (up to 62mm dial $5.25 Case $2.95 z lb. name your camera, lens, speed, focal length, when ordering *not convenient for use on zoom lenses with rotating front mounts; vignettes with "normal" 50mm lenses.
With the PERFECT POSER, the model or subject can see herself or himself at the actual moment of exposure.
ALTERS
The PERFECT POSER is an unbreakable, lightweight, 8x10" Lucite mirror which mounts directly to most any*camera lens with its universal spring clip mount. Looking at the camera, the subject can see just what the camera sees! Also ideal for more effective self-portraiture.
up the image and light into a variety of colors and patterns. Made of a special holographic 'film' mounted between two thin layers of optical glass in a metal mount which can be rotated 360° so you can orient the filter to locate the patterns for their most-pleasing effect. You can use Rayburst Filters singly - or combine two identical or two different ones for an unlimited variety of effects.
THE RAYBURST STREAKER TM creates a subtle multiple image fantasy with repeating rainbow colors, a whole series of brilliant prismatic colored stripes.
THE RAYBURST STELLAR TM
THE RAYBURST COLOR CROSTARTM creates a cross effect, consisting of four straight prismatic colored lines radiating at right angles to each other.
THE RAYBURST HALOTm
creates a "celestial" explosion, a brilliant burst of multiple prismatic colored radiations.
creates a "ring" of 16 prismatic colored points of light tightly surrounding the light source.
1)iittoseigTz-gGicRssir „ sprinkles every highlight or specular light source with a starlike radiance. Two different patterns:
151) (1mm square mesh) or 2SQ (2mm square mesh) Models 1SQ and 2511 both yield a right angle cross pattern. The finer grid of the 1SQ produces a more pronounced pattern while the 2511 pattern is more subtle and less dominating. Two CROSTARS may be combined to produce an eight pointed star pattern.
*
14,6
PERFECT ele nE Order No. 521264 POSER o I thOd Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
8-7 4.50 9-8 6.50
*up to 58mm
A Simple, Inexpensive Attachment To Produce Vignettes'
Spit)Atioe SOFT SURROUNDTM
lens just like a filter, produces a sharp circular central image, with the balance pleasantly defocused to the edges. Requires no exposure increase. Best suited for normal and moderate telephoto lenses. Effect is readily seen in SLR finder. Also adapts to enlarger to achieve similar effect in printing. Screws onto your
spblft Reflect Amain* N 'Kaleidoscopic' Lens Attachment
Each Customizer
6ZS 7 72
67
44
CIRCO MIHROTACr
fascinating, easy-to-use, special effect attachments which break so
32.95 37.95 -
SERIES ADAPTERS (FILTER HOLDERS)
RIGHT ANGLE ATTACHMENTSt
SPIRATONE
58
49Ags 58 s ,,1/4
LENS THREAD
with a
22.00
49mm
82mm *not avail. in Soft Surround Approx. Shipping Weight, 1-3 Y4 lb., larger filters slightly heavier. Minimum shipping charge $1.75 per order
or how to save money by not duplicating filters and other lens accessories
52 5 5 kl 49 52
,....'"
9.44
6.98
49
,....._ -
\s.11
".
9.95
52mm 55mm
What's a CUSTOMIZER®7
43
---
8.95
10.54 15.94
CONVERT YOUR LENS FROM (in mm)
.I1 ----- • Six-Shooter 3C 5C 3 images are 5 images, 1 6 images concentric. in center, 4 in a When rotated concentric. "pie-cut" all images When r9tated, pattern all but move center move -
6.00 6.00
10.54
35.5 --gE
t . •
'
5.00
5.75
82mm
-4---- Soft Selective Diffusion Rayburst Surround Sets, Filters: or Graded 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 MistStellar, maker (See opposite pg.) Streaker, Halo or Set of 5 Custom Set or k1, 2, 3, Crostars of 3 Random 4, 5 Color1SQ or k2, 3, 4 type 2SQ, Crostar, Diffuser, No other each each each discounts apply
Hard Coated Optical Glass Opticap
each
5.98
21.75 26.75
---- "i
Specify color, density
t-2 .5
49mm
77mm
BUY ANY 5
Rotating Custom Polarizers
MULTIMAnFm.ENSES
SPECIA' EFFECT ATTACHMENTS
Glass Mounted Screw-in CC Filters in 05, 10, 20, 30, 40 Magenta, Red, Yellow
Now, with the Spiratone ReflectAround, you can create exciting images reminiscent of a Kaleidoscopic pattern, around a clear central image. Most effective with your 35 SLR and any wideangle (28mm) to normal (45-58mm) focal length lens on close-up subjects. This lightweight (11/2 oz.) attachment screws directly into your lens. producing an image of the main subject surrounded with 360° of reflected images from the hexagonal mirrored tunnel. The mirror component of the ReflectAround is free rotating, changing the pattern as it turns. And different effects can even be produced by varying the f/ stop of your lens or using lenses of different focal
Istmaker
TM
lengths (or zoom lenses at different settings).
Create a soft mist-like atmospheric haze effect - with all Color and Black & White films. The MISTMAKER transforms almost any scene or portrait into an unusual ethereal-like image. Through changes in exposure and development, the extent of the fog effect can be altered. Ideal for use on enlargers, too!
the Kodak Workshop Series
USING FILTERS This 8 1/2 x 11" book shows you how to use filters for both black-and-white and color photography for both practical and creative results. Filled with over 150 outstanding color and b&w photographs by top photographers to inspire you to succeed with creative filtration. Covers not only colored filters but special-effect filters, such as star, diffraction, CQ pc soft focus filters and more. 40i.UJ
Close up of flower taken with 28mm lens and ReflectAround A great, truly creative front lens attachment, available $ in 49, 52, 55 and 58mm screw-in sizes-specify size wanted. Shpg. Wt. IA lb.
95
u A DDTM LENTICULAR Inv I, a nnr DESIGN, SQUARE Centersharp Zoom (CS-Vm)
Centersharp
Centersharp Swirl (CS-STM )
Rain (CS-Rim)
FILTERS
Centersharp Vortex (CS.VTM)
FOR SFS FILTER HOLDERS
for effects unlike anything you've seen before, effects which are virtually unobtainable in any other way
3" SQUARE SFS Size,
to fit Spiratone SFS, Ambico Holder. Requires SFS Extender. Centersharp, choice of eight cs filters (specify) each $8.95 Any 3 for $22.95, All 8 for $49.95 Extender each $4.95, 2 for $8.95 (FOR INFORMATION ON COMPLETE SFS System, see pages 46, 47)
/ f
1
CS -Z'" Pictures taken with the CS-Z filter produce the exciting effect normally obtainable only by zooming a lens during the exposure—a difficult, unpredictable technique. With the CS-Z, it's a snap; the effect is visible in the viewfinder and has the advantage of a sharp central image, with the zooming effect limited to the surrounding areas.
Showerlike streams of "rain" in one direction surround the sharp center subject, an effect you simply cannot produce without actually shoot//, 1L ing at a slow shutter speed in the rain with its attendant problems—and even then it's unlikely the effect will be as pleasing as with the CS-R.
CS - C" The cascade effect of the CS-C might be likened to a fountain or even fireworks trail, with the subject at the focus of the ' sp a " It s a most V ElI/10\1\,, exciting effect for a suitable subject. •
7.
\-t
CS-S" A whirlpool surrounds the sharp center subP-t-■ . ., ject swirling around and towards it as though someone had turned and zoomed the outer parts of the subject during exposure. A most dramatic effect / , ) 1 unlike that produced by any other special effect •-:-:./1.1/2/n attachment (or by any other manipulative means). ----=—,...-,-..sii•er„ /----4‘) CS - B' An explosion of streaks and colors, radiat-"--,77' ing from one point in the outerfield, streams tori i ,i/ /,A wards and past the clearly imaged main subject, / 1111 ,'\ , which, in this filter, is located off-center so that the /111 , ■11.■ sharp portion of the exposure appears to be almost t\ pushed out of the picture by the impact of the , explosion. 1, _,..-,4 CS-1N" The off-center whirlpool effect of the CS-W 1:::::-..', creates the impression of the subject going into (or out of) a tunnel. CS - P'" The patchwork weave effect of the CS-P surrounds the subject with a most pleasing abstract effect which will be particularly appreciated by the artistically inclined photographer.
CS -V" The CS -V creates a vortex-like trail surrounding the sharp subject image, its whirling lines conveying rapid rotation of the subject.
FOR COKIN
to fit COKIN Series A Filter Holder. Requires Cokin Coupling Ring and second Filter Holder. Centersharp, choice of eight CS filters (specify) .. each $8.45 Any 3 for $21.95, All 8 for $44.95 $4.99 Cokin Filter Holder . each $4.25, 2 for $8.00 Cokin Coupling Ring each $3.50 Cokin Adapter-48, 49, 52, 55, 58mm 62mm .. each $4.50
67mm SQUARE
Modular Hood a lenshood that also acts as extension when used with Coupling ring and second Filter $3.95 Holder Refer to photos at left, above and below. Patterns shown at left approximate Centersharp effect. All Centersharp filters have near center clear spot.
For details on over 90 different components of the Spiratone SFS System see pages 46, 47.
ECONOMICAL, CREATIVE CENTERSHARP KIT for 35 SLRs
This new, economical, easy-to-use system makes available for you the entire range of eight exciting Centersharp filter effects. The special combination lenshood/filterholder is supplied with Model the thread size of your choice — specify 49, 52 or 55mm size. 'F' The multipart hood holds the Centersharp filter at the distance from the lens (50 to 55mm LI.) at which it works best; its rotating design lets you orient the filter for effect desired. CENTERSHARP 'F' STARTER KIT includes the combination hood/holder, with 49, 52 or 55mm (specify which one) mounting ring, and the popular model F (matching fit) Centersharp FCS-B (Burst) and FCS-W (Whirlpool) filters Shpg. Wt. 1/2 lb. (see description above) Basic Centersharp 'F' Kit (specify 49, 52 or 55mm) Additional Model 'F' Centersharp filters — specify: TOP LEFT PHOTO Each FCS-Z, FCS-R, FCS-C, FCS-V, FCS-S, FCS-P Centersharp Burst (CS-Bm) Any 3 or more, each $4.25 BOTTOM LEFT PHOTO All six FCS filters (not included Centersharp Whirlpool (CS-Wrm ) in kit; to complete set of eight) $19.95
$11.95 $4.95
OPTFILCALLY 3x3"
RIGID "CC" FILTERS
At last, there is an alternative to the expensive and fragile "CC" gel filters — in the most popular "CC" densities — namely .05, .10, .20 color densities in each of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. Spiratone rigid "CC" filters are made of a surface hardened optical resin, 1.6mm in thickness. They are considerably easier to handle than gels, are perfectly flat and will outlast the fragile gels which, until now, represented the only way of providing appropriate filtration. To use more than two Spiratone "CC" filters at a time, use the Add-on Auxiliary Filterholder.
PC. RIGID "('C" FILTER KIT
Includes dual-channel Filterholder, one adapter lopecify 49, 52, 55, 58, 62 or 67mm), plus your choice of three "CC" FILTERS (specify color, density).
1995
spook*
*antas
for the fun loving amateur and the Place one of the Fantasy Filters into the Holder provided, attach to your lens — and you'll transform a drab subject into an exciting one, and an exciting one into a truly memorable one. Spiratone Fantasy Filter Kits enable you to create a variety of shapes and patterns, making it easy to select one or several filters which are just right for the subject at hand. Some Fantasy Filters let you "spotlight" the subject by surrounding it with abstract color patterns, while others complement the composition with colors and shapes. And you can combine two or more filters for truly different effects! Starter Set 1/2 lb.; with a1112 filters % lbs. Shpg.
II
E
FILTER SETS
THE PROFESSIONAL WAY
Now Spiratone makes available an inexpensive means of always having at hand the 'best' diffuser for each subject, with its graded sets of lens diffusers, all utilizing the 'random' design principle maintaining their grade of diffusion regardless of the lens aperture used (unlike many other diffusion systems). SD 1 yields a very subtle amount of diffusion, barely noticeable until you make a big enlargement or project the slide at great magnification. SD 2, 3, 4 each provide increasing diffusion with SD 5 providing a most pronounced effect, which, while strong, is quite different from that of a fog filter. To keep costs to a minimum, Spiratone offers direct screw-in Selective Diffusion sets consisting of 3 or 5 different strength diffusers, in two popular sizes, 55m or 67mm, adaptable to most other standard filter sizes. Shpg. Wts. Set of 3,1 lb., Complete Set of 3 Set of 5 Set of 5,11/4 lbs. (#2, 3, 4) $28.32 $19.82 55mm SD 29.32 46, 49, 52mm SD 20.82 Sets include the 55mm set plus a Customizer to 46, 49 or 52mm size—(specify which) 49.32 34.52 67mm SD 50.32 35.52 as:" 52' 55' 58, 62mm SD Sets include the 67mm set plus a Customizer to 49, 52, 55, 58 or 62mm size—(specify which) *The 55mm or 67mm SD sets can be used for these sizes Sets only available as listed—not in other assortments. No further discounts of any kind apply to the above offers.
The
Extra Adapters (specify size), each $2.75 Addl. Spiratone "CC" Filters, each 4.95; Add-on Auxiliary Filterholder, holds 2 more filters (for total of 4) .. 7.95 `.1 Snap-on Lens Shade, fits Filterholder or Add-on Filter Holder, for 35mm cameras 4.95 for 6x6cm cameras 5.95 Shpg. Wt. 5 pc. outfit 1 1/2 lbs., add'l. items, each 1/2 lb.
3x3"
pikotoge I El LI ECI rI I DI I Fl FU I
I er
creative professional photographer
So whether you shoot portraits, take product shots, make titles or just want to create color fantasies, the variety of 16 different Spiratone Fantasy Filters will help you realize your creative visions. The Fantasy-Starter Set includes filterholder, 8 different filters and a case — all you need to get started, at the low price of .... Available for screw-in sizes 49, 52, 55, 58mm — specify size required when ordering. Extra set of 8 ADDITIONAL Alters (to fit Holder), providing you with a total of 12 different shapes and colors $19.95; when bought at same time as Starter Set (incl. case), $16 only (you pay for holder and all 16 filters only $44.90)
$27.95
95
abiChe° PRISM LENS
Want to make the man in the center of the group disappear? Take out that tree in the middle of your lawn? Maybe you want to reduce the height of the Empire State Building by 20% or so? You can do all this and much more with the exciting nsists of two prisms Spiratone CENTER-VANISH which he central part of an allowing you to — literally — e arts together with image, joining the remaining o 2 hardly a trace between them. se it for fun Use it to change composition — or re friends you — or for serious work. Or just t are a magician. Use it for spect ial effects in your video or movie productio s dl ty_.:,04 camera", and make expensive post prod n wq,107nnecessary. Certainly, the CENTER ANISHii heptost "unusual effect" attachment ever. iv • age The Spiratone CENT -Vabii gH is available in the sizes listed; each size is front-threaded to accept additional screw-in accessories of the same size. Specify size needed. 49, 52 or 55mm, each $19.95 Shpg. Wt. each % lb. 58, 62 or 67mm, each $27.95
Normal scene -dr Same scene taken with CENTER-VANISH
45
t
The
FOR EVERY CP sc RA OWNER... FOR VIRTUALLY EVERY FILTERING AND THESE SFS ACCES r
1RF
'1OARD 3" SIZE, FITTING THE SFS AND AMBICO HOLDERS. FOR
Now offering a choice of over 90 accessories—the incomparably versatile, outstandingly creative, SFS FILTER SYSTEM
To simplify your selection, we have grouped filters and accessories which perform related tasks, together — when placing orders, state group and give full description of the item. Note both individual and quantity prices.
Cr
tt
tility)
Versa V rsa-
y
Tha s • EconoinY* cit ! Tha s That's
This single (dual channel) Filterholder holds any of the many different SFS system accessories listed here, and up to two filters at a time (for their combined effects). What's more, you use it with virtually all your lenses, by means of the 'Adapter Rings' — if, for example, you have one lens which accepts 49mm, another which accepts 77mm accessories, you'll still need only one Filterholder/Cap, one set of filters, etc., and just two inexpensive 'Adapter Rings'.
`SFS' SCREW-IN ADAPTER RINGS
Light, Medium Yellow; Green; Orange; Red; Haze/UV (total 6 different items) GROUP A-2
80C, 82A, 82B, 82C, 85A, 85B, 85C, 81A, 81B, 81C, Fluorescent Daylight (total 14 different items)
GROUP A-3
GROUP A4
each $2.75 • 3 for $7.25 `SFS' SPECIAL ADAPTERS
$ 4.95 $ 6.95 $14.95
Expand the capacity and utility of your SFS system with these accessories
ADD-ON AUXILIARY FILTERHOLDER With it • you can use up to four filters at one time • you can use split, half and graduated filters and close-up lenses at variable angles to each other • you add 5/8" extension to SFS shade, for improved results in creating vignettes, montages, pos/neg effects.
Neutral Density Filters: 4X and 8X, make possible- use of fast film in bright light, allow longer exposures when a 'blur' is desirable, let you reduce depth-of-field when you wish to emphasize only part of a scene. (total 2 different items)
(order one for each different size lens you use), available in 49, 52, 55, 58, 62 or 67mm Sperit) size.
72, 77mm screw-in, each Bayonet for Hasselblad Bay-50 Bay-60
Correction and Conversion Filters. for color films: Skylight, 80A, 80B,
O
Mist and Fog Filters:
RAYBURST" Filters
The popular Spiratone Rayburst filters: Streaker, Stellar, Color-Crostar and Halo (see description of Rayburst effects on Page 44), now in an economically priced set including (required) Gelatin Holder—Complete 5 pc. set t o oc (all 4 filters plus holder) . . $10.95 3 EXTRA Gelatin Holders (see above)
Colored Filters with Clear Centerspot: surround central subject with color: Yellow, Orange, Green, Red, Violet, Blue, Light Gray, Dark Gray — all with clear center (total 8 different items)
GROUP B-2
O
GR P BOY
•
Mist Filters with Clear Centerspot: same as B-1, but outer area is both colored and misty: Yellow Mist, Magenta Mist and Blue Mist with clear center (total 3 different items)
Diffraction Filters: — break up the image and light into a variety of colors and patterns. Patterns produced by special light sources and reflections are as indicated. Streaker (repeating streaks): Stellar (stars); Wheel 16 (16 'spokes'); Wheel 32 (32 'spokes'); Square (surrounds lit subject with square of prismatic colors) (total 5 different items)
Soft Surround
Tr Sepia Filter
GROUP
—
colors black and white subjects a nostalgic sepia, particularly useful for copying old photographs (total one item)
Group A items $4.95 each Any 4 for $15.00
Soft Spot
— a Fog 1 (see A-4) with a clear center for a sharp center image with a diffused outer section. (one item)
Group B items $7.95 each Any 3 for
OTHER ACCL ,SORIES FOR SFS SYSTEM
$19.95
Illustrations of filters are merely representational.
Use in conjunction with the Snap-on Lens Shade, Snap-on Compendium Shade or SFS Extender. Create Vignettes, Montages, Super-impositions with Spiratone Vignetter, Montage, Pos/Neg Sets
8 PC. VIGNETTER SET for creating pleasing circular shaped images which float in the picture frame, eliminating all background detail outside the central image. Set consists of 8 masks; 4 of the most popular sizes in both sepia and white translucent material. The white masks can be colored to provide the background color of your choice.
8 PC. MONTAGE SET
for creating multiple images on a single film in a variety of patterns and layouts. Multi position masks provide for 2, 4 or any number of images, plus masks for the most popular shapes: cross, star, oval and heart.
each $4.95 • 2 for $8.95
each $4.25 • 3 for $10.95
"GE 45
GROUP TM B4 — produces sharp center and defocused outer part. Extent of defocusing can be controlled by choice of focal length, lens opening, lens-tosubject distance. (one item)
A 3/4" extension which mounts between the SFS Adapter Ring and the SFS Filterholder. Essential for use with Centersharp Lenticular SFS filters, it is also useful to vary the effect of Vignetter, Montage and POS/NEG sets when these are used with the Snap-on Lens Shade. Extenders may be stacked for greater extension and are particularly effective when used to extend Center Spot filters and prisms (to accentuate their effects).
holds Kodak Wratten Gelatin Filters (the best available for critical and scientific use —see opposite page), acetates and other thin, unmounted fragile filters securely in its two-piece frame, makes them easy to handle without worrying about scratches See Wratten Gels and fingerprints. Ideal for using IRIS MODIlisted on FIER masks (see opposite page) in the opposite page SFS holder. 3x3" squares require slight trimming.
GROUP B-1
REQUIRPVIENT
' 5 LISTING r
Yellow Mist, Magenta Mist, and Blue Mist; Fog 1, 2 and 3 (for light, medium, strong fog effects) (total 6 different items)
`SFS' EXTENDER
GELATIN HOLDER
crcEP T
I N ACC'
'AT P General Purpose Filters:
Start with the easy-to-use
`SFS' FILTERHOLDERI CAP at only $2.95
PECIAI
8 PC. POSINEG MONTAGE SET
PA!
---
Positive/Negative Montage Masks allow for the placing of one image totally within another by double exposing the same film frame first through one mask and then through the complementary mask. Set of eight masks consists of pos/neg pairs of circle, heart, champagne glass, and a blank pair for do-it-yourself shapes. for 35mm for 6x6cm (21/4" sq.) 8 pc. Vignetter Set $9.95 $8.95 8 pc. Montage Set 9.95 8.95 8 pc. Pos/Neg Montage Set 10.95 11.95
SNAP-ON COMPENDIUM SHADE same as the famous Spiratone Ultimatte Box (see right hand page for complete specifications), but mounts to your lens by snapping onto SFS Filterholder. The resulting combination provides the most efficient. adjustable lens shade, allows you to utilize I both filter slots in the SFS holder, in addition to providing a variable extension and front mask holders for optimum utilization of Vignetter, Montage, Pos/Neg Sets. Compendium Shade $39 ..95 for 35mm for 6x6cm (21/4 " sq.)
Iry$319o*$399o*
$49.95
*SAVE 20%1 °
Or ■ when you buy $60 of SFS items See below for details on savings offer
SNAP-ON LENS SHADE
Lightweight, rigid shade snaps for tfi C onto the SFS Filterholder. 35mm 4.JJ Front channel accommodates for Vignetter, Montage, Pos/Neg 6x6cm t; QC sets. (21/4" sq • ) W.•••••'"
Shipping Charge V, lb. per set These sets require the SFS Shade or Compendium. With the SFS Shade, the Add-on Filterholder or SFS Extender improves the effectiveness of the sets by increasing the distance between lens and masks.
ON SFS ""TEr 1 ULTIMATTE BOX ACCESSORIES
00
Buy $40 or more of any of the accessories Buy $60 offered for the ULTIMATTE BOX and SFS or more SYSTEM (except Filterholder/cap, Adapter and take Rings, Lens Mount Plates, or Kodak 'Gels') on these two pages at one time and take OFF THE PRICE OF THESE ACCESSORIES
46
Shipping Weight per .1 SFS filters approximately % lb.; some items, more
photographs courtesy of Eastman Kodak Company, from the Kodak publication "Filters & Lens
Attachments"
froffiQbikohni a-ZIMATTE BOX The versatile system for creative lens effects
GRCOVP
Half Filters:
— Each filter is half color, half clear with feathered edge for smooth color transition. Choose light (L) or dark (D): Gray, Blue, Tobacco, Pink, Emerald, Violet and Yellow. With these, you can 'color' foreground or background with a different color. Specify color and Light or Dark. (total 14 different items)
Group C items $9.95 each Any 3 for GROUP
TRULY THE ULTIMATE ACCESSORY FOR CREATING
MONTAGES • VIGNETTES • SPLIT FIELD and virtually unlimited other special effects, plus 'custom' shading for most all focal length lenses. Uses 3x3" (75mm square) FILTERS (in rear) and 4 1/2" wide MASK (in front)
$24.95
Starburst Filters
-
(1.3A1,'
C.•
produce star-like effects from spectral light sources and reflections. Starburst 2, 4, 6 or 8 point stars. For color and b&w films. (total of 4 different items)
Grou p D items
$9.95 each Any 3
for $24.95
Close-Up Lenses:
Girr
— increase the near focusing range of your lens, can be used in conjunction with each other for their combined effects. Plus 1, Plus 2 or Plus 4 (total 3 different items)
Group E items
$8.95 each All 3 for $22.95
GRFT P Proxifar Split Field Lens: — lets you 'cheat' on depth of field — you get both near and distant (up to infinity) subject
in focus simultaneously. Proxifar Plus 2, near range 13-20" (total one item) Group F item
]
GROUP
$10.95
Multimage ® Prism Lenses:
— produce a variety of multiple images with a single exposure. Model 3C yields 3 concentric images. When rotated, all images ] revolve around center. Model 3P yields 3 parallel images. Model 7P yields central image with 6 concentric images around it. When Models 3P and 7P are rotated, central image remains stationary, others revolve around it.
V4 IV
]
Model 6P Repeater creates up to five parallel secondary images (in addition to main image) producing a stroboscopic-like effect of continuity on part of the image. (total 4 different items)
GRGT P
Motion Maker TM
creates over part of a moving or non-moving subject, a streaking motion or action effect. (one item)
] Group G items $19.95 each Any 3 for GR ZiP
]
Colorflow TM Filters:
used in conjunction with a polarizer, each of these filters produces a continuously variable (from light to medium dark) hue in two colors; thus, one filter takes the place of an almost infinite number of separate filters. For both special effects and color correction (but not calibrated for such use), CF Red/Green, CF Yellow/ Blue, CF Red/Blue, CF Red/Yellow (total 4 different items)
Gro up H items
-raphyeotd enthusiastically on its versatility and usefulness, illustrating many of the unique effects XTRA LENS MOUNT PLATES, for either model obtainable specify mm size (49, 52, 55, 58, t e nr 62, 67, 72, 77mm), Ser. 8, each 4U.UJ with it. Hasselblad "Bay 50" $12.95 $18.95 Hasselblad "Bay 60"
FREE STARTER KIT
Polarizer
Probably the most useful single filter a photographer can own. With it you can • Deepen blue skies, • Remove reflections, • Cut down on glare in outdoor scenes, • Reduce atmospheric haze, • Increase color saturation. 360° free rotating mount for convenient orientation. (total 1 item) C See page 14 for Group J item more information
$11.94
Me= ...,------= GROUP CentersharpTM Lenticular L-1 Design Filters .,„----/// ..-.--_..,r,
/./1, , l' _ A group of 8 different pattern lenticular filters producing unique, exciting effects virtually unobtainable in any other way. See description and sample illustrations on page 45 (total 8 different items). Group 1-1 items
$8.95 ea., Any 3 for $22.95, All 8 for $49.95 NOTE: SFS Centersharp filters require the SFS Extender ($4.95, see opposite page) for use with normal lenses; 2 stacked extenders for use with moderate telephoto lenses.
with purchase of Ultimatte Box
To get you started, we include with each ULTIMATTE BOX you buy, a 'starter kit' with which you can make your own montage, masks (kit includes mask material, a stencil knife for you to cut out your own designs, plus many designs of mask openings for you to follow).
M35 ULTIMATTE BOX for M66 ULTIMATTE BOX for Hasvirtually all 35mm SLR selbladt, Bronica, Pentax 6x7, cameras and 4.5 x 6cm most 2 1/4 " roll-film cameras°, Bronica and Mamiya 645, includes one lens mount plate includes one lens mount (specify front lens thread size, plate (specify front lens see listing at left) t55 95 *not for use with widethread size. see 495 angle lens of R067 listing at left) •P tBay 50 size only, Bay 60, $6 addl.
Shpg. Wa 11/2 lbs.
COMPACT, PORTABLE DESIGN
The telescoping and folding track design makes it light and compact (unlike the formidable big and bulky square rigid matte boxes that are so awkward to carry and to use). When fully collapsed and folded, the M35 will fit into a space just 5x51/4x13/4", and the M66 into 5x61/2x1 3/4 ". The Ultimatte Box is made polycarbonate and resin (LEXAN) and vinyl bonded nylon fabric. The Ultimatte Box attaches to your lenses via the lens mount ate which screws into the front of the lens and simply snaps i to a recess in the Ultimatte Box. For quick box interchangeability between different lenses, we recommend you order separate lens mount plates and fit each lens with its own mount plate.
Shpg. Wt. 1 1/2 lb,.
ADJUSTABLE CUSTOM LENSHOOD Its collapsible bellows provide custom lens hood control for lenses from very short wideangle to the long telephotos (28 to 200mm on 35mm). Such custom control eliminates flare and ghosts to a far greater extent than you thought possible; result: your photographs will have better color saturation and contrast (which make for a "sharper" picture appearance). accommodates 4 1/2" wide masks which are available in translucent or opaque material in a variety of shapes and patterns for creative vignettes, montages and split field effects—the sky's the limit.
THE FRONT MASK HOLDER
3x3" SQUARE FILTERS are accommodated in the built-in
rear slot. The adjustable, calibrated hood shades and protects the filters from any reflections or flare which might otherwise reach the filter and lens. The widest variety of special effect, color correction, neutral density and standard filters is available in 3x3".
SAVE ON ULTIMATTE BOX and SFS SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
0 20/
0
Buy $40 or more of any of the accessories Buy $60 offered for the ULTIMATTE BOX and SFS or more SYSTEM (except Filterholder/cap, Adapter and take Rings, Lens Mount Plates, or Kodak 'Gels') on these two pages at one time and take OFF THE PRICE OF THESE ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES 'or the ULTIMATTE BOX 10 pc. IRIS MODIFIER SET
$9.95 each All 4 for $34.95
G711"
1
$52.95
When we introduced the UltiMatte Box, Modern Photo g
Pros have long known that the matte box is their most versatile tool for a large variety of special lens effects—and also the most efficient variable lens hood for most every focal length lens they use. Our simple-to-use matte box is for the advanced amateur and the discriminating professional who wants a versatile, quality instrument, which is priced within his budget and provides him with a means of being creative beyond his fondest dreams. We appropriately call it the ULTIMATTE BOX SYSTEM.
SPECIAL EFFECT SET
FOR ULTIMATTE BOX Spiratone's Iris Modifier is based on the principle that out-of-focus highlights or light sources take on the shape of the iris diaphragm. Used with the Ultimatte Box you can create such fabulous effects as having the flames of wedding candles assume a heart shape, or turn car headlights into swirling pin-wheels ... there is no limit to the extraordinary effects you can create. The set of 10 pre-cut shapes (heart, star, pin-wheel, rosette, spokes (and 5 others) and 5 blanks for do-it-yourself shapes, all in a vinyl pouch, will enable you to add to your photographs a degree of creativity you may never before have thought possible. The Iris Modifier is best suited for use with moderate telephoto lenses (100-200mm focal length lenses on 35mm SLRs) and at maximum apertures.
Shipping Spiratone Iris Modifier Special Effect Set Weight 1/4 lb. per set Order No. 387002
$995
1A (Sky) • #8 (Yellow) • #12 (Deep Yellow)
TRICOLOR: 3 successive exposures with each of the additive primaries (red [t29], blue [447], green [461]) yield natural color on stationary subjects; shimmery multicolors on moving subjects. CONVERSION: 80A, 80B, 85, 85B CCO5 10 20 30 40 50 COLOR CORRECTION: All six (additive and subtractive) colors in graduated densities from CCO5 to CC50. Each of the above
$8.25
MAGENTA (M CYAN (C) RED (R) BLUE (B) GREEN (G) Buy :nodr t rzerea 'Gels' at
SAVE 10%
Other Wratten Gels available on specific request See also the rigid CC (pg. 451 and the custom screw-in CC filters (pg. 44).
$,3 .95
KODAK WRATTEN NEUTRAL DENSITY FILTERS ('GELS')
for 6x6cm for 35mm 12 1/4" sq.)
8 pc. VIGNETTER SET ...$8.95 8 pc. MONTAGE SET ..... 8.95 8 pc. POS/NEG MONTAGE SET ..10.95
KODAK WRATTEN GELATIN FILTERS ('GELS')
$9.95 9.95 11.95
See description on opposite page. Shipping Weight 1,t, lb. per set
ND: 2X (ND.3), 4X (ND.6), 8X (ND.9), 10X (ND1.0), 100X (ND2.0) 1% transmission for pre-flashing Each 1 Shipping Charge, 1 to 3 small items, 651, when shipped separately
ATTENTION ULTIMATTE BOX OWNERS
Only the following SFS items can be used with the Ultimatte Box: All Group A Filters;all Group B Filters except B-4; all Group C Filters. No other SFS items can be used with the Ultimatte Box.
47
It's easy to obtain these
SP
1.42AJJA at virtually give-away prices!
DON'T MISS THE MANY
FABULOUS "DEDUCT"
DISCOUNTS
6160
ON PRODUCTS THROUGHOUT THIS CATALOG.
Limit: One premium per order. Premium offers apply only to prepaid (or credit card) orders. Qualifying items must be selected from this catalog.
SEE PAGE 25 FOR DETAILS.
Premiums must be ordered at same time as qualifying items. Subsequent requests, even if made prior to receipt of shipment, cannot be honored.
Triple Darkroom alaltAla ti Timer ggPk
This compact (7 x 3 1/2 x VA"), micro-processor controlled AC-powered (no batteries needed!) countdown timer, ultra modern in appearance, with its large, easy-to-read LED display, is easy to program and easy to use—in bright light as well as darkness. Two separate timing ranges—up to 19 minutes, 59 seconds (displaying minutes and seconds) and 19 hours, 59 minutes (displaying hours and minutes). At the end of the set time interval there is an audible signal that continues until you stop it! Its uses are legion: virtually every photographic operation is easier when you use this timer; developing, fixing, washing, drying, activating and laminating times, long time exposures, developing instant prints—you can even use it to time your printing and enlarging exposure! What's more, you can control up to three separate operations simultaneously; and when it doesn't display a timing sequence, it shows the time of the day! It does all this with an accuracy that's unmatched by any electromechanical timer. Of course, you can use the timer for your household and business needs as well! Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
POWItt)*
I!
ONY,-
Even if you had to pay its regular $16.50 price, you'd agree
The Book of Special Effect Photography is fabulous. Sure, it tells you all about how to achieve special effects, not just by using the many accessories available, but some you can create without investing even a penny (techniques your camera manual doesn't discuss!) It also tells you about simple devices you can make yourself, effects you produce in the darkroom and in projection. But it doesn't stop there—it covers stereo and pinhole photography, tripods, studio and darkroom, work, all in clear, easy-to-follow language, with a wealth of illustrations, mostly in color. The well-known author, Michael Langford, is thoroughly familiar with his subjects and you'll find yourself referring to this book over and over again. 168 pages, hard cover.
WITH your $75 or more ourchase from this catalog. When bought separately, $34.95
WITH YOUR $25 or more purchase from this catalog. When bought separately, $16.50 Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
ONLY (
fit m
pRo '
Whether you're shooting the Macy's parade from curbside, photographing mushrooms in their natural habitat, or waiting for the mother bird to return to her nest—you'll appreciate the comfort and convenience of
Spiratone's Photo Seat/CaseTM FOR THE ON-THE-GO PHOTOGRAPHER Have you ever felt the need to sit down and rest after running around with your equipment? Or attempted to sort some of your accessories without putting something down on the ground? Here's a dual function camera bag/portable seat that will support up to 250 lbs. easily—and store most or all of your photo gear. Its ample size (9x13x9 1/2 "H), unstructured main compartment with full zipper front or rear access will easily accommodate several camera bodies, lenses, motor drives, flash units and much more. To make it even more versatile, the Photo Seat/Case has two side compartments: 13x21/2x71/2"H zippered compartment provides ample room for meters, film, filters, a small flash, etc.; and a full width pouch stores—for instant access—instructions, guides. maps, and other small flat items. The Spiratone Photo Seat/Case is a handsome tan color, weighs only 4 lbs. complete with folding seat; it is sturdily constructed of durable, weatherproof nylon with a reinforced vinyl base The 2/3" diameter steel seat frame opens instantly to enable you to use the seat and folds flat for carrying. The frame then serves as a convenient carry handle: if you prefer, you can also use the removable 2" wide, 40" long carry strap, for shoulder carrying. This is one of the most useful pieces of photographic equipment we've ever seen, even for the photographer who already owns one or more conventional bags. Shpg. Wt. 6 lbs.
Save up to 50% on your future purchases with Spiratone's
"10-50" BONUS CREDIT PLAN!
ONLY
rWITH your $75 or more purchase from this catalog. When bought
separately $34.95
Inc. 135-06 Northern Blvd. Flushing, N.Y. 11354-4063
BULK RATE U.S. POSTAGE PAID SPIRATONE. INC.
With every purchase from THIS catalog; you earn a 10% BONUS CREDIT good on FUTURE purchases for up to
500/ OFF HERE'S HOW IT WORKS:
With your current order, you will receive a "10-50" BONUS CREDIT equal to 10% of the purchase price. The "10-50" credit is valid from 30 to 180 days after date of issue. It is applicable against future purchases based on then current offers, equal to double or more the amount of the "10-50" credit. For example. if you were to
receive a $15 Bonus Credit with your present order, you'd pay only $15 for your next $30 purchase—a 50% saving. And you would again earn a 10% Bonus Credit toward the cost of your next order, and so on. Not valid for purchases of close-out and special sale items or inconjunction with other discount or bonus offers.
"To earn Bonus Credit, you must prepay your order with check or credit card; and use order form from this catalog, or write or phone, stating you are ordering from catalog #852. It's smart to deal with Spiratone—it's even smarter to keep dealing with Spiratone!
Place this peel-off label on order form, back of page 24A
If this is a duplicate catalog, please pass it on to an interested friend
